ML102920098: Difference between revisions
StriderTol (talk | contribs) (Created page by program invented by StriderTol) |
StriderTol (talk | contribs) (Created page by program invented by StriderTol) |
||
| Line 90: | Line 90: | ||
An assembly of prestressing steel and anchorage components which imparts prestressing forces to concrete.TENDON END ANCHORAGE ASSEMBLY: | An assembly of prestressing steel and anchorage components which imparts prestressing forces to concrete.TENDON END ANCHORAGE ASSEMBLY: | ||
That portion of the tendon which extends beyond the bearing plate while in a stressed condition which consists of the bearing plate, shim stack, anchor head and wire.TENDON TYPE: A tendon type is defined by its geometry and position in the containment structure; e.g., horizontal (hoop), vertical, and dome.TENDON LOCATION NUMBER: The identity of a tendon with regard to it's location in the structure. | That portion of the tendon which extends beyond the bearing plate while in a stressed condition which consists of the bearing plate, shim stack, anchor head and wire.TENDON TYPE: A tendon type is defined by its geometry and position in the containment structure; e.g., horizontal (hoop), vertical, and dome.TENDON LOCATION NUMBER: The identity of a tendon with regard to it's location in the structure. | ||
WIRE: 7 mm diameter wire manufactured to ASTM A421.104 DEF.CR3.SGR.F&Q ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 8 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 FIELD AND QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE MANUAL PERSONNEL SAFETY August 29, 2008 Page I of 5..... Revision,( ...Predsion Surveimance Corporation is 0 i "'PROGRESS ENERGY FLORIDA, INC.CRYSTAL RIVER NUCLEAR .UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT PRECISION SURVEILLANCE CORPORATION FIELD AND QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE PERSONNEL SAFETY Pr~epared' by A proved b ApproveciDy LEVEL II Q'.C.Title: PROJECT 'MANAGER, P.E Title ,PRESIDENT Title 08/29/08 Date 08129/08 Date 08&29/08 Date ,SafM y. 3SGUTH-q.oc ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 1.0 PURPOSE 1.1 The purpose of this document is to create awareness for those safety considerations that must be observed by those personnel working around or directly involved in Post Tensioning System operations. | WIRE: 7 mm diameter wire manufactured to ASTM A421.104 DEF.CR3.SGR.F&Q ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 8 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 FIELD AND QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE MANUAL PERSONNEL SAFETY August 29, 2008 Page I of 5..... Revision,( ...Predsion Surveimance Corporation is 0 i "'PROGRESS ENERGY FLORIDA, INC.CRYSTAL RIVER NUCLEAR .UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT PRECISION SURVEILLANCE CORPORATION FIELD AND QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE PERSONNEL SAFETY Pr~epared' by A proved b ApproveciDy LEVEL II Q'.C.Title: PROJECT 'MANAGER, P.E Title ,PRESIDENT Title 08/29/08 Date 08129/08 Date 08&29/08 Date ,SafM y. 3SGUTH-q.oc ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 | ||
2.0 GENERAL 2.1 All personnel directly involved with the Post-Tensioning System operations SHALL be made aware of the magnitude of the working forces and safety requirements for the various operations. | |||
3.0 SAFETY 3.1 WIRE 3.1.1 The wire used for fabricating the tendons has a minimum breaking strength of 240,000 pounds per square inch. This means that each 7mm diameter wire is capable of withstanding a minimum breaking load of 14,316 pounds per wire.Multiply this by the number of wires in a tendon and you are dealing with forces in excess of 2 million pounds for a 163 wire tendon.CAUTION: Never connect a welding ground, perform welding on, or strike an arc near a stressed tendon.CAUTION: Never apply an open flame to the button heads, the wires or anchorages of a stressed tendon. (Unless the tendon end is being Plasma Cut)[i 6 CAUTION: Never strike the button heads, the wires or the anchorheads of a stressed tendon with a hammer or any other metal object. I 3.1.2 The above actions could cause a button head or wire to fail. During tendon tensile testing, broken wires or button heads have been observed to penetrate hard lumber in excess or 4 inches in thickness, about the equivalent of a .32 caliber bullet.105 Safety.CR3SGR.F&Q Page 10 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 FIELD AND QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE MANUAL PERSONNEL SAFETY August 29, 2008 Page 3 of 5 Revision 0 3.2 STRESSING OPERATIONS During de-tensioning or stressing operations the following cautions SHALL be observed.3.2.1 CAUTION: Never exceed the overstress force or pressure -80% of tendon GUTS for a 163 wire tendon (or 11.452 kips per effective wire).CAUTION: DO NOT stand behind the jack when it is under load.IF, CATIN Keep fingers ou fany pinch areas.* CAUTION: Be alert during shim placement and removal.3.3 3.3.1 STRESSING ADAPTOR (COUPLER)Prior to applying ANY FORCE to the tendon, the stressing adaptor, coupler, must be fully engaged with the anchorage to be stressed or de-tensioned. | ===1.0 PURPOSE=== | ||
S CAUTION: Ensure the stressing adaptor (coupler) is fully engaged with the S anchorage before applying any load, regardless of how small that load might be.ATTACHMENT Z23R5 105 Safety.CR3SGR.F&Q Page 11 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 FIELD AND QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE MANUAL PERSONNEL SAFETY August 29, 2008 Page 4 of 5 Revision 0 3.4 GREASING OPERATIONS 3.4.1 During greasing operations the grease may be pumped under pressure and may have temperatures in excess of 150°F and injury could occur through carelessness. | 1.1 The purpose of this document is to create awareness for those safety considerations that must be observed by those personnel working around or directly involved in Post Tensioning System operations. | ||
===2.0 GENERAL=== | |||
2.1 All personnel directly involved with the Post-Tensioning System operations SHALL be made aware of the magnitude of the working forces and safety requirements for the various operations. | |||
===3.0 SAFETY=== | |||
3.1 WIRE 3.1.1 The wire used for fabricating the tendons has a minimum breaking strength of 240,000 pounds per square inch. This means that each 7mm diameter wire is capable of withstanding a minimum breaking load of 14,316 pounds per wire.Multiply this by the number of wires in a tendon and you are dealing with forces in excess of 2 million pounds for a 163 wire tendon.CAUTION: Never connect a welding ground, perform welding on, or strike an arc near a stressed tendon.CAUTION: Never apply an open flame to the button heads, the wires or anchorages of a stressed tendon. (Unless the tendon end is being Plasma Cut)[i 6 CAUTION: Never strike the button heads, the wires or the anchorheads of a stressed tendon with a hammer or any other metal object. I 3.1.2 The above actions could cause a button head or wire to fail. During tendon tensile testing, broken wires or button heads have been observed to penetrate hard lumber in excess or 4 inches in thickness, about the equivalent of a .32 caliber bullet.105 Safety.CR3SGR.F&Q Page 10 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 FIELD AND QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE MANUAL PERSONNEL SAFETY August 29, 2008 Page 3 of 5 Revision 0 3.2 STRESSING OPERATIONS During de-tensioning or stressing operations the following cautions SHALL be observed.3.2.1 CAUTION: Never exceed the overstress force or pressure -80% of tendon GUTS for a 163 wire tendon (or 11.452 kips per effective wire).CAUTION: DO NOT stand behind the jack when it is under load.IF, CATIN Keep fingers ou fany pinch areas.* CAUTION: Be alert during shim placement and removal.3.3 3.3.1 STRESSING ADAPTOR (COUPLER)Prior to applying ANY FORCE to the tendon, the stressing adaptor, coupler, must be fully engaged with the anchorage to be stressed or de-tensioned. | |||
S CAUTION: Ensure the stressing adaptor (coupler) is fully engaged with the S anchorage before applying any load, regardless of how small that load might be.ATTACHMENT Z23R5 105 Safety.CR3SGR.F&Q Page 11 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 FIELD AND QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE MANUAL PERSONNEL SAFETY August 29, 2008 Page 4 of 5 Revision 0 3.4 GREASING OPERATIONS | |||
====3.4.1 During==== | |||
greasing operations the grease may be pumped under pressure and may have temperatures in excess of 150°F and injury could occur through carelessness. | |||
It is therefore essential to avoid direct contact with the hot grease and to make sure all connections are secure. Exercise caution when climbing tendon buttress and gallery ladders. The potential for slippery surfaces created by grease on shoes exists. Ladder rung, etc. shall be wiped clean if coated in grease.3.4.2 During heating of grease be aware that belt heaters are hot and could cause injury if touched. It is also essential to ensure that no flammable materials are allowed to touch belt heaters when in operation. | It is therefore essential to avoid direct contact with the hot grease and to make sure all connections are secure. Exercise caution when climbing tendon buttress and gallery ladders. The potential for slippery surfaces created by grease on shoes exists. Ladder rung, etc. shall be wiped clean if coated in grease.3.4.2 During heating of grease be aware that belt heaters are hot and could cause injury if touched. It is also essential to ensure that no flammable materials are allowed to touch belt heaters when in operation. | ||
3.4.3 Belt heaters draw large amounts of current, ensure that power supply and any extension cords used are suitable for the power requirements. | 3.4.3 Belt heaters draw large amounts of current, ensure that power supply and any extension cords used are suitable for the power requirements. | ||
| Line 108: | Line 118: | ||
CORPORATION FIELD AND QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE SCOPE Apfvd by -" 111eLt LEVEL II Q.C..Title;.08/29/08 Date-I 4 i I-~ I PROJECT MANAGER, P E.08/29/08 Date Title PRESIDENT 08&29/08.Date Title ATTACHMENT Z23R5 01 2 0 S3c. | CORPORATION FIELD AND QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE SCOPE Apfvd by -" 111eLt LEVEL II Q.C..Title;.08/29/08 Date-I 4 i I-~ I PROJECT MANAGER, P E.08/29/08 Date Title PRESIDENT 08&29/08.Date Title ATTACHMENT Z23R5 01 2 0 S3c. | ||
PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 2.0 SCOPE August 29, 2008 Page 2 of 3 Revision 0 1.0 GENERAL: 1.1 A construction opening is required in the containment wall for the Crystal River Unit 3 (CR03) Steam Generator Replacement Project. In order to accomplish this task a total of 65 tendons will have to be removed or fully de-tensioned as determined by the owner.The services to be provided are applicable to Crystal River Unit 3.1.2 Generally, the scope of the work involves: 1.2.1 Plasma cut de-tension and removal of selected Vertical Tendons.1.2.2 Plasma cut de-tension and removal of selected Horizontal Tendons.1.2.3 After completion of all generator moving activities fully ram de-tension selected Vertical and Horizontal Tendons.1.2.4 Installation of new Vertical and Horizontal Tendons for those removed.1.2.5 Once released by Owner re-stress all replaced new Vertical and Horizontal Tendons and the Vertical and Horizontal Tendons fully de-tensioned. | PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 2.0 SCOPE August 29, 2008 Page 2 of 3 Revision 0 1.0 GENERAL: 1.1 A construction opening is required in the containment wall for the Crystal River Unit 3 (CR03) Steam Generator Replacement Project. In order to accomplish this task a total of 65 tendons will have to be removed or fully de-tensioned as determined by the owner.The services to be provided are applicable to Crystal River Unit 3.1.2 Generally, the scope of the work involves: 1.2.1 Plasma cut de-tension and removal of selected Vertical Tendons.1.2.2 Plasma cut de-tension and removal of selected Horizontal Tendons.1.2.3 After completion of all generator moving activities fully ram de-tension selected Vertical and Horizontal Tendons.1.2.4 Installation of new Vertical and Horizontal Tendons for those removed.1.2.5 Once released by Owner re-stress all replaced new Vertical and Horizontal Tendons and the Vertical and Horizontal Tendons fully de-tensioned. | ||
1.2.6 Install replacement tendon grease.2.0 2.1 2.2 2.3 SCOPE: There are 10 Vertical Tendons and 17 Horizontal Tendons to be removed and replaced with new tendons.There are 20 Vertical Tendons and 18 Horizontal Tendons to be fully de-tensioned. | |||
====1.2.6 Install==== | |||
replacement tendon grease.2.0 2.1 2.2 2.3 SCOPE: There are 10 Vertical Tendons and 17 Horizontal Tendons to be removed and replaced with new tendons.There are 20 Vertical Tendons and 18 Horizontal Tendons to be fully de-tensioned. | |||
Removal Tendons vertical Horizontal Horizontal Tendon No. Tendon No. Tendon No.34V8 42H27 53H27 34V9 42H28 53H28 34V10 42H29 53H29 34VII 42H30 53H30 34V12 421-31 531-31 34V13 42-3 531-32 34V14 421-33 531-33 34V15 421-34 53H34 34V16 53H35 34V17 107 F&Q2.0.CR3.SGR Page 17 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 2.0 SCOPE August 29, 2008 Page 3 of 3 Revision 0 2.4 Detension Tendons Vertical Vertical Tendon No. Tendon No.45V22 34V18 45V23 34V19 45V24 34V20 34V1 34V21 34V2 34V22 34V3 34V23 34V4 34V24 34V5 23V1 34V6 23V2 34V7 23V3 Horizontal Horizontal Tendon No. Tendon No.42H22 42H23 53H23 42H24 53H24 421125 531125 42H26 53H26 42H35 42H36 53H36 42H37 53H37 42H38 53H38 42H39 53H39__________________ | Removal Tendons vertical Horizontal Horizontal Tendon No. Tendon No. Tendon No.34V8 42H27 53H27 34V9 42H28 53H28 34V10 42H29 53H29 34VII 42H30 53H30 34V12 421-31 531-31 34V13 42-3 531-32 34V14 421-33 531-33 34V15 421-34 53H34 34V16 53H35 34V17 107 F&Q2.0.CR3.SGR Page 17 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 2.0 SCOPE August 29, 2008 Page 3 of 3 Revision 0 2.4 Detension Tendons Vertical Vertical Tendon No. Tendon No.45V22 34V18 45V23 34V19 45V24 34V20 34V1 34V21 34V2 34V22 34V3 34V23 34V4 34V24 34V5 23V1 34V6 23V2 34V7 23V3 Horizontal Horizontal Tendon No. Tendon No.42H22 42H23 53H23 42H24 53H24 421125 531125 42H26 53H26 42H35 42H36 53H36 42H37 53H37 42H38 53H38 42H39 53H39__________________ | ||
~I ________107 F&Q2.0.CR3.SGR Page 18 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 P | ~I ________107 F&Q2.0.CR3.SGR Page 18 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 P | ||
| Line 115: | Line 127: | ||
F&Q 3.0 RECEIVING, HANDLING ANDSTORAGE August 29 ,2008, Page 1 of5 Revision 0.Precision Surveillance Corporation PROGRESS ENERGY;FLORIDA, INC.CRYSTAL RIVER NUCLEAR UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT PRECISION SURVEILLANCE CORPORATION FIELD AND QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE RECEIVING, HANDLING AND STORAGE LEVEL /I Q.C.08,208 Date' Frrepared by Apprkived by ---A~pprovepD Title PROJECT MANAGER, P.E.Title PRESIDENT Title 08&29/08 Date 08&29/08 Date ATTACHMENT Z23R5 08 rl qwo loc PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 3.0 RECEIVING, HANDLING AND STORAGE August 29, 2008 Page 2 of 5 Revision 0 1.0 PURPOSE 1.1 This procedure will establish the requirements for the receiving, storage and handling of materials and quality control inspections/data recording for the vertical and horizontal tendon work during the Steam Generator Replacement Project at Crystal River unit 3.2.0 SCOPE 2.1 Equipment and material shall be received by owner, unloaded by owner and stored at an area at the jobsite as designated. | F&Q 3.0 RECEIVING, HANDLING ANDSTORAGE August 29 ,2008, Page 1 of5 Revision 0.Precision Surveillance Corporation PROGRESS ENERGY;FLORIDA, INC.CRYSTAL RIVER NUCLEAR UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT PRECISION SURVEILLANCE CORPORATION FIELD AND QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE RECEIVING, HANDLING AND STORAGE LEVEL /I Q.C.08,208 Date' Frrepared by Apprkived by ---A~pprovepD Title PROJECT MANAGER, P.E.Title PRESIDENT Title 08&29/08 Date 08&29/08 Date ATTACHMENT Z23R5 08 rl qwo loc PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 3.0 RECEIVING, HANDLING AND STORAGE August 29, 2008 Page 2 of 5 Revision 0 1.0 PURPOSE 1.1 This procedure will establish the requirements for the receiving, storage and handling of materials and quality control inspections/data recording for the vertical and horizontal tendon work during the Steam Generator Replacement Project at Crystal River unit 3.2.0 SCOPE 2.1 Equipment and material shall be received by owner, unloaded by owner and stored at an area at the jobsite as designated. | ||
Material must be released by owner prior to shipment and receipt inspected by owner.2.2 The materials shall be received, stored and handled in accordance with ANSI N45.2.2. All instrumentation shall be classified Level B. Sheathing filler material, replacement tendon shipping containers, removed tendons and anchor heads and shims shall be Level C. All other materials and equipment shall be Level D. Owner will establish and maintain appropriate storage areas and levels while onsite.3.0 RESPONSIBILITY 3.1 Owner Field Construction Personnel shall be responsible for the physical activities associated with this procedure. | Material must be released by owner prior to shipment and receipt inspected by owner.2.2 The materials shall be received, stored and handled in accordance with ANSI N45.2.2. All instrumentation shall be classified Level B. Sheathing filler material, replacement tendon shipping containers, removed tendons and anchor heads and shims shall be Level C. All other materials and equipment shall be Level D. Owner will establish and maintain appropriate storage areas and levels while onsite.3.0 RESPONSIBILITY | ||
3.2 Owner Quality Control Personnel to perform all inspections and data recording. | |||
===3.1 Owner=== | |||
Field Construction Personnel shall be responsible for the physical activities associated with this procedure. | |||
===3.2 Owner=== | |||
Quality Control Personnel to perform all inspections and data recording. | |||
==4.0 QUALIFICATIONS== | ==4.0 QUALIFICATIONS== | ||
4.1 Owner Field Construction Personnel shall be fit by skill, training and/or experience to perform these duties.4.2 Owner Quality Control Personnel shall be qualified to a minimum of Level II capability in accordance with the requirements of ANSI N45.2.6.5.0 EQUIPMENT 5.1 Cranes, forklifts as needed.5.2 Miscellaneous shackles, slings, etc.108 F&03.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 20 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 3.0 RECEIVING, HANDLING AND STORAGE August 29, 2008 Page 3 of 5 Revision 0 6.0 PRECAUTIONS 6.1 Respect for the safety and well-being of the other trades and personnel in the area must be observed, especially during hoisting operations. | |||
===4.1 Owner=== | |||
Field Construction Personnel shall be fit by skill, training and/or experience to perform these duties.4.2 Owner Quality Control Personnel shall be qualified to a minimum of Level II capability in accordance with the requirements of ANSI N45.2.6.5.0 EQUIPMENT 5.1 Cranes, forklifts as needed.5.2 Miscellaneous shackles, slings, etc.108 F&03.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 20 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 3.0 RECEIVING, HANDLING AND STORAGE August 29, 2008 Page 3 of 5 Revision 0 6.0 PRECAUTIONS | |||
===6.1 Respect=== | |||
for the safety and well-being of the other trades and personnel in the area must be observed, especially during hoisting operations. | |||
CAUTION DO NOT STAND UNDER LOADS WHILE STATIONARY OR DURING HOISTING. | CAUTION DO NOT STAND UNDER LOADS WHILE STATIONARY OR DURING HOISTING. | ||
DO NOT PERMIT OTHERS TO STAND UNDER LOADS.7.0 QUALITY CONTROL DOCUMENTATION AND HOLD POINTS 7.1 All Quality Control Documentation (QCD) points noted in this procedure are HOLD POINTS. The work shall not progress past or through a QCD without a verbal release from the Inspector. | DO NOT PERMIT OTHERS TO STAND UNDER LOADS.7.0 QUALITY CONTROL DOCUMENTATION AND HOLD POINTS 7.1 All Quality Control Documentation (QCD) points noted in this procedure are HOLD POINTS. The work shall not progress past or through a QCD without a verbal release from the Inspector. | ||
| Line 126: | Line 148: | ||
-Grease (sheathing filler) when received in bulk tanker trucks shall be offloaded into onsite storage tank provided by PSC. During offloading two one quart samples of the grease shall be obtained by the Owner Inspector identified and turned over for testing if needed.9.2.1.1 The temperature in the storage tank can be maintained ucp to 250'F while product is being actively used, and dropped down to 150 F or heat turned off when product will not be used at Owner Supervision's determination. | -Grease (sheathing filler) when received in bulk tanker trucks shall be offloaded into onsite storage tank provided by PSC. During offloading two one quart samples of the grease shall be obtained by the Owner Inspector identified and turned over for testing if needed.9.2.1.1 The temperature in the storage tank can be maintained ucp to 250'F while product is being actively used, and dropped down to 150 F or heat turned off when product will not be used at Owner Supervision's determination. | ||
Product in the tank must be above the coils when the heat is turned off so the product can be easily reheated, otherwise new hot material may have to be added to get the system activated to heat up. Temperature of product should not exceed 250°F during storage.108 F&Q3.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 21 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 9.2.1.2 Grease from the storage tank may be transferred to 55 gal. drums or other containers for possible hand pumping and pouring of grease into some of the tendon void ends. If this is done containers should be clean (free of dirt, debris, water and any other possible source on contamination) and be protected from the elements after filling to prevent contamination by chlorides, sulfides, nitrates, and water.9.2.2 If drums of grease are received they shall be stored on dunnage in a well drained area and be covered with plastic or tarps to protect them from the environment. | Product in the tank must be above the coils when the heat is turned off so the product can be easily reheated, otherwise new hot material may have to be added to get the system activated to heat up. Temperature of product should not exceed 250°F during storage.108 F&Q3.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 21 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 9.2.1.2 Grease from the storage tank may be transferred to 55 gal. drums or other containers for possible hand pumping and pouring of grease into some of the tendon void ends. If this is done containers should be clean (free of dirt, debris, water and any other possible source on contamination) and be protected from the elements after filling to prevent contamination by chlorides, sulfides, nitrates, and water.9.2.2 If drums of grease are received they shall be stored on dunnage in a well drained area and be covered with plastic or tarps to protect them from the environment. | ||
9.3 STORAGE AND HANDLING INSTRUMENTATION 9.3.1 All instrumentation except hydraulic rams when not in use shall be stored in tool trailers or indoor office space to protect from environmental and possible accidental damage.9.3.1.1 The hydraulic rams when not in use may be stored on dunnage and placed to prevent accidental damage.9.4 STORAGE AND HANDLING TENDONS, ANCHOR HEADS AND SHIMS 9.4.1 Tendons and anchorage hardware when removed from the containment shall be stored at the jobsite until scrapped or shipped offsite in accordance with the requirements of Owners applicable procedures. | |||
===9.3 STORAGE=== | |||
AND HANDLING INSTRUMENTATION 9.3.1 All instrumentation except hydraulic rams when not in use shall be stored in tool trailers or indoor office space to protect from environmental and possible accidental damage.9.3.1.1 The hydraulic rams when not in use may be stored on dunnage and placed to prevent accidental damage.9.4 STORAGE AND HANDLING TENDONS, ANCHOR HEADS AND SHIMS 9.4.1 Tendons and anchorage hardware when removed from the containment shall be stored at the jobsite until scrapped or shipped offsite in accordance with the requirements of Owners applicable procedures. | |||
9.4.1.1 Minimum storage for new material at the jobsite is to be in a well drained area with the items placed on pallets, racks or in boxes or on dunnage and covered to provide protection from the weather and possible contamination including exposure to direct sunlight.9.4.1.2 All material will be handled using appropriate equipment, slings, chains, etc. to prevent damage or contamination. | 9.4.1.1 Minimum storage for new material at the jobsite is to be in a well drained area with the items placed on pallets, racks or in boxes or on dunnage and covered to provide protection from the weather and possible contamination including exposure to direct sunlight.9.4.1.2 All material will be handled using appropriate equipment, slings, chains, etc. to prevent damage or contamination. | ||
10.0 DOCUMENTATION 10.1 The items requiring documentation in this procedure shall be documented by the Owner Quality Control Inspector on Data Sheet F&Q 3.0 or, Data Sheet F&Q 3.OA attached to this procedure or Owner Receipt/Storage Inspection Forms.11.0 QUALITY CONTROL 11.1 For materials received, a preliminary visual inspection or examination shall be performed prior to unloading or placing into storage to determine if any damage occurred during shipping. | 10.0 DOCUMENTATION 10.1 The items requiring documentation in this procedure shall be documented by the Owner Quality Control Inspector on Data Sheet F&Q 3.0 or, Data Sheet F&Q 3.OA attached to this procedure or Owner Receipt/Storage Inspection Forms.11.0 QUALITY CONTROL 11.1 For materials received, a preliminary visual inspection or examination shall be performed prior to unloading or placing into storage to determine if any damage occurred during shipping. | ||
| Line 141: | Line 165: | ||
________ ++t 4 t t I** I.IF MATERIAL IS FOUND DAMAGED OR REQUIRES RECONDITIONING, STATE THE PROBLEM BELOW AND CORRECTIVE ACTION PERFORMED. | ________ ++t 4 t t I** I.IF MATERIAL IS FOUND DAMAGED OR REQUIRES RECONDITIONING, STATE THE PROBLEM BELOW AND CORRECTIVE ACTION PERFORMED. | ||
Q.C. INSPECTOR SIGNOFF: Q.C. REVIEW: LEVEL: DATE: LEVEL: DATE: 108 F&Q3.0.CR3.SGR Page 25 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Ql 3.1 EQUIPMENT PROOF TEST A -August 29, 2008'Page 1 of.4 Precision Surveillance Corporation, Revision PROGRESS ENERGY FLORIDA, INC.CRYSTAL RIVER NUCLEAR UNIT 3, STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT PRECISION SURVEILLANCE CORPORATION FIELD AND QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE EQUIPMENT PROOF TEST LEVEL II Q, C.Title Aporoved by PROJECT MANAGER, P.E.08/29/08 Date 08/29/08 Date 08/29/08 Date Title PRESIDENT Title ATTACHMENT Z23R5 09 FN1i,3M6ac PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 lam PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 3.1 EQUIPMENT PROOF TEST August 29, 2008 Page 2 of 4 Revision 0 11.0 PURPOSE 1.1 This procedure will establish the requirements for the proof testing of tensioning equipment and quality control inspections/data recording for the vertical and horizontal tendon work during the Steam Generator Replacement Project for Crystal River Unit 3. The proof-test shall demonstrate that the equipment functions safely under the most severe anticipated field conditions, and under maximum possible load, eccentricity, and misalignment. | Q.C. INSPECTOR SIGNOFF: Q.C. REVIEW: LEVEL: DATE: LEVEL: DATE: 108 F&Q3.0.CR3.SGR Page 25 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Ql 3.1 EQUIPMENT PROOF TEST A -August 29, 2008'Page 1 of.4 Precision Surveillance Corporation, Revision PROGRESS ENERGY FLORIDA, INC.CRYSTAL RIVER NUCLEAR UNIT 3, STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT PRECISION SURVEILLANCE CORPORATION FIELD AND QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE EQUIPMENT PROOF TEST LEVEL II Q, C.Title Aporoved by PROJECT MANAGER, P.E.08/29/08 Date 08/29/08 Date 08/29/08 Date Title PRESIDENT Title ATTACHMENT Z23R5 09 FN1i,3M6ac PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 lam PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 3.1 EQUIPMENT PROOF TEST August 29, 2008 Page 2 of 4 Revision 0 11.0 PURPOSE 1.1 This procedure will establish the requirements for the proof testing of tensioning equipment and quality control inspections/data recording for the vertical and horizontal tendon work during the Steam Generator Replacement Project for Crystal River Unit 3. The proof-test shall demonstrate that the equipment functions safely under the most severe anticipated field conditions, and under maximum possible load, eccentricity, and misalignment. | ||
2.0 SCOPE 2;.1 Each set of tensioning equipment shall be proof tested and after proof testing shall be inspected prior to delivery to the jobsite.2'.2 Owner should be notified 14 days prior to the test so that they have the option to witness the test.3:.0 RESPONSIBILITY 3".1 Precision Surveillance Corporation Shop Personnel shall be responsible for the physical activities associated with this procedure. | |||
3.2 Precision Surveillance Corporation, Quality Control or Engineering Personnel to perform all inspections and data recording. | ===2.0 SCOPE=== | ||
2;.1 Each set of tensioning equipment shall be proof tested and after proof testing shall be inspected prior to delivery to the jobsite.2'.2 Owner should be notified 14 days prior to the test so that they have the option to witness the test.3:.0 RESPONSIBILITY 3".1 Precision Surveillance Corporation Shop Personnel shall be responsible for the physical activities associated with this procedure. | |||
===3.2 Precision=== | |||
Surveillance Corporation, Quality Control or Engineering Personnel to perform all inspections and data recording. | |||
==4.0 QUALIFICATIONS== | ==4.0 QUALIFICATIONS== | ||
4.1 Precision Surveillance Corporation Shop Personnel shall be fit by skill, training and/or experience to perform these duties.4.2 Precision Surveillance Corporation Quality Control Personnel shall be qualified to a minimum Level II capability in accordance with the requirements of ANSI N45.2.6.4.3 Precision Surveillance Corporation Engineering Personnel shall have a four year degree from an accredited institution. | |||
5.0 EQUIPMENT 5.1 Ram Calibration Stand 5.2 Hydraulic Pump 5.3 Hydraulic Ram with jack chair, pullrod with nut, and rod adaptor.5.4 Hydraulic Pressure Gauge.5.5 Miscellaneous hoses and connections. | ===4.1 Precision=== | ||
Surveillance Corporation Shop Personnel shall be fit by skill, training and/or experience to perform these duties.4.2 Precision Surveillance Corporation Quality Control Personnel shall be qualified to a minimum Level II capability in accordance with the requirements of ANSI N45.2.6.4.3 Precision Surveillance Corporation Engineering Personnel shall have a four year degree from an accredited institution. | |||
===5.0 EQUIPMENT=== | |||
5.1 Ram Calibration Stand 5.2 Hydraulic Pump 5.3 Hydraulic Ram with jack chair, pullrod with nut, and rod adaptor.5.4 Hydraulic Pressure Gauge.5.5 Miscellaneous hoses and connections. | |||
109 F&Q3.1.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 27 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 | 109 F&Q3.1.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 27 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 | ||
-PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 3.1 EQUIPMENT PROOF TEST August 29, 2008 Page 3 of 4 Revision 0 6.0 PRECAUTIONS 6.1 Respect for the safety and well being of other personnel in the area must be observed.6.2 Prior to applying any force to the tensioning equipment assure that all load bearing threaded connections are fully engaged.6.3 During proof testing the following cautions shall be observed.CAUTION DO NOT STAND BEHIND THE RAM WHEN IT IS UNDER LOAD KEEP FINGERS OUT OF ANY PINCH AREAS 7.0 QUALITY CONTROL DOCUMENTATION AND HOLD POINTS 7.1 All Quality Control Documentation (QCD) points noted in this procedure are HOLD POINTS. The work shall not progress past or through a QCD without a verbal release from the Inspector or Engineer.8.0 PREREQUISITES 8.1 Owner should have been notified 14 days prior to the test so that they have the option to witness the test.8,2 Prior to performing this proof-test the tensioning equipment will have been calibrated in accordance with PSC Procedure QA 12.8.G-W.9.0 PROCEDURE 9.1 QCD-HOLD POINT- Set up the ram assembly so that the ram is out of alignment with the test stand by 3/16". (The test may also be performed by butting two ram assemblies together and obtaining the 3/16" misalignment in this way two ram assemblies are tested at the same time.)9.1.1 This eccentric position of the ram is the maximum that can occur in the field when the ram is positioned on the tendon bearing plate.9.2 QCD-HOLD POINT- The ram will be pressurized to a force of 1979KIPS and held at that force for approximately 5 seconds.9.2.1 This 1979 KIPS is 106 percent of the maximum working load of 1867 KIPS fora 163 wire tendon.9.3 QCD-HOLD POINT- While at maximum pressure, from a safe vantage point, inspect ram for hydraulic fluid leaks.109 F&Q3.1.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 28 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 3.1 EQUIPMENT PROOF TEST August 29, 2008 Page 4 of 4 Revision 0 9.4 QCD-HOLD POINT- After testing the ram shall be removed from the test stand or from the other ram and all components visually inspected for damage or defects.10.0 DOCUMENTATION 10.1 The items requiring documentation in this procedure shall be documented by the PSC Quality Control Inspector or Engineer on Data Sheet F&Q 3.1 attached to this procedure. | -PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 3.1 EQUIPMENT PROOF TEST August 29, 2008 Page 3 of 4 Revision 0 6.0 PRECAUTIONS | ||
===6.1 Respect=== | |||
for the safety and well being of other personnel in the area must be observed.6.2 Prior to applying any force to the tensioning equipment assure that all load bearing threaded connections are fully engaged.6.3 During proof testing the following cautions shall be observed.CAUTION DO NOT STAND BEHIND THE RAM WHEN IT IS UNDER LOAD KEEP FINGERS OUT OF ANY PINCH AREAS 7.0 QUALITY CONTROL DOCUMENTATION AND HOLD POINTS 7.1 All Quality Control Documentation (QCD) points noted in this procedure are HOLD POINTS. The work shall not progress past or through a QCD without a verbal release from the Inspector or Engineer.8.0 PREREQUISITES | |||
===8.1 Owner=== | |||
should have been notified 14 days prior to the test so that they have the option to witness the test.8,2 Prior to performing this proof-test the tensioning equipment will have been calibrated in accordance with PSC Procedure QA 12.8.G-W.9.0 PROCEDURE 9.1 QCD-HOLD POINT- Set up the ram assembly so that the ram is out of alignment with the test stand by 3/16". (The test may also be performed by butting two ram assemblies together and obtaining the 3/16" misalignment in this way two ram assemblies are tested at the same time.)9.1.1 This eccentric position of the ram is the maximum that can occur in the field when the ram is positioned on the tendon bearing plate.9.2 QCD-HOLD POINT- The ram will be pressurized to a force of 1979KIPS and held at that force for approximately 5 seconds.9.2.1 This 1979 KIPS is 106 percent of the maximum working load of 1867 KIPS fora 163 wire tendon.9.3 QCD-HOLD POINT- While at maximum pressure, from a safe vantage point, inspect ram for hydraulic fluid leaks.109 F&Q3.1.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 28 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 3.1 EQUIPMENT PROOF TEST August 29, 2008 Page 4 of 4 Revision 0 9.4 QCD-HOLD POINT- After testing the ram shall be removed from the test stand or from the other ram and all components visually inspected for damage or defects.10.0 DOCUMENTATION 10.1 The items requiring documentation in this procedure shall be documented by the PSC Quality Control Inspector or Engineer on Data Sheet F&Q 3.1 attached to this procedure. | |||
11.0 QUALITY CONTROL 11.1 Document date of proof test.11.2 Document acceptance of 3/16" eccentric alignment. | 11.0 QUALITY CONTROL 11.1 Document date of proof test.11.2 Document acceptance of 3/16" eccentric alignment. | ||
11.3 Document acceptance of 1979 KIPS force being held for 5 seconds.11.4 Document no hydraulic fluid leaks at pressure.11.5 Document the identity number of the ram, stressing rod, pull rod, pull rod nut and jack chair as applicable being proof tested.11.6 Document the acceptance of visual examinations after proof test.12.0 NOTIFICATION 12.1 PSC Quality Control Inspector or Engineer must be notified prior to working through a QCD-HOLD POINT.13.0 ATTACHMENTS 13.1 Data Sheet F&Q 3.1 109 F&Q3.1.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 29 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 3.1 EQUIPMENT PROOF TEST DATA SHEET F&Q 3.1 August 29, 2008 Page 1 of 1 Revision 0 TENSIONING EQUIPMENT PROOF TEST DOCUMENTATION PROJECT: CRYSTAL RIVER UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT DATE OF PROOF TEST: (9.1) 3/16" ECCENTRIC ALIGNMENT: | 11.3 Document acceptance of 1979 KIPS force being held for 5 seconds.11.4 Document no hydraulic fluid leaks at pressure.11.5 Document the identity number of the ram, stressing rod, pull rod, pull rod nut and jack chair as applicable being proof tested.11.6 Document the acceptance of visual examinations after proof test.12.0 NOTIFICATION 12.1 PSC Quality Control Inspector or Engineer must be notified prior to working through a QCD-HOLD POINT.13.0 ATTACHMENTS 13.1 Data Sheet F&Q 3.1 109 F&Q3.1.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 29 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 3.1 EQUIPMENT PROOF TEST DATA SHEET F&Q 3.1 August 29, 2008 Page 1 of 1 Revision 0 TENSIONING EQUIPMENT PROOF TEST DOCUMENTATION PROJECT: CRYSTAL RIVER UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT DATE OF PROOF TEST: (9.1) 3/16" ECCENTRIC ALIGNMENT: | ||
| Line 155: | Line 195: | ||
==3.0 RESPONSIBILITY== | ==3.0 RESPONSIBILITY== | ||
3.1 Owner Field Construction Personnel shall be responsible for the physical activities associated with this procedure. | |||
===3.1 Owner=== | |||
Field Construction Personnel shall be responsible for the physical activities associated with this procedure. | |||
==4.0 QUALIFICATIONS== | ==4.0 QUALIFICATIONS== | ||
4.1 Owner Field Construction Personnel shall be fit by skill, training and/or experience to perform these duties.5.0 EQUIPMENT 5.1 Miscellaneous Tools, wrenches, ratchets, sockets, shackles, come-alongs, etc.5.2 Plastic bags, plastic sheeting (Visqueen), rags, buckets or drums for waste grease.5.3 Device to depress end cap check valve.5,.4 A source of dry air (if required). | |||
===4.1 Owner=== | |||
Field Construction Personnel shall be fit by skill, training and/or experience to perform these duties.5.0 EQUIPMENT 5.1 Miscellaneous Tools, wrenches, ratchets, sockets, shackles, come-alongs, etc.5.2 Plastic bags, plastic sheeting (Visqueen), rags, buckets or drums for waste grease.5.3 Device to depress end cap check valve.5,.4 A source of dry air (if required). | |||
5.5 Air hose and fittings (if required). | 5.5 Air hose and fittings (if required). | ||
| Line 165: | Line 209: | ||
Respect for the safety and well-being of the other trades and personnel in the area must be observed, especially during hoisting operations. | Respect for the safety and well-being of the other trades and personnel in the area must be observed, especially during hoisting operations. | ||
6.2 A tendon grease cap weighs in excess of 100 pounds and may contain about 100 pounds of grease. Be prepared to support this weight when the grease cap is unbolted and removed.110 F&Q5.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 32 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 5.0 TENDON INITIAL DEGREASING AND CAP REMOVAL August 29, 2008 Page 3 of 4 Revision 0 Revision 1, 8/19/09 6.3 The sheathing filler (grease) may be in liquid, gel or solid form. Tendons in the area of steam or feed penetrations in operating plants, may contain hot grease and some caution should be exercised. | 6.2 A tendon grease cap weighs in excess of 100 pounds and may contain about 100 pounds of grease. Be prepared to support this weight when the grease cap is unbolted and removed.110 F&Q5.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 32 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 5.0 TENDON INITIAL DEGREASING AND CAP REMOVAL August 29, 2008 Page 3 of 4 Revision 0 Revision 1, 8/19/09 6.3 The sheathing filler (grease) may be in liquid, gel or solid form. Tendons in the area of steam or feed penetrations in operating plants, may contain hot grease and some caution should be exercised. | ||
6.4 Spilled grease from hoses and voids could be a slipping safety hazard, during all operations it should be cleaned up and placed in waste drums.CAUTION NEVER STRIKE THE BUTTONHEADS, THE WIRES, OR THE ANCHORAGES OF A STRESSED TENDON WITH A HAMMER OR ANY OTHER OBJECT UNLESS AUTHORIZED. | |||
HAVE SUFFICIENT QUANTITIES OR SIZES OF CONTAINERS ON HAND TO CATCH THE GREASE, AS IT MAY FALL FROM THE TENDON VOID, ANCHORAGE OR GREASE CAP.7.0 QUALITY CONTROL DOCUMENTATION AND HOLD POINTS 7.1 None.8.0 PREREQUISITES 8.1 Assure this tendon is scheduled to have its grease removed.9.0 PROCEDURE 9.1 INITIAL VERTICAL TENDON DEGREASING 9.1.1 In the tendon gallery locate the grease cap of the tendon to be degreased, place visqueen on the floor and up the walls to desired height and secure with tape.9.1.2 Place an empty 55 gallon drum under the cap.9.1.3 Remove the plug from the grease cap and attach device to depress end cap check valve. Have the plug from the top grease cap removed to allow the tendon to gravity drain. At the field superintendent's option for those tendons being removed the grease cap in the gallery may be removed to assist draining.9.1.4 Note for those tendons not to be removed and replaced care should be taken to prevent rain or contamination from entering the cap while the plug is removed.9.1.5 Full drums are replaced with another empty drum until the tendon is drained.9.1.6 If it is determined that enough of the grease has not been removed by gravity draining an air hose may be attached to the top grease cap inlet and air pressure (not to exceed 100 psig) may be used to further degrease the tendon void. Be sure that adequate communication is provided at each end of the tendon so that each crew will know what actions are taking place.9.1.7 Replace the grease cap plugs on both ends.of the tendon after the tendon is degreased and identify on each grease cap that the tendon has been degreased. | ===6.4 Spilled=== | ||
grease from hoses and voids could be a slipping safety hazard, during all operations it should be cleaned up and placed in waste drums.CAUTION NEVER STRIKE THE BUTTONHEADS, THE WIRES, OR THE ANCHORAGES OF A STRESSED TENDON WITH A HAMMER OR ANY OTHER OBJECT UNLESS AUTHORIZED. | |||
HAVE SUFFICIENT QUANTITIES OR SIZES OF CONTAINERS ON HAND TO CATCH THE GREASE, AS IT MAY FALL FROM THE TENDON VOID, ANCHORAGE OR GREASE CAP.7.0 QUALITY CONTROL DOCUMENTATION AND HOLD POINTS 7.1 None.8.0 PREREQUISITES | |||
===8.1 Assure=== | |||
this tendon is scheduled to have its grease removed.9.0 PROCEDURE 9.1 INITIAL VERTICAL TENDON DEGREASING 9.1.1 In the tendon gallery locate the grease cap of the tendon to be degreased, place visqueen on the floor and up the walls to desired height and secure with tape.9.1.2 Place an empty 55 gallon drum under the cap.9.1.3 Remove the plug from the grease cap and attach device to depress end cap check valve. Have the plug from the top grease cap removed to allow the tendon to gravity drain. At the field superintendent's option for those tendons being removed the grease cap in the gallery may be removed to assist draining.9.1.4 Note for those tendons not to be removed and replaced care should be taken to prevent rain or contamination from entering the cap while the plug is removed.9.1.5 Full drums are replaced with another empty drum until the tendon is drained.9.1.6 If it is determined that enough of the grease has not been removed by gravity draining an air hose may be attached to the top grease cap inlet and air pressure (not to exceed 100 psig) may be used to further degrease the tendon void. Be sure that adequate communication is provided at each end of the tendon so that each crew will know what actions are taking place.9.1.7 Replace the grease cap plugs on both ends.of the tendon after the tendon is degreased and identify on each grease cap that the tendon has been degreased. | |||
110 F&Q5.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 33 of 130 PCHG-DIESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 5.0 TENDON INITIAL DEGREASING AND CAP REMOVAL August 29, 2008 Page 4 of 4 Revision 0 Revision 1, 8/19/09 9.1.8 On tendons to be removed bottom anchorages can be covered with a bag for protection instead of replacing the cap.9.1.9 Remove waste grease drums for disposal offsite in accordance with the requirements of Owners applicable procedures and clean up any spilled grease.10.0 REMOVAL OF GREASE CAP (VERTICAL OR HOOP)10.1 Position platforms, if required, at the end of the tendon to have the cap removed.1 0.2 Place a container and/or a protective cover under the tendon grease cap to protect adjacent areas from dripping grease.10.3 Remove the bulk filler plug from the tendon end cap and depress the check valve to allow any excess pressure and/or bulk filler grease to escape. Reinstall plug after depressurization. | 110 F&Q5.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 33 of 130 PCHG-DIESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 5.0 TENDON INITIAL DEGREASING AND CAP REMOVAL August 29, 2008 Page 4 of 4 Revision 0 Revision 1, 8/19/09 9.1.8 On tendons to be removed bottom anchorages can be covered with a bag for protection instead of replacing the cap.9.1.9 Remove waste grease drums for disposal offsite in accordance with the requirements of Owners applicable procedures and clean up any spilled grease.10.0 REMOVAL OF GREASE CAP (VERTICAL OR HOOP)10.1 Position platforms, if required, at the end of the tendon to have the cap removed.1 0.2 Place a container and/or a protective cover under the tendon grease cap to protect adjacent areas from dripping grease.10.3 Remove the bulk filler plug from the tendon end cap and depress the check valve to allow any excess pressure and/or bulk filler grease to escape. Reinstall plug after depressurization. | ||
10.4 Remove the three (3) nuts and washers holding the end cap to the bearing plate Ai ensuring that the end cap is fully supported as the nuts are being removed.10.5 Carefully, remove the grease cap to prevent any foreign matter from dropping into the grease in that cap. Remove the three 3/4" x 4-1/2" studs.10.6 Clean and collect the grease from the grease cap.10.7 For detensioned and not removed tendons only, determine the amount of grease that may have been lost during removal of the grease cap, plus the amount of grease removed from the anchorage during cleaning and record on Data Sheet F&Q 5.0.11.0 DOCUMENTATION 11.1 The items requiring documentation in this procedure shall be documented by the assigned field construction person of the working crew on Data Sheet F&Q 5.0 attached to this procedure or the documentation provided in the Owner Work Package.12.0 QUALITY CONTROL 12.1 None.13.0 NOTIFICATION 13.1 Owner Field Supervision to be notified if any problems are encountered during the degreasing operations. | 10.4 Remove the three (3) nuts and washers holding the end cap to the bearing plate Ai ensuring that the end cap is fully supported as the nuts are being removed.10.5 Carefully, remove the grease cap to prevent any foreign matter from dropping into the grease in that cap. Remove the three 3/4" x 4-1/2" studs.10.6 Clean and collect the grease from the grease cap.10.7 For detensioned and not removed tendons only, determine the amount of grease that may have been lost during removal of the grease cap, plus the amount of grease removed from the anchorage during cleaning and record on Data Sheet F&Q 5.0.11.0 DOCUMENTATION 11.1 The items requiring documentation in this procedure shall be documented by the assigned field construction person of the working crew on Data Sheet F&Q 5.0 attached to this procedure or the documentation provided in the Owner Work Package.12.0 QUALITY CONTROL 12.1 None.13.0 NOTIFICATION 13.1 Owner Field Supervision to be notified if any problems are encountered during the degreasing operations. | ||
| Line 176: | Line 225: | ||
CORPORATION1 FIELD AND. QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE, TENDON DETENSIONINGIREMOVAL FOR, POSSIBLE REUSE QAA MANAGERTitl .PROJECT MANAGER, P.E.Datell.Date.Approved by TitleI Approved by PRESIDENT' | CORPORATION1 FIELD AND. QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE, TENDON DETENSIONINGIREMOVAL FOR, POSSIBLE REUSE QAA MANAGERTitl .PROJECT MANAGER, P.E.Datell.Date.Approved by TitleI Approved by PRESIDENT' | ||
'Title: 1Date ATTACHMENT Z23R5 I OatF&Q6B.oCR3:SGR.doc Page 36 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 6.0 TENDON DETENSIONINGIREMOVAL FOR POSSIBLE REUSE September 16, 2009 Page 2 of 8 Revision 0 1.0 PURPOSE 1.1 This procedure will establish the requirements for hydraulic ram de-tensioning and removal of tendons for possible reuse at Crystal River Unit 3 during the Steam Generator Replacement Project.2.0 SCOPE 2.1 The vertical tendons to be de-tensioned by hydraulic ram and removed shall be as specified in Owner Work Package. Vertical tendons shall be de-tensioned from the top end as specified in the Owner Work Package.2.2 Prior to de-tensioning a tendon a full visual inspection shall be performed on each tendon end and documented per PSC Procedure F&Q 15.1 and F&Q 15.2 or on Owner Work Package documentation. | 'Title: 1Date ATTACHMENT Z23R5 I OatF&Q6B.oCR3:SGR.doc Page 36 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 6.0 TENDON DETENSIONINGIREMOVAL FOR POSSIBLE REUSE September 16, 2009 Page 2 of 8 Revision 0 1.0 PURPOSE 1.1 This procedure will establish the requirements for hydraulic ram de-tensioning and removal of tendons for possible reuse at Crystal River Unit 3 during the Steam Generator Replacement Project.2.0 SCOPE 2.1 The vertical tendons to be de-tensioned by hydraulic ram and removed shall be as specified in Owner Work Package. Vertical tendons shall be de-tensioned from the top end as specified in the Owner Work Package.2.2 Prior to de-tensioning a tendon a full visual inspection shall be performed on each tendon end and documented per PSC Procedure F&Q 15.1 and F&Q 15.2 or on Owner Work Package documentation. | ||
2.3 The de-tensioning sequence shall be as specified on the Owner Work Package.3.0 RESPONSIBILITY 3.1 Owner Field Construction Personnel shall be responsible for the physical activities and recording of documentation associated with this procedure. | 2.3 The de-tensioning sequence shall be as specified on the Owner Work Package.3.0 RESPONSIBILITY | ||
===3.1 Owner=== | |||
Field Construction Personnel shall be responsible for the physical activities and recording of documentation associated with this procedure. | |||
==4.0 QUALIFICATIONS== | ==4.0 QUALIFICATIONS== | ||
4.1 Owner Construction Personnel shall be fit by skill, training and experience to perform these duties and PSC tendon training program.5.0 EQUIPMENT 5.1 Hydraulic ram (calibrated) and pump with appropriate hoses and fittings.5.2 Hydraulic pressure gauge (calibrated). | |||
5.3 Miscellaneous Tools, wrenches, ratchets, sockets, shackles, come-alongs, etc.5.4 Plastic bags, plastic sheeting (Visqueen), rags, buckets or drums for waste grease.6.0 PRECAUTIONS 6.1 As in other heavy construction, care should be exercised while working from scaffolds, platforms, ladders, high or restricted access locations. | ===4.1 Owner=== | ||
Construction Personnel shall be fit by skill, training and experience to perform these duties and PSC tendon training program.5.0 EQUIPMENT 5.1 Hydraulic ram (calibrated) and pump with appropriate hoses and fittings.5.2 Hydraulic pressure gauge (calibrated). | |||
===5.3 Miscellaneous=== | |||
Tools, wrenches, ratchets, sockets, shackles, come-alongs, etc.5.4 Plastic bags, plastic sheeting (Visqueen), rags, buckets or drums for waste grease.6.0 PRECAUTIONS 6.1 As in other heavy construction, care should be exercised while working from scaffolds, platforms, ladders, high or restricted access locations. | |||
Respect for the safety and well-being of the other trades and personnel in the area must be observed, especially during hoisting operations. | Respect for the safety and well-being of the other trades and personnel in the area must be observed, especially during hoisting operations. | ||
1 lOa F&Q6.0.CR3.SGR.doc ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 37 of 130 PCHG-DJESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 6.0 TENDON DETENSIONINGIREMOVAL FOR POSSIBLE REUSE September 16, 2009 Page 3 of 8 Revision 0 CAUTION DO NOT STAND UNDER LOADS WHILE STATIONARY OR DURING HOISTING.DO NOT PERMIT OTHERS TO STAND UNDER LOADS.DO NOT THROW OR DROP OBJECTS.6.2 The wire used for the tendons has a minimum breaking strength of 240,000 pounds per square inch. This means that each 7mm diameter wire is capable of withstanding a minimum breaking load of 14,317 pounds. Multiply this by 163 wires in a tendon and you are dealing with forces in excess of two million pounds per tendon.CAUTION (When using rams or on a tendon not being removed.)NEVER CONNECT A WELDING GROUND, PERFORM WELDING ON, OR STRIKE AN ARC NEAR A STRESSED TENDON.NEVER APPLY AN OPEN FLAME TO THE BUTTONHEADS, THE WIRES OR ANCHORAGES OF A STRESSED TENDON.NEVER STRIKE THE BUTTONHEADS, THE WIRES OR THE ANCHORAGES OF A STRESSED TENDON WITH A HAMMER OR ANY OTHER METAL OBJECT.6.3 Prior to applying ANY FORCE to the tendon, the stressing coupler must be fully engaged with the anchorage to be de-tensioned. | 1 lOa F&Q6.0.CR3.SGR.doc ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 37 of 130 PCHG-DJESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 6.0 TENDON DETENSIONINGIREMOVAL FOR POSSIBLE REUSE September 16, 2009 Page 3 of 8 Revision 0 CAUTION DO NOT STAND UNDER LOADS WHILE STATIONARY OR DURING HOISTING.DO NOT PERMIT OTHERS TO STAND UNDER LOADS.DO NOT THROW OR DROP OBJECTS.6.2 The wire used for the tendons has a minimum breaking strength of 240,000 pounds per square inch. This means that each 7mm diameter wire is capable of withstanding a minimum breaking load of 14,317 pounds. Multiply this by 163 wires in a tendon and you are dealing with forces in excess of two million pounds per tendon.CAUTION (When using rams or on a tendon not being removed.)NEVER CONNECT A WELDING GROUND, PERFORM WELDING ON, OR STRIKE AN ARC NEAR A STRESSED TENDON.NEVER APPLY AN OPEN FLAME TO THE BUTTONHEADS, THE WIRES OR ANCHORAGES OF A STRESSED TENDON.NEVER STRIKE THE BUTTONHEADS, THE WIRES OR THE ANCHORAGES OF A STRESSED TENDON WITH A HAMMER OR ANY OTHER METAL OBJECT.6.3 Prior to applying ANY FORCE to the tendon, the stressing coupler must be fully engaged with the anchorage to be de-tensioned. | ||
Also check that the locking bolts on stressing rod (top part of two piece stressing rod) and coupler are present and fastened.CAUTION BE SURE THE STRESSING ROD IS FULLY ENGAGED WITH THE ANCHORAGE BEFORE APPLYING ANY LOAD, REGARDLESS OF HOW SMALL THAT LOAD MIGHT BE.11 Oa F&Q6.O.CR3.SGR.doc ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 38 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 6.0 TENDON DETENSIONINGIREMOVAL FOR POSSIBLE REUSE September 16, 2009 Page 4 of 8 Revision 0 6.4 During de-tensioning operations the following cautions shall be observed.CAUTION NEVER EXCEED THE OVERSTRESS FORCE OR PRESSURE -80% (1867 kips for a 163 wire tendon) or 11.46 kips FOR THE AMOUNT OF EFFECTIVE WIRES IN A TENDON.DO NOT STAND BEHIND THE JACK WHEN IT IS UNDER LOAD.KEEP HANDS AND FINGERS OUT OF ANY PINCH AREAS.BE ALERT DURING SHIM PLACEMENT AND REMOVAL.7.0 QUALITY CONTROL DOCUMENTATION AND HOLD POINTS 7.1 HOLD POINT -Prior to de-tensioning a tendon the tendon owner inspector is to be notified to perform visual inspections and document lAW PSC Procedure F&Q 15.1 and 15.2.8.0 PREREQUISITES 8.1 Prior to removing tendon grease will be drained.8.2 Perform visual inspections lAW PSC Procedure F&Q 15.1 and F&Q 15.2.8.3 Record on Data Sheet F&Q 6.0 or Owner Work Package documentation the information required for tendon number, tendon end and date of de-tensioning. | Also check that the locking bolts on stressing rod (top part of two piece stressing rod) and coupler are present and fastened.CAUTION BE SURE THE STRESSING ROD IS FULLY ENGAGED WITH THE ANCHORAGE BEFORE APPLYING ANY LOAD, REGARDLESS OF HOW SMALL THAT LOAD MIGHT BE.11 Oa F&Q6.O.CR3.SGR.doc ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 38 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 6.0 TENDON DETENSIONINGIREMOVAL FOR POSSIBLE REUSE September 16, 2009 Page 4 of 8 Revision 0 6.4 During de-tensioning operations the following cautions shall be observed.CAUTION NEVER EXCEED THE OVERSTRESS FORCE OR PRESSURE -80% (1867 kips for a 163 wire tendon) or 11.46 kips FOR THE AMOUNT OF EFFECTIVE WIRES IN A TENDON.DO NOT STAND BEHIND THE JACK WHEN IT IS UNDER LOAD.KEEP HANDS AND FINGERS OUT OF ANY PINCH AREAS.BE ALERT DURING SHIM PLACEMENT AND REMOVAL.7.0 QUALITY CONTROL DOCUMENTATION AND HOLD POINTS 7.1 HOLD POINT -Prior to de-tensioning a tendon the tendon owner inspector is to be notified to perform visual inspections and document lAW PSC Procedure F&Q 15.1 and 15.2.8.0 PREREQUISITES | ||
9.0 PROCEDURE 9.1 If not previously done, remove the grease cap or end protection from the end being de-tensioned. | |||
9.2 ANCHORAGE CLEANUP 9.2.1 Grease shall be removed from the tendon end using clean non-metallic devices.Bristle brushes and rags with suitable quantities of Viscosity Oil, Viscor Industrial No. 16A solvent or Owner approved solvent to dilute and wash away the grease may also be required. | ===8.1 Prior=== | ||
to removing tendon grease will be drained.8.2 Perform visual inspections lAW PSC Procedure F&Q 15.1 and F&Q 15.2.8.3 Record on Data Sheet F&Q 6.0 or Owner Work Package documentation the information required for tendon number, tendon end and date of de-tensioning. | |||
===9.0 PROCEDURE=== | |||
9.1 If not previously done, remove the grease cap or end protection from the end being de-tensioned. | |||
===9.2 ANCHORAGE=== | |||
CLEANUP 9.2.1 Grease shall be removed from the tendon end using clean non-metallic devices.Bristle brushes and rags with suitable quantities of Viscosity Oil, Viscor Industrial No. 16A solvent or Owner approved solvent to dilute and wash away the grease may also be required. | |||
This cleanup must be sufficient to permit engagement of the anchorage threads with the stressing rod threads.11 Oa F&06.0.CR3.SGR.doc ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 39 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 Ir PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 6.0 TENDON DETENSIONINGIREMOVAL FOR POSSIBLE REUSE September 16, 2009 Page 5 of 8 Revision 0 I 9.3 TENDON DE-TENSIONING 9.3.1 HOLD POINT -Prior to de-tensioning a tendon a full visual inspection shall be performed on each tendon end and documented per PSC Procedure F&Q 15.1 and F&Q 15.2 or on Owner Work Package documentation. | This cleanup must be sufficient to permit engagement of the anchorage threads with the stressing rod threads.11 Oa F&06.0.CR3.SGR.doc ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 39 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 Ir PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 6.0 TENDON DETENSIONINGIREMOVAL FOR POSSIBLE REUSE September 16, 2009 Page 5 of 8 Revision 0 I 9.3 TENDON DE-TENSIONING 9.3.1 HOLD POINT -Prior to de-tensioning a tendon a full visual inspection shall be performed on each tendon end and documented per PSC Procedure F&Q 15.1 and F&Q 15.2 or on Owner Work Package documentation. | ||
9.3.1.1 De-tensioning of vertical tendons shall be performed on the top end as specified in Owner Work Package.9.3.1.2 Align the ram stressing rod with the anchorage and the jack chair with the bearing plate. Ensure that the ram is in alignment within 1/8 inch. Record on Data Sheet F&Q 6.0 or Owner Work Package documentation the ram and gauge identification. | 9.3.1.1 De-tensioning of vertical tendons shall be performed on the top end as specified in Owner Work Package.9.3.1.2 Align the ram stressing rod with the anchorage and the jack chair with the bearing plate. Ensure that the ram is in alignment within 1/8 inch. Record on Data Sheet F&Q 6.0 or Owner Work Package documentation the ram and gauge identification. | ||
9.3.1.2.1 The stressing rod and coupler is now screwed onto the anchorage. (Rotate rod counter clockwise several revolutions to align threads, then clockwise to attach).CAUTION VERIFY RAM WILL NOT LOAD SUPPORT RIGGING WHEN PRESSURIZING RAM.9'.3.1.3 Before de-tensioning be sure opposite end of tendon is clear and not being worked on. Pressurize the ram until the shims under the anchorage become loose and can be removed.9.3.1.3.1 NOTE: A tendon shall never be stressed beyond 80% of the Minimum Guaranteed Ultimate Tensile Strength (GUTS) of the effective wires in that tendon. A 163 wire tendon shall not exceed a force of 1867 kips. For a tendon with missing wires, the maximum tensile force shall be reduced accordingly by 11.46 kips/wire. | 9.3.1.2.1 The stressing rod and coupler is now screwed onto the anchorage. (Rotate rod counter clockwise several revolutions to align threads, then clockwise to attach).CAUTION VERIFY RAM WILL NOT LOAD SUPPORT RIGGING WHEN PRESSURIZING RAM.9'.3.1.3 Before de-tensioning be sure opposite end of tendon is clear and not being worked on. Pressurize the ram until the shims under the anchorage become loose and can be removed.9.3.1.3.1 NOTE: A tendon shall never be stressed beyond 80% of the Minimum Guaranteed Ultimate Tensile Strength (GUTS) of the effective wires in that tendon. A 163 wire tendon shall not exceed a force of 1867 kips. For a tendon with missing wires, the maximum tensile force shall be reduced accordingly by 11.46 kips/wire. | ||
9.3.1.4 Remove all shims from between the anchorage and bearing plate. Reduce the ram pressure until the load is reduced to zero.9.3.1.5 Set the anchorhead down on one 3" pair of shims.9.3.1.6 The ram shall be uncoupled from the anchorage. | 9.3.1.4 Remove all shims from between the anchorage and bearing plate. Reduce the ram pressure until the load is reduced to zero.9.3.1.5 Set the anchorhead down on one 3" pair of shims.9.3.1.6 The ram shall be uncoupled from the anchorage. | ||
9.4 TENDON END CUTTING 9.4.1 On the top end bolt the pulling plate to the anchor head.9.4.2 If lower anchorage is not loose couple pulling plate to coiler or crane, lift anchor head to allow removal of shims then lower tendon into void.11 Oa F&Q6.0.CR3.SGR.doc ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 40 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 6.0 TENDON DETENSIONINGIREMOVAL FOR POSSIBLE REUSE September 16, 2009 Page 6 of 8 Revision 0 9.4.3 With all shims removed in the gallery and adequate tendon length exposed push gallery anchor head up to bearing plate exposing approximately 2 feet of wire.9.4.4 Cut off buttonheads with hand grinder right behind the buttonheads ensuring a clean square cut.9.4.5 Remove anchor head.9.5 TENDON LENGTH VERIFICATION 9.5.1 Lift tendon with coiler or crane and place on 3" pair of shims.9.5.2 Remove pulling plate.9,5.3 Locate any outside wire and pry up to allow attachment of tendon wire puller (figure 1.0).9,5.4 Pull the wire completely through the tendon duct.9Z5.4.1 After pulling, the entire length of the tendon wire shall be visually inspected for pitting, corrosion, or other signs of deterioration and evaluated in accordance with Specification EW101 in PSC Procedure F&Q 13.0. Solvent cleaning may be performed to facilitate cleaning before inspection. | |||
===9.4 TENDON=== | |||
END CUTTING 9.4.1 On the top end bolt the pulling plate to the anchor head.9.4.2 If lower anchorage is not loose couple pulling plate to coiler or crane, lift anchor head to allow removal of shims then lower tendon into void.11 Oa F&Q6.0.CR3.SGR.doc ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 40 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 6.0 TENDON DETENSIONINGIREMOVAL FOR POSSIBLE REUSE September 16, 2009 Page 6 of 8 Revision 0 9.4.3 With all shims removed in the gallery and adequate tendon length exposed push gallery anchor head up to bearing plate exposing approximately 2 feet of wire.9.4.4 Cut off buttonheads with hand grinder right behind the buttonheads ensuring a clean square cut.9.4.5 Remove anchor head.9.5 TENDON LENGTH VERIFICATION 9.5.1 Lift tendon with coiler or crane and place on 3" pair of shims.9.5.2 Remove pulling plate.9,5.3 Locate any outside wire and pry up to allow attachment of tendon wire puller (figure 1.0).9,5.4 Pull the wire completely through the tendon duct.9Z5.4.1 After pulling, the entire length of the tendon wire shall be visually inspected for pitting, corrosion, or other signs of deterioration and evaluated in accordance with Specification EW101 in PSC Procedure F&Q 13.0. Solvent cleaning may be performed to facilitate cleaning before inspection. | |||
9.5.4.1.1 Document the Category of Corrosion rating on Data Sheet 6.1, for every 10 feet of length.9.5.4.1.2 If the Category of Corrosion has progressed beyond Condition "C" as defined in Specification EW101, Progress Energy Engineering shall be notified for disposition. | 9.5.4.1.1 Document the Category of Corrosion rating on Data Sheet 6.1, for every 10 feet of length.9.5.4.1.2 If the Category of Corrosion has progressed beyond Condition "C" as defined in Specification EW101, Progress Energy Engineering shall be notified for disposition. | ||
9.5.4.2 After the tendon wire has been pulled through, it shall be measured for length.9.5.4.2.1 Document the total length of wire on Data Sheet 6.1.9.5.4.3 After the tendon wire has been pulled, it may be cleaned of excess grease and coiled into coil form of approximately five-foot diameter. | 9.5.4.2 After the tendon wire has been pulled through, it shall be measured for length.9.5.4.2.1 Document the total length of wire on Data Sheet 6.1.9.5.4.3 After the tendon wire has been pulled, it may be cleaned of excess grease and coiled into coil form of approximately five-foot diameter. | ||
Secure the coil from unwinding. | Secure the coil from unwinding. | ||
9.6 TENDON REMOVAL 9.6.1 Re-attach pulling plate on anchor head.9.6.2 For vertical tendon attach 5/16 inch cable only to cut end to facilitate cleaning at a latter date. Alternatively, a cable can be dropped down the void for cleaning after tendon removal at Owner Field Construction Personnel discretion. | |||
===9.6 TENDON=== | |||
REMOVAL 9.6.1 Re-attach pulling plate on anchor head.9.6.2 For vertical tendon attach 5/16 inch cable only to cut end to facilitate cleaning at a latter date. Alternatively, a cable can be dropped down the void for cleaning after tendon removal at Owner Field Construction Personnel discretion. | |||
11Oa F&Q6.0.CR3.SGR.doc ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 41 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 6.0 TENDON DETENSIONINGIREMOVAL FOR POSSIBLE REUSE September 16, 2009 Page 7 of 8 Revision 0 9.6.3 Expand the coiler hub and attach the cable from the field coiler to the tendon end anchor head plate, bolt and apply a light tension on the cable with the coiler.9.6.4 Coil the tendon placing a 3/4" band approximately every 5' to ensure wires remain in a manageable bundle.9.6.5 Coil the tendon on the coiler, using extra care as the anchor head enters the coiler. Place two bands on the tendon anchor head after the first revolution. | 11Oa F&Q6.0.CR3.SGR.doc ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 41 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 6.0 TENDON DETENSIONINGIREMOVAL FOR POSSIBLE REUSE September 16, 2009 Page 7 of 8 Revision 0 9.6.3 Expand the coiler hub and attach the cable from the field coiler to the tendon end anchor head plate, bolt and apply a light tension on the cable with the coiler.9.6.4 Coil the tendon placing a 3/4" band approximately every 5' to ensure wires remain in a manageable bundle.9.6.5 Coil the tendon on the coiler, using extra care as the anchor head enters the coiler. Place two bands on the tendon anchor head after the first revolution. | ||
After, band the tendon coils in the coiler for every new loop of the tendon as it is coiled (stagger the placement of the banding). | After, band the tendon coils in the coiler for every new loop of the tendon as it is coiled (stagger the placement of the banding). | ||
The closer to the end of the tendon the more banding of the coils are needed in the coiler.9,6.6 Carefully coil the tendon to ensure no crimped or bent wires.9,6.7 Field Engineer to inspect tendon as it is removed for corrosion, water or other deleterious conditions. | The closer to the end of the tendon the more banding of the coils are needed in the coiler.9,6.6 Carefully coil the tendon to ensure no crimped or bent wires.9,6.7 Field Engineer to inspect tendon as it is removed for corrosion, water or other deleterious conditions. | ||
9.6.8 Reverse the operation of the coiler and retract the hub to loosen the pulling cable and detach the pulling cable from the tendon end.9.6.9 Hoist the tendon out of the uncoiler, wrap in plastic and lower it to the ground for storage.9.6.10 If the tendon voids are to be cleaned at this time refer to PSC Procedure F&Q 11.0, if not protect the void end.9.6.11 Since these tendon ends will have further work performed on them at a later date, the following methods of tendon end protection shall be used. The tendon end may be covered with a plastic bag or sheeting and taped to provide protection from the elements, or the grease cap may be replaced using the old gaskets.9.6.12 Shims removed from a tendon shall be kept in matched pairs and protected from the elements by covering with plastic or placing in a temporary storage container until sent to storage.1,0.0 DOCUMENTATION 10.1 The items requiring documentation in this procedure shall be documented by the Superintendent or Field Engineer on Data Sheet F&Q 6.0 and F&Q 6.1 attached to this procedure or Work Package documentation. | |||
====9.6.8 Reverse==== | |||
the operation of the coiler and retract the hub to loosen the pulling cable and detach the pulling cable from the tendon end.9.6.9 Hoist the tendon out of the uncoiler, wrap in plastic and lower it to the ground for storage.9.6.10 If the tendon voids are to be cleaned at this time refer to PSC Procedure F&Q 11.0, if not protect the void end.9.6.11 Since these tendon ends will have further work performed on them at a later date, the following methods of tendon end protection shall be used. The tendon end may be covered with a plastic bag or sheeting and taped to provide protection from the elements, or the grease cap may be replaced using the old gaskets.9.6.12 Shims removed from a tendon shall be kept in matched pairs and protected from the elements by covering with plastic or placing in a temporary storage container until sent to storage.1,0.0 DOCUMENTATION 10.1 The items requiring documentation in this procedure shall be documented by the Superintendent or Field Engineer on Data Sheet F&Q 6.0 and F&Q 6.1 attached to this procedure or Work Package documentation. | |||
11.0 QUALITY CONTROL 11.1 None.12.0 NOTIFICATION 12.1 Owner Site Shift Superintendent shall be notified of any problems encountered. | 11.0 QUALITY CONTROL 11.1 None.12.0 NOTIFICATION 12.1 Owner Site Shift Superintendent shall be notified of any problems encountered. | ||
11 Oa F&Q6.0.CR3.SGR.doc ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 42 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 13.0 A'I-FACHMENTS 13.1 Data Sheet F&Q 6.0.13.2 Data Sheet F&Q 6.0A.13.3 Figure 1.0 -Tendon Wire Puller PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 6.0 TENDON DETENSIONINGIREMOVAL FOR POSSIBLE REUSE September 16, 2009 Page 8 of 8 Revision 0 13.0 ATTACHMENTS 13.1 Data Sheet F&Q 6.0.13.2 Data Sheet F&Q 6.OA.13.3 Figure 1.0 -Tendon Wire Puller 11 Oa F&Q6.0.CR3.SGR.doc Page 43 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 6.0 TENDON DETENSIONING/REMOVAL FOR POSSIBLE REUSE DATA SHEET F&Q 6.0 September 16, 2009 Page 1 of 1 Revision 0 RAM TENDON DETENSIONING DOCUMENTATION PROJECT: CRYSTAL RIVER UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT TENDON NO.: TENDON END DATE OF DETENSIONING: | 11 Oa F&Q6.0.CR3.SGR.doc ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 42 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 13.0 A'I-FACHMENTS 13.1 Data Sheet F&Q 6.0.13.2 Data Sheet F&Q 6.0A.13.3 Figure 1.0 -Tendon Wire Puller PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 6.0 TENDON DETENSIONINGIREMOVAL FOR POSSIBLE REUSE September 16, 2009 Page 8 of 8 Revision 0 13.0 ATTACHMENTS 13.1 Data Sheet F&Q 6.0.13.2 Data Sheet F&Q 6.OA.13.3 Figure 1.0 -Tendon Wire Puller 11 Oa F&Q6.0.CR3.SGR.doc Page 43 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 6.0 TENDON DETENSIONING/REMOVAL FOR POSSIBLE REUSE DATA SHEET F&Q 6.0 September 16, 2009 Page 1 of 1 Revision 0 RAM TENDON DETENSIONING DOCUMENTATION PROJECT: CRYSTAL RIVER UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT TENDON NO.: TENDON END DATE OF DETENSIONING: | ||
| Line 209: | Line 280: | ||
Document the total length of the wire on the diagram below. Completed: | Document the total length of the wire on the diagram below. Completed: | ||
[ NO [I YES-Buttonhead End 0' 10' 20' 30'30' 40' 50' 60'60' 70' 80' 90'90' 100' 110' 120'120' 130' 140' 150'150' 160' 170' 180'180' 190' 200' 210'Cut End HA COMMENTS CIVIL FIELD ENGINEER: DATE: 11 Oa F&Q6.0.CR3.SGR.doc Page 45 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-1DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 6.0 TENDON DETENSIONING/REMOVAL FOR POSSIBLE REUSE Figure 1.0 September 16, 2009 Page 1 of 1 Revision 0 Fiaure 1.0 -Tendon Wire Puller Figure 1.0 is a represented sample of a wire puller and is not a quality controlled device.The actual wire puller may vary somewhat from this configuration. | [ NO [I YES-Buttonhead End 0' 10' 20' 30'30' 40' 50' 60'60' 70' 80' 90'90' 100' 110' 120'120' 130' 140' 150'150' 160' 170' 180'180' 190' 200' 210'Cut End HA COMMENTS CIVIL FIELD ENGINEER: DATE: 11 Oa F&Q6.0.CR3.SGR.doc Page 45 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-1DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 6.0 TENDON DETENSIONING/REMOVAL FOR POSSIBLE REUSE Figure 1.0 September 16, 2009 Page 1 of 1 Revision 0 Fiaure 1.0 -Tendon Wire Puller Figure 1.0 is a represented sample of a wire puller and is not a quality controlled device.The actual wire puller may vary somewhat from this configuration. | ||
11 a F&Q6.0.CR3.SGR.doc Page 46 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 8.0 PLASMA CUTTING TENDON DETENSIONING August 29. 2008 Page I of 5 Revision' P.Precision Surveillance Corporation PROGRESS ENERGY FLORIDA, INC.CRYSTAL RIVER NUCLEAR.UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT PRECISION SURVEILLANCE CORPORATION FIELD AND QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE PLASMA. CUTTING TENDON DETENSIONING LEVEL i1 Q. C.08/29/08 Date-Prepared by Approved by Approved by Title PROJECT MANAGER, P. E 0&829/08 Date Titlez PRESIDENT 08/29/08 Date Title I ATTACHMENT Z23R5 11 F8~~ ~ATTACHMENT Z23R5 410C PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 8.0 PLASMA CUTTING TENDON DETENSIONING August 29, 2008 Page 2 of 5 Revision 0 1.0 PURPOSE 1.1 This procedure will establish the requirements for plasma cutting de-tensioning of tendons at Crystal River Unit 3 for the vertical and horizontal tendon work during the Steam Generator Replacement Project.2.0 SCOPE 2.1 The tendons to be de-tensioned by plasma cutting shall be as specified in PSC Procedure F&Q 2.0 or Owner Work Package.2.2 The de-tensioning sequence shall be as specified in Owner Work Package.3.0 RESPONSIBILITY 3.1 Owner Field Construction Personnel shall be responsible for the physical activities and recording of documentation associated with this procedure. | 11 a F&Q6.0.CR3.SGR.doc Page 46 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 8.0 PLASMA CUTTING TENDON DETENSIONING August 29. 2008 Page I of 5 Revision' P.Precision Surveillance Corporation PROGRESS ENERGY FLORIDA, INC.CRYSTAL RIVER NUCLEAR.UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT PRECISION SURVEILLANCE CORPORATION FIELD AND QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE PLASMA. CUTTING TENDON DETENSIONING LEVEL i1 Q. C.08/29/08 Date-Prepared by Approved by Approved by Title PROJECT MANAGER, P. E 0&829/08 Date Titlez PRESIDENT 08/29/08 Date Title I ATTACHMENT Z23R5 11 F8~~ ~ATTACHMENT Z23R5 410C PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 8.0 PLASMA CUTTING TENDON DETENSIONING August 29, 2008 Page 2 of 5 Revision 0 1.0 PURPOSE 1.1 This procedure will establish the requirements for plasma cutting de-tensioning of tendons at Crystal River Unit 3 for the vertical and horizontal tendon work during the Steam Generator Replacement Project.2.0 SCOPE 2.1 The tendons to be de-tensioned by plasma cutting shall be as specified in PSC Procedure F&Q 2.0 or Owner Work Package.2.2 The de-tensioning sequence shall be as specified in Owner Work Package.3.0 RESPONSIBILITY | ||
===3.1 Owner=== | |||
Field Construction Personnel shall be responsible for the physical activities and recording of documentation associated with this procedure. | |||
==4.0 QUALIFICATIONS== | ==4.0 QUALIFICATIONS== | ||
4.1 Owner Field Construction Personnel shall be fit by skill, training and/or experience to perform these duties.5.0 EQUIPMENT 5.1 Plasma cutting equipment. | |||
===4.1 Owner=== | |||
Field Construction Personnel shall be fit by skill, training and/or experience to perform these duties.5.0 EQUIPMENT 5.1 Plasma cutting equipment. | |||
5.2 Shim, anchor head and button head catcher.5.3 Miscellaneous Tools, wrenches, ratchets, sockets, shackles, come-alongs, etc.5.4 Plastic bags, plastic sheeting (Visqueen), rags, buckets or drums for waste grease.6.0 PRECAUTIONS 6.1 As in other heavy construction, care should be exercised while working from scaffolds, platforms, ladders, high or restricted access locations. | 5.2 Shim, anchor head and button head catcher.5.3 Miscellaneous Tools, wrenches, ratchets, sockets, shackles, come-alongs, etc.5.4 Plastic bags, plastic sheeting (Visqueen), rags, buckets or drums for waste grease.6.0 PRECAUTIONS 6.1 As in other heavy construction, care should be exercised while working from scaffolds, platforms, ladders, high or restricted access locations. | ||
Respect for the safety and well-being of the other trades and personnel in the area must be observed, especially during hoisting operations. | Respect for the safety and well-being of the other trades and personnel in the area must be observed, especially during hoisting operations. | ||
6.2 During plasma cutting operations, care should be taken to wear prescribed protective equipment such as proper eye protection, gloves, and to avoid burns from the plasma cutting and electrical shock.6.3 Grease is flammable, during plasma cutting operations all Fire Watch restrictions and precautions are to be followed.111 F&Q8.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 48 of 130 PCHG-DESG-ENGINEERING CHANGE'0000063016R5 | |||
===6.2 During=== | |||
plasma cutting operations, care should be taken to wear prescribed protective equipment such as proper eye protection, gloves, and to avoid burns from the plasma cutting and electrical shock.6.3 Grease is flammable, during plasma cutting operations all Fire Watch restrictions and precautions are to be followed.111 F&Q8.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 48 of 130 PCHG-DESG-ENGINEERING CHANGE'0000063016R5 | |||
-PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 8.0 PLASMA CUTTING TENDON DETENSIONING August 29, 2008 Page 3 of 5 Revision 0 6.4 During plasma cutting operations, at the end of the tendon being cut a shim and button head catcher is to be in place as directed by the Owner Site Shift Superintendent to catch any projectile button heads.6.5 On the opposite end of a tendon end that is being plasma cut care should be taken when the grease cap is removed as it could contain loose shims which could fall when the cap is removed.CAUTION DO NOT STAND UNDER LOADS WHILE STATIONARY OR DURING HOISTING.DO NOT PERMIT OTHERS TO STAND UNDER LOADS.DO NOT THROW OR DROP OBJECTS.DURING PLASMA CUTTING WEAR PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT, AVOID BURNS AND ELECTRICAL SHOCK.6.6 The wire used for the tendons has a minimum breaking strength of 240,000 pounds per square inch. This means that each 7mm diameter wire is capable of withstanding a minimum breaking load of 14,317 pounds. Multiply this by 163 wires in a tendon and you are dealing with forces in excess of two million pounds per tendon.CAUTION (When plasma cutting on a tendon to be removed and scrapped)NEVER CONNECT A WELDING GROUND, PERFORM WELDING ON, OR STRIKE AN ARC NEAR A STRESSED TENDON WHICH IS NOT BEING SCRAPPED.NEVER APPLY AN OPEN FLAME TO THE BUTTONHEADS, THE WIRES OR ANCHORAGES OF A STRESSED TENDON EXCEPT FOR THE END OF THE TENDONS THAT ARE TO BE PLASMA CUT AND SCRAPPED.NEVER STRIKE THE BUTTONHEADS, THE WIRES OR THE ANCHORAGES OF A STRESSED TENDON WITH A HAMMER OR ANY OTHER METAL OBJECT.6.7 The above actions could cause a button head or wire to fail. During tendon tensile testing, broken wires or button heads have been observed to penetrate hard lumber in excess of 4 inches in thickness, about the equivalent of a .32 caliber bullet.7.0 QUALITY CONTROL DOCUMENTATION AND HOLD POINTS 7.1 There are no Quality Control Documentation (QCD) points or HOLD POINTS in this procedure. | -PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 8.0 PLASMA CUTTING TENDON DETENSIONING August 29, 2008 Page 3 of 5 Revision 0 6.4 During plasma cutting operations, at the end of the tendon being cut a shim and button head catcher is to be in place as directed by the Owner Site Shift Superintendent to catch any projectile button heads.6.5 On the opposite end of a tendon end that is being plasma cut care should be taken when the grease cap is removed as it could contain loose shims which could fall when the cap is removed.CAUTION DO NOT STAND UNDER LOADS WHILE STATIONARY OR DURING HOISTING.DO NOT PERMIT OTHERS TO STAND UNDER LOADS.DO NOT THROW OR DROP OBJECTS.DURING PLASMA CUTTING WEAR PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT, AVOID BURNS AND ELECTRICAL SHOCK.6.6 The wire used for the tendons has a minimum breaking strength of 240,000 pounds per square inch. This means that each 7mm diameter wire is capable of withstanding a minimum breaking load of 14,317 pounds. Multiply this by 163 wires in a tendon and you are dealing with forces in excess of two million pounds per tendon.CAUTION (When plasma cutting on a tendon to be removed and scrapped)NEVER CONNECT A WELDING GROUND, PERFORM WELDING ON, OR STRIKE AN ARC NEAR A STRESSED TENDON WHICH IS NOT BEING SCRAPPED.NEVER APPLY AN OPEN FLAME TO THE BUTTONHEADS, THE WIRES OR ANCHORAGES OF A STRESSED TENDON EXCEPT FOR THE END OF THE TENDONS THAT ARE TO BE PLASMA CUT AND SCRAPPED.NEVER STRIKE THE BUTTONHEADS, THE WIRES OR THE ANCHORAGES OF A STRESSED TENDON WITH A HAMMER OR ANY OTHER METAL OBJECT.6.7 The above actions could cause a button head or wire to fail. During tendon tensile testing, broken wires or button heads have been observed to penetrate hard lumber in excess of 4 inches in thickness, about the equivalent of a .32 caliber bullet.7.0 QUALITY CONTROL DOCUMENTATION AND HOLD POINTS 7.1 There are no Quality Control Documentation (QCD) points or HOLD POINTS in this procedure. | ||
111 F&Q8.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 49 of 130 PCHG.DESG-.... | 111 F&Q8.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 49 of 130 PCHG.DESG-.... | ||
.......GENGINEERING CHANGE " 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 8.0 PLASMA CUTTING TENDON DETENSIONING August 29, 2008 Page 4 of 5 Revision 0 8.0 PREREQUISITES 8.1 Prior to removing a grease cap/tendon end protection assure that the proper tendon is being worked on.8.2 Prior to de-tensioning vertical tendons that are to be removed from the void, grease is to have been drained and or blown from the tendon.8.3 On the opposite end of the tendon to be plasma cut the grease cap is to be removed.The grease cleaned out of the cap and from around the anchorage and shims. A keeper plate is installed to the anchor head to hold the button heads in place during plasma cutting. The grease cap is replaced and tightened down. Care should be taken when this grease cap is removed after plasma cutting as it could contain loose shims which could fall when the cap is removed.9.0 PROCEDURE 9.1 If not previously done, remove the grease cap or end protection from the end being de-tensioned. | .......GENGINEERING CHANGE " 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 8.0 PLASMA CUTTING TENDON DETENSIONING August 29, 2008 Page 4 of 5 Revision 0 8.0 PREREQUISITES | ||
9.2 ANCHORAGE CLEANUP 9.2.1 Grease shall be removed from the tendon end. Bristle brushes and rags with suitable quantities of Viscosity Oil, Viscor Industrial No. 16A solvent or Owner approved equivalent to dilute and wash away the grease may also be required.This cleanup must be sufficient to permit plasma cutting of button heads as verified by Superintendent. | |||
9.3 TENDON DE-TENSIONING 9.3.1 During plasma cutting the grease cap at the other end not being cut is to remain on. The button heads of the tendon are to be plasma cut one at a time, if possible, until all the button heads are cut.9.4 TENDON SHIM PROTECTION 9.4.1 Shims removed from a tendon shall be kept in matched pairs and protected from the elements by covering with plastic or placing in a temporary storage container until sent to storage.10.0 DOCUMENTATION 10.1 The items requiring documentation in this procedure shall be documented by the assigned field construction person of the working crew on Data Sheet F&Q 8.0 attached to this procedure or as required by Owner Work Package.111 F&Q8.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 50 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 8.0 PLASMA CUTTING TENDON DETENSIONING August 29, 2008 Page 5 of 5 Revision 0 11.0 11.1 12.0 12.1 13.0 13.1 QUALITY CONTROL There is no quality control inspection or documentation required by this procedure. | ===8.1 Prior=== | ||
to removing a grease cap/tendon end protection assure that the proper tendon is being worked on.8.2 Prior to de-tensioning vertical tendons that are to be removed from the void, grease is to have been drained and or blown from the tendon.8.3 On the opposite end of the tendon to be plasma cut the grease cap is to be removed.The grease cleaned out of the cap and from around the anchorage and shims. A keeper plate is installed to the anchor head to hold the button heads in place during plasma cutting. The grease cap is replaced and tightened down. Care should be taken when this grease cap is removed after plasma cutting as it could contain loose shims which could fall when the cap is removed.9.0 PROCEDURE 9.1 If not previously done, remove the grease cap or end protection from the end being de-tensioned. | |||
===9.2 ANCHORAGE=== | |||
CLEANUP 9.2.1 Grease shall be removed from the tendon end. Bristle brushes and rags with suitable quantities of Viscosity Oil, Viscor Industrial No. 16A solvent or Owner approved equivalent to dilute and wash away the grease may also be required.This cleanup must be sufficient to permit plasma cutting of button heads as verified by Superintendent. | |||
===9.3 TENDON=== | |||
DE-TENSIONING | |||
====9.3.1 During==== | |||
plasma cutting the grease cap at the other end not being cut is to remain on. The button heads of the tendon are to be plasma cut one at a time, if possible, until all the button heads are cut.9.4 TENDON SHIM PROTECTION | |||
====9.4.1 Shims==== | |||
removed from a tendon shall be kept in matched pairs and protected from the elements by covering with plastic or placing in a temporary storage container until sent to storage.10.0 DOCUMENTATION 10.1 The items requiring documentation in this procedure shall be documented by the assigned field construction person of the working crew on Data Sheet F&Q 8.0 attached to this procedure or as required by Owner Work Package.111 F&Q8.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 50 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 8.0 PLASMA CUTTING TENDON DETENSIONING August 29, 2008 Page 5 of 5 Revision 0 11.0 11.1 12.0 12.1 13.0 13.1 QUALITY CONTROL There is no quality control inspection or documentation required by this procedure. | |||
NOTIFICATION Owner Shift Superintendent shall be notified if there are any problems encountered with the plasma cutting operations. | NOTIFICATION Owner Shift Superintendent shall be notified if there are any problems encountered with the plasma cutting operations. | ||
ATTACHMENTS Data Sheet F&Q 8.0.ATTACHMENT Z23R5 111 F&Q8.0.CR3.SGR Page 51 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 8.0 PLASMA CUTTING TENDON DETENSIONING DATA SHEET F&Q 8.0 August 29, 2008 Page 1 of 1 Revision 0 Revision 1. 6/24/2009 PLASMA CUTTING TENDON DETENSIONING DOCUMENTATION PROJECT: CRYSTAL RIVER UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT TENDON NO.: DATE OF DETENSIONING: | ATTACHMENTS Data Sheet F&Q 8.0.ATTACHMENT Z23R5 111 F&Q8.0.CR3.SGR Page 51 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 8.0 PLASMA CUTTING TENDON DETENSIONING DATA SHEET F&Q 8.0 August 29, 2008 Page 1 of 1 Revision 0 Revision 1. 6/24/2009 PLASMA CUTTING TENDON DETENSIONING DOCUMENTATION PROJECT: CRYSTAL RIVER UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT TENDON NO.: DATE OF DETENSIONING: | ||
| Line 226: | Line 318: | ||
SUPERINTENDENT (OR) CIVIL FIELD ENGINEER: 111 F&Q8.0.CR3.SGR Page 52 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDUREAF&s 8.1 RAM TENDON DETENSIONING August 29,'2008 i lPage I of 6* ,Precision Survilac ,Coporation | SUPERINTENDENT (OR) CIVIL FIELD ENGINEER: 111 F&Q8.0.CR3.SGR Page 52 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDUREAF&s 8.1 RAM TENDON DETENSIONING August 29,'2008 i lPage I of 6* ,Precision Survilac ,Coporation | ||
: L ,..PROGRESS ENERGY FLORIDA, INC.CRYSTAL RIVER NUCLEAR UNIT 3ýSTEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT PRECISION SURVEILLANCE CORPORATION FIELD AND QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE RAM TENDON DETENSIONING Prepared by Apprced by--Appwve~dby LEVEL It Q.C.Title&PROJECT MANAGER, P.E.Title PRESIDENT Title 08&29/08 Date.08129108 Date;08129/08 Date ATTACHMENT Z23R5 12 FQN&%J c PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 8.1 RAM TENDON DETENSIONING August 29, 2008 Page 2 of 6 Revision 0 1.0 PURPOSE 1.1 This procedure will establish the requirements for hydraulic ram de-tensioning of tendons and de-tensioning documentation at Crystal River Unit 3 for tendon work during the Steam Generator Replacement Project.2.0 SCOPE 2.1 The tendons to be de-tensioned by hydraulic ram shall be as specified in Owner Work Package. Tendons can be de-tensioned from both ends or can be de-tensioned from one end as specified in the Owner Work Package.2.2 Prior to de-tensioning a tendon the anchor head, shims, bearing plate and button heads are to be visually inspected and documented per PSC Procedure F&Q 15.1 or on Owner Work Package documentation. | : L ,..PROGRESS ENERGY FLORIDA, INC.CRYSTAL RIVER NUCLEAR UNIT 3ýSTEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT PRECISION SURVEILLANCE CORPORATION FIELD AND QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE RAM TENDON DETENSIONING Prepared by Apprced by--Appwve~dby LEVEL It Q.C.Title&PROJECT MANAGER, P.E.Title PRESIDENT Title 08&29/08 Date.08129108 Date;08129/08 Date ATTACHMENT Z23R5 12 FQN&%J c PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 8.1 RAM TENDON DETENSIONING August 29, 2008 Page 2 of 6 Revision 0 1.0 PURPOSE 1.1 This procedure will establish the requirements for hydraulic ram de-tensioning of tendons and de-tensioning documentation at Crystal River Unit 3 for tendon work during the Steam Generator Replacement Project.2.0 SCOPE 2.1 The tendons to be de-tensioned by hydraulic ram shall be as specified in Owner Work Package. Tendons can be de-tensioned from both ends or can be de-tensioned from one end as specified in the Owner Work Package.2.2 Prior to de-tensioning a tendon the anchor head, shims, bearing plate and button heads are to be visually inspected and documented per PSC Procedure F&Q 15.1 or on Owner Work Package documentation. | ||
2.3 The de-tensioning sequence shall be as specified on the Owner Work Package.3.0 RESPONSIBILITY 3.1 Owner Field Construction Personnel shall be responsible for the physical activities and recording of documentation associated with this procedure. | 2.3 The de-tensioning sequence shall be as specified on the Owner Work Package.3.0 RESPONSIBILITY | ||
===3.1 Owner=== | |||
Field Construction Personnel shall be responsible for the physical activities and recording of documentation associated with this procedure. | |||
==4.0 QUALIFICATIONS== | ==4.0 QUALIFICATIONS== | ||
4.1 Owner Construction Personnel shall be fit by skill, training and experience to perform these duties and PSC tendon training program.5.0 EQUIPMENT 5.1 Hydraulic ram (calibrated) and pump with appropriate hoses and fittings.5.2 Hydraulic pressure gauge (calibrated). | |||
5.3 Miscellaneous Tools, wrenches, ratchets, sockets, shackles, come-alongs, etc.5.4 Plastic bags, plastic sheeting (Visqueen), rags, buckets or drums for waste grease.6.0 PRECAUTIONS 6.1 As in other heavy construction, care should be exercised while working from scaffolds, platforms, ladders, high or restricted access locations. | ===4.1 Owner=== | ||
Construction Personnel shall be fit by skill, training and experience to perform these duties and PSC tendon training program.5.0 EQUIPMENT 5.1 Hydraulic ram (calibrated) and pump with appropriate hoses and fittings.5.2 Hydraulic pressure gauge (calibrated). | |||
===5.3 Miscellaneous=== | |||
Tools, wrenches, ratchets, sockets, shackles, come-alongs, etc.5.4 Plastic bags, plastic sheeting (Visqueen), rags, buckets or drums for waste grease.6.0 PRECAUTIONS 6.1 As in other heavy construction, care should be exercised while working from scaffolds, platforms, ladders, high or restricted access locations. | |||
Respect for the safety and well-being of the other trades and personnel in the area must be observed, especially during hoisting operations. | Respect for the safety and well-being of the other trades and personnel in the area must be observed, especially during hoisting operations. | ||
112 F&Q8.1.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 54 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 8.1 RAM TENDON DETENSIONING August 29, 2008 Page 3 of 6 Revision 0 CAUTION DO NOT STAND UNDER LOADS WHILE STATIONARY OR DURING HOISTING.DO NOT PERMIT OTHERS TO STAND UNDER LOADS.DO NOT THROW OR DROP OBJECTS.6.2 The wire used for the tendons has a minimum breaking strength of 240,000 pounds per square inch. This means that each 7mm diameter wire is capable of withstanding a minimum breaking load of 14,317 pounds. Multiply this by 163 wires in a tendon and you are dealing with forces in excess of two million pounds per tendon.CAUTION (When using rams or on a tendon not being removed.)NEVER CONNECT A WELDING GROUND, PERFORM WELDING ON, OR STRIKE AN ARC NEAR A STRESSED TENDON.NEVER APPLY AN OPEN FLAME TO THE BUTTONHEADS, THE WIRES OR ANCHORAGES OF A STRESSED TENDON.NEVER STRIKE THE BUTTONHEADS, THE WIRES OR THE ANCHORAGES OF A STRESSED TENDON WITH A HAMMER OR ANY OTHER METAL OBJECT.6.3 Prior to applying ANY FORCE to the tendon, the stressing coupler must be fully engaged with the anchorage to be de-tensioned. | 112 F&Q8.1.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 54 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 8.1 RAM TENDON DETENSIONING August 29, 2008 Page 3 of 6 Revision 0 CAUTION DO NOT STAND UNDER LOADS WHILE STATIONARY OR DURING HOISTING.DO NOT PERMIT OTHERS TO STAND UNDER LOADS.DO NOT THROW OR DROP OBJECTS.6.2 The wire used for the tendons has a minimum breaking strength of 240,000 pounds per square inch. This means that each 7mm diameter wire is capable of withstanding a minimum breaking load of 14,317 pounds. Multiply this by 163 wires in a tendon and you are dealing with forces in excess of two million pounds per tendon.CAUTION (When using rams or on a tendon not being removed.)NEVER CONNECT A WELDING GROUND, PERFORM WELDING ON, OR STRIKE AN ARC NEAR A STRESSED TENDON.NEVER APPLY AN OPEN FLAME TO THE BUTTONHEADS, THE WIRES OR ANCHORAGES OF A STRESSED TENDON.NEVER STRIKE THE BUTTONHEADS, THE WIRES OR THE ANCHORAGES OF A STRESSED TENDON WITH A HAMMER OR ANY OTHER METAL OBJECT.6.3 Prior to applying ANY FORCE to the tendon, the stressing coupler must be fully engaged with the anchorage to be de-tensioned. | ||
Also check that the locking bolts on stressing rod (top part of two piece stressing rod) and coupler are present and fastened.CAUTION BE SURE THE STRESSING ROD IS FULLY ENGAGED WITH THE ANCHORAGE BEFORE APPLYING ANY LOAD, REGARDLESS OF HOW SMALL THAT LOAD MIGHT BE.112 F&Q8.1.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 55 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 6.4 During de-tensioning operations the following cautions shall be observed.Wi CAUTION NEVER EXCEED THE OVERSTRESS FORCE OR PRESSURE -80% (1867 kips for a 163 wire tendon) or 11.46 kips FOR THE AMOUNT OF EFFECTIVE WIRES IN A TENDON.DO NOT STAND BEHIND THE JACK WHEN IT IS UNDER LOAD.KEEP HANDS AND FINGERS OUT OF ANY PINCH AREAS.BE ALERT DURING SHIM PLACEMENT AND REMOVAL.7.0 QUALITY CONTROL DOCUMENTATION AND HOLD POINTS 7.1 HOLD POINT -Prior to de-tensioning a tendon Owner Inspector to be notified to perform a visual inspection and documentation of the anchor head, shims, bearing plate and button heads per PSC Procedure F&Q 15.1.8.0 PREREQUISITES 8.1 Prior to removing a grease cap/tendon end protection or placing the jack on a tendon assure that proper tendon is being worked on. Record on Data Sheet F&Q 8.1 or Owner Work Package documentation the information required for tendon number, tendon end and date of de-tensioning. | Also check that the locking bolts on stressing rod (top part of two piece stressing rod) and coupler are present and fastened.CAUTION BE SURE THE STRESSING ROD IS FULLY ENGAGED WITH THE ANCHORAGE BEFORE APPLYING ANY LOAD, REGARDLESS OF HOW SMALL THAT LOAD MIGHT BE.112 F&Q8.1.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 55 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 | ||
===6.4 During=== | |||
de-tensioning operations the following cautions shall be observed.Wi CAUTION NEVER EXCEED THE OVERSTRESS FORCE OR PRESSURE -80% (1867 kips for a 163 wire tendon) or 11.46 kips FOR THE AMOUNT OF EFFECTIVE WIRES IN A TENDON.DO NOT STAND BEHIND THE JACK WHEN IT IS UNDER LOAD.KEEP HANDS AND FINGERS OUT OF ANY PINCH AREAS.BE ALERT DURING SHIM PLACEMENT AND REMOVAL.7.0 QUALITY CONTROL DOCUMENTATION AND HOLD POINTS 7.1 HOLD POINT -Prior to de-tensioning a tendon Owner Inspector to be notified to perform a visual inspection and documentation of the anchor head, shims, bearing plate and button heads per PSC Procedure F&Q 15.1.8.0 PREREQUISITES | |||
===8.1 Prior=== | |||
to removing a grease cap/tendon end protection or placing the jack on a tendon assure that proper tendon is being worked on. Record on Data Sheet F&Q 8.1 or Owner Work Package documentation the information required for tendon number, tendon end and date of de-tensioning. | |||
8.2 The tendon anchorage end should be visually inspected per PSC Procedure F&Q 15.1 prior to de-tensioning. | 8.2 The tendon anchorage end should be visually inspected per PSC Procedure F&Q 15.1 prior to de-tensioning. | ||
9.0 PROCEDURE 9.1 If not previously done, remove the grease cap or end protection from the end being de-tensioned. | |||
9.2 ANCHORAGE CLEANUP 9.2.1 Grease shall be removed from the tendon end using clean non-metallic devices.Bristle brushes and rags with suitable quantities of Viscosity Oil, Viscor Industrial No. 16A solvent or Owner approved solvent to dilute and wash away the grease may also be required. | ===9.0 PROCEDURE=== | ||
9.1 If not previously done, remove the grease cap or end protection from the end being de-tensioned. | |||
===9.2 ANCHORAGE=== | |||
CLEANUP 9.2.1 Grease shall be removed from the tendon end using clean non-metallic devices.Bristle brushes and rags with suitable quantities of Viscosity Oil, Viscor Industrial No. 16A solvent or Owner approved solvent to dilute and wash away the grease may also be required. | |||
This cleanup must be sufficient to permit engagement of the anchorage threads with the stressing rod threads. Record on Data Sheet F&Q 8.1 the anchorage heat codes and amount of effective wires/button heads on tendon end.112 F&Q8.1.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 56 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 8.1 RAM TENDON DETENSIONING August 29, 2008 Page 5 of 6 Revision 0 9.3 TENDON DE-TENSIONING 9.3.1 HOLD POINT -Prior to de-tensioning a tendon Owner Inspector to be notified to perform a visual inspection and documentation of the anchor head, and for vertical tendons the bottom end plates, shims, bearing plate and button heads per PSC Procedure F&Q 15.1.9.3.1.1 De-tensioning of tendons can be performed on both ends of the tendon in a simultaneous and controlled manner or on one tendon end for a vertical tendon as specified in Owner Work Package.9.3.1.2 Align the ram stressing rod with the anchorage and the jack chair with the bearing plate. Ensure that the ram is in alignment within 1/8 inch. Record on Data Sheet F&Q 8.1 or Owner Work Package documentation the ram and gauge identification. | This cleanup must be sufficient to permit engagement of the anchorage threads with the stressing rod threads. Record on Data Sheet F&Q 8.1 the anchorage heat codes and amount of effective wires/button heads on tendon end.112 F&Q8.1.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 56 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 8.1 RAM TENDON DETENSIONING August 29, 2008 Page 5 of 6 Revision 0 9.3 TENDON DE-TENSIONING 9.3.1 HOLD POINT -Prior to de-tensioning a tendon Owner Inspector to be notified to perform a visual inspection and documentation of the anchor head, and for vertical tendons the bottom end plates, shims, bearing plate and button heads per PSC Procedure F&Q 15.1.9.3.1.1 De-tensioning of tendons can be performed on both ends of the tendon in a simultaneous and controlled manner or on one tendon end for a vertical tendon as specified in Owner Work Package.9.3.1.2 Align the ram stressing rod with the anchorage and the jack chair with the bearing plate. Ensure that the ram is in alignment within 1/8 inch. Record on Data Sheet F&Q 8.1 or Owner Work Package documentation the ram and gauge identification. | ||
9.3.1.2.1 The stressing rod and coupler is now screwed onto the anchorage. (Rotate rod counter clockwise several revolutions to align threads, then clockwise to attach).CAUTION VERIFY RAM WILL NOT LOAD SUPPORT RIGGING WHEN PRESSURIZING RAM.9.3.1.3 Before de-tensioning be sure opposite end of tendon is not being worked on. If opposite end of tendon is being worked on, coordinate with the opposite crew and continue. | 9.3.1.2.1 The stressing rod and coupler is now screwed onto the anchorage. (Rotate rod counter clockwise several revolutions to align threads, then clockwise to attach).CAUTION VERIFY RAM WILL NOT LOAD SUPPORT RIGGING WHEN PRESSURIZING RAM.9.3.1.3 Before de-tensioning be sure opposite end of tendon is not being worked on. If opposite end of tendon is being worked on, coordinate with the opposite crew and continue. | ||
Pressurize the ram until the shims under the anchorage become loose and can be removed.9.3.1.3.1 NOTE: A tendon shall never be stressed beyond 80% of the Minimum Guaranteed Ultimate Tensile Strength (GUTS) of the effective wires in that tendon. A 163 wire tendon shall not exceed a force of 1867 kips. For a tendon with missing wires, the maximum tensile force shall be reduced accordingly by 11.46 kips/wire. | Pressurize the ram until the shims under the anchorage become loose and can be removed.9.3.1.3.1 NOTE: A tendon shall never be stressed beyond 80% of the Minimum Guaranteed Ultimate Tensile Strength (GUTS) of the effective wires in that tendon. A 163 wire tendon shall not exceed a force of 1867 kips. For a tendon with missing wires, the maximum tensile force shall be reduced accordingly by 11.46 kips/wire. | ||
9.3.1.4 Remove all shims from between the anchorage and bearing plate. Reduce the ram pressure until the load is reduced to zero. The ram shall be uncoupled from the anchorage. | 9.3.1.4 Remove all shims from between the anchorage and bearing plate. Reduce the ram pressure until the load is reduced to zero. The ram shall be uncoupled from the anchorage. | ||
9.4 TENDON END PROTECTION 9.4.1 Since these tendon ends will have further work performed on them at a later date, the following methods- of tendon end protection shall be used. The tendon end may be covered with a plastic bag or sheeting and taped to provide protection from the elements, or the grease cap may be replaced using the old gaskets.112 F&Q8.1 .CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 57 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 8.1 RAM TENDON DETENSIONING August 29, 2008 Page 6 of 6 Revision 0 9i4.2 Shims removed from a tendon shall be kept in matched pairs and protected from the elements by covering with plastic or placing in a temporary storage container until sent to storage.10.0 DOCUMENTATION 10.1 The items requiring documentation in this procedure shall be documented by the assigned field construction person of the working crew on Data Sheet F&Q 8.1 attached to this procedure or Work Package documentation. | |||
===9.4 TENDON=== | |||
END PROTECTION | |||
====9.4.1 Since==== | |||
these tendon ends will have further work performed on them at a later date, the following methods- of tendon end protection shall be used. The tendon end may be covered with a plastic bag or sheeting and taped to provide protection from the elements, or the grease cap may be replaced using the old gaskets.112 F&Q8.1 .CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 57 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 8.1 RAM TENDON DETENSIONING August 29, 2008 Page 6 of 6 Revision 0 9i4.2 Shims removed from a tendon shall be kept in matched pairs and protected from the elements by covering with plastic or placing in a temporary storage container until sent to storage.10.0 DOCUMENTATION 10.1 The items requiring documentation in this procedure shall be documented by the assigned field construction person of the working crew on Data Sheet F&Q 8.1 attached to this procedure or Work Package documentation. | |||
11.0 QUALITY CONTROL 11.1 There is no quality control inspection or documentation required by this procedure. | 11.0 QUALITY CONTROL 11.1 There is no quality control inspection or documentation required by this procedure. | ||
12.0 NOTIFICATION 12.1 Owner Site Shift Superintendent shall be notified of any problems encountered. | 12.0 NOTIFICATION 12.1 Owner Site Shift Superintendent shall be notified of any problems encountered. | ||
| Line 248: | Line 364: | ||
RAM ID GAUGE ID De-tensioning Sequence Verification: | RAM ID GAUGE ID De-tensioning Sequence Verification: | ||
/ SUPERINTENDENT (OR) CIVIL FIELD ENGINEER: 112 F&Q8.1.CR3.SGR Page 59 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 Precision Surveillance Corporation PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 10.0 TENDON REMOVAL AUgust 29%,2008 Page 1 of 4 Revision P.II 11 PROGRESS ENERGY: FLORIDA, INC.CRYSTAL RIVER NUCLEAR UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT PRECISION SURVEILLANCE CORPORATION FIELD AND QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE TENDON REMOVAL ApprOved by Z LEVEL II Q. C.08129/08 Date Title PROJECT MANAGER, P. E 08/29/08 Date: Title PRESIDENT 08/29/08 Date-Title I ATTACHMENT Z23R5 3T&%A(W.&fF | / SUPERINTENDENT (OR) CIVIL FIELD ENGINEER: 112 F&Q8.1.CR3.SGR Page 59 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 Precision Surveillance Corporation PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 10.0 TENDON REMOVAL AUgust 29%,2008 Page 1 of 4 Revision P.II 11 PROGRESS ENERGY: FLORIDA, INC.CRYSTAL RIVER NUCLEAR UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT PRECISION SURVEILLANCE CORPORATION FIELD AND QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE TENDON REMOVAL ApprOved by Z LEVEL II Q. C.08129/08 Date Title PROJECT MANAGER, P. E 08/29/08 Date: Title PRESIDENT 08/29/08 Date-Title I ATTACHMENT Z23R5 3T&%A(W.&fF | ||
:jVC PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 10.0 TENDON REMOVAL August 29, 2008 Page 2 of 4 Revision 0 1.0 PURPOSE 1.1 This procedure will establish the requirements for the removal of tendons from tendon voids at Crystal River Unit 3 for the vertical and horizontal tendon work during the Steam Generator Replacement Project.2.0 SCOPE 2.1 The tendons to be removed from the tendon voids shall be as specified in the Owner Work Package. Vertical Tendons shall be removed from the top, horizontal tendons shall be removed from the buttress as per the Owner Work Package.3.0 RESPONSIBILITY 3.1 Owner Field Construction Personnel shall be responsible for the physical activities associated with this procedure. | :jVC PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 10.0 TENDON REMOVAL August 29, 2008 Page 2 of 4 Revision 0 1.0 PURPOSE 1.1 This procedure will establish the requirements for the removal of tendons from tendon voids at Crystal River Unit 3 for the vertical and horizontal tendon work during the Steam Generator Replacement Project.2.0 SCOPE 2.1 The tendons to be removed from the tendon voids shall be as specified in the Owner Work Package. Vertical Tendons shall be removed from the top, horizontal tendons shall be removed from the buttress as per the Owner Work Package.3.0 RESPONSIBILITY | ||
===3.1 Owner=== | |||
Field Construction Personnel shall be responsible for the physical activities associated with this procedure. | |||
==4.0 QUALIFICATIONS== | ==4.0 QUALIFICATIONS== | ||
4.1 Owner Field Construction Personnel shall be fit by skill, training and/or experience to perform these duties.5.0 EQUIPMENT 5.1 Tendon Field Coiler.5.2 Cleaning waffle, splice chucks and cables.5.3 Miscellaneous Tools, wrenches, ratchets, sockets, shackles, come-alongs, banders and banding materials, etc.5.4 Plastic bags, plastic sheeting (Visqueen), rags, buckets or drums for waste grease.6.0 PRECAUTIONS 6.1 As in other heavy construction, care should be exercised while working from scaffolds, platforms, ladders, high or restricted access locations. | |||
===4.1 Owner=== | |||
Field Construction Personnel shall be fit by skill, training and/or experience to perform these duties.5.0 EQUIPMENT 5.1 Tendon Field Coiler.5.2 Cleaning waffle, splice chucks and cables.5.3 Miscellaneous Tools, wrenches, ratchets, sockets, shackles, come-alongs, banders and banding materials, etc.5.4 Plastic bags, plastic sheeting (Visqueen), rags, buckets or drums for waste grease.6.0 PRECAUTIONS 6.1 As in other heavy construction, care should be exercised while working from scaffolds, platforms, ladders, high or restricted access locations. | |||
Respect for the safety and well-being of the other trades and personnel in the area must be observed, especially during hoisting operations. | Respect for the safety and well-being of the other trades and personnel in the area must be observed, especially during hoisting operations. | ||
The area in the tendon gallery where a tendon is being removed from the void is to be roped off and personnel are to be kept away from that area during tendon removal.CAUTION: DO NOT STAND UNDER LOADS WHILE STATIONARY OR DURING HOISTING.DO NOT PERMIT OTHERS TO STAND UNDER LOADS.DO NOT THROW OR DROP OBJECTS.STAY AWAY FROM THE AREA IN THE TENDON GALLERY WHILE A TENDON IS BEING REMOVED 113 F&Q10.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 61 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 6.2 Use care when coiling the tendon, it tends to be quite springy and can cause injury if not properly restrained. | The area in the tendon gallery where a tendon is being removed from the void is to be roped off and personnel are to be kept away from that area during tendon removal.CAUTION: DO NOT STAND UNDER LOADS WHILE STATIONARY OR DURING HOISTING.DO NOT PERMIT OTHERS TO STAND UNDER LOADS.DO NOT THROW OR DROP OBJECTS.STAY AWAY FROM THE AREA IN THE TENDON GALLERY WHILE A TENDON IS BEING REMOVED 113 F&Q10.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 61 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 6.2 Use care when coiling the tendon, it tends to be quite springy and can cause injury if not properly restrained. | ||
6.3 Waste grease from the voids could be a slipping safety hazard, during all operations it should be cleaned up and placed in waste drums.7.0 QUALITY CONTROL DOCUMENTATION AND HOLD POINTS 7.1 There are no Quality Control Documentation (QCD) points or HOLD POINTS in this procedure. | |||
===6.3 Waste=== | |||
grease from the voids could be a slipping safety hazard, during all operations it should be cleaned up and placed in waste drums.7.0 QUALITY CONTROL DOCUMENTATION AND HOLD POINTS 7.1 There are no Quality Control Documentation (QCD) points or HOLD POINTS in this procedure. | |||
==8.0 PREREQUISITES== | ==8.0 PREREQUISITES== | ||
8.1 Prior to implementing this procedure the field anchor head cut off operations on the tendon must have been performed as per PSC Procedure F&Q 8.0. If shims have not been removed from under a anchor head they are to be removed, kept in matched pairs and protected from the elements by covering with plastic or placing in a temporary storage container until sent to storage.9.0 PROCEDURE 9.1 TENDON REMOVAL 9.1.1 Remove tendon end protection from each end of the tendon.9.1.2 On the cut end of the horizontal tendon attach a minimum 5/16 inch cable with a void cleaning waffle to one of the cut wires using a wire/cable chuck. This cable will be pulled into the tendon void as the tendon is removed and may be left in the void for later use or removed. The cleaning waffle will remove all excess grease from the void.9.1.3 The trumplet will have excess grease removed after tendon removal with manual degreasing devices.9.1.4 For vertical tendon attach 5/16 inch cable only to cut end to facilitate cleaning at a latter date. If used, secure cable to top bearing plate. Alternatively, a cable can be dropped down the void for cleaning after tendon removal at Owner Field Construction Personnel discretion. | |||
9.1.5 Expand the coiler hub and attach the cable from the field coiler to the tendon end anchor head plate, bolt and apply a light tension on the cable with the coiler.9.1.6 Coil the tendon on the coiler, using extra care as the anchor head enters the coiler. Place two bands on the tendon anchor head after the first revolution. | ===8.1 Prior=== | ||
to implementing this procedure the field anchor head cut off operations on the tendon must have been performed as per PSC Procedure F&Q 8.0. If shims have not been removed from under a anchor head they are to be removed, kept in matched pairs and protected from the elements by covering with plastic or placing in a temporary storage container until sent to storage.9.0 PROCEDURE 9.1 TENDON REMOVAL 9.1.1 Remove tendon end protection from each end of the tendon.9.1.2 On the cut end of the horizontal tendon attach a minimum 5/16 inch cable with a void cleaning waffle to one of the cut wires using a wire/cable chuck. This cable will be pulled into the tendon void as the tendon is removed and may be left in the void for later use or removed. The cleaning waffle will remove all excess grease from the void.9.1.3 The trumplet will have excess grease removed after tendon removal with manual degreasing devices.9.1.4 For vertical tendon attach 5/16 inch cable only to cut end to facilitate cleaning at a latter date. If used, secure cable to top bearing plate. Alternatively, a cable can be dropped down the void for cleaning after tendon removal at Owner Field Construction Personnel discretion. | |||
====9.1.5 Expand==== | |||
the coiler hub and attach the cable from the field coiler to the tendon end anchor head plate, bolt and apply a light tension on the cable with the coiler.9.1.6 Coil the tendon on the coiler, using extra care as the anchor head enters the coiler. Place two bands on the tendon anchor head after the first revolution. | |||
After, band the tendon coils in the coiler for every new loop of the tendon as it is coiled (stagger the placement of the banding). | After, band the tendon coils in the coiler for every new loop of the tendon as it is coiled (stagger the placement of the banding). | ||
The closer to the end of the tendon the more banding of the coils are needed in the coiler.113 F&Q10.O0R3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 62 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 10.0 TENDON REMOVAL August 29, 2008 Page 4 of 4 Revision 0 9.1.7 Detach the waffle cleaner or 5/16 inch cable, if present, from the wire at the cut end of the tendon and secure the cable.9.1.8 Reverse the operation of the coiler and retract the hub to loosen the pulling cable and detach the pulling cable from the tendon end.9.1.9 Hoist the tendon out of the uncoiler, wrap in plastic and lower it to the ground for storage and subsequent scraping.9.1.10 If the tendon voids are to be cleaned at this time refer to PSC Procedure F&Q 11.0, if not protect the void end as per Section 9.2 of this Procedure. | The closer to the end of the tendon the more banding of the coils are needed in the coiler.113 F&Q10.O0R3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 62 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 10.0 TENDON REMOVAL August 29, 2008 Page 4 of 4 Revision 0 9.1.7 Detach the waffle cleaner or 5/16 inch cable, if present, from the wire at the cut end of the tendon and secure the cable.9.1.8 Reverse the operation of the coiler and retract the hub to loosen the pulling cable and detach the pulling cable from the tendon end.9.1.9 Hoist the tendon out of the uncoiler, wrap in plastic and lower it to the ground for storage and subsequent scraping.9.1.10 If the tendon voids are to be cleaned at this time refer to PSC Procedure F&Q 11.0, if not protect the void end as per Section 9.2 of this Procedure. | ||
9.2 VOID END PROTECTION 9.2.1 After the tendon is removed from the void, the tendon void end may be covered with plywood or by attaching a temporary bearing plate cover to the bearing plate, or the grease cap may be replaced using the old gaskets to provide the voids protection from the elements.10.0 DOCUMENTATION 10.1 There is no documentation required by this procedure. | 9.2 VOID END PROTECTION | ||
====9.2.1 After==== | |||
the tendon is removed from the void, the tendon void end may be covered with plywood or by attaching a temporary bearing plate cover to the bearing plate, or the grease cap may be replaced using the old gaskets to provide the voids protection from the elements.10.0 DOCUMENTATION 10.1 There is no documentation required by this procedure. | |||
11.0 QUALITY CONTROL 11.1 There is no quality control inspection or documentation required by this procedure. | 11.0 QUALITY CONTROL 11.1 There is no quality control inspection or documentation required by this procedure. | ||
12.0 NOTIFICATION 12.1 Owner Site Shift Superintendent or Field Engineer shall be notified if any areas of rust, water coating, damage or other types of deterioration are found on tendon wires.13.0 ATTACHMENTS 13.1 None.113 F&Q10.0.CR3.SGR Page 63 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&QV 11.0 TENDON VOID CLEANING August 29,2008 Page 1 of 4 Revision P-1 Precision Surveillance COrporation | 12.0 NOTIFICATION 12.1 Owner Site Shift Superintendent or Field Engineer shall be notified if any areas of rust, water coating, damage or other types of deterioration are found on tendon wires.13.0 ATTACHMENTS 13.1 None.113 F&Q10.0.CR3.SGR Page 63 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&QV 11.0 TENDON VOID CLEANING August 29,2008 Page 1 of 4 Revision P-1 Precision Surveillance COrporation | ||
!PROGRESS ENERGY FLORIDA, INC.CRYSTAL RIVER NUCLEAR UNIT 3 STEAMGENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT PRECISION SURVEILLANCE ,CORPORATION FIELD! AND QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE TENDON VOID CLEANING Prepared by-AI~pivedl by -Approved Ly LEVEL II IQ C.Title 08/29/08 Date PROJECT MANAGER, P.E.0/29/8e Date Title PRESIDENT 08129/08 Date Title V ATTACHMENT Z23R5 14 F&Cp6§EpB4-%$q3g-ý 1.0 PURPOS ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 1.0 PURPOSE 1.1 This procedure will establish the requirements for the cleaning of tendon voids at Crystal River Unit 3 for the vertical and horizontal tendon work during the Steam Generator Replacement Project.2.0 SCOPE 2.1 The tendon voids to be cleaned of excess grease are for those tendons that have been removed and are to be replaced as specified in the Owner Work Package.3.0 RESPONSIBILITY 3.1 Owner Field Construction Personnel shall be responsible for the physical activities associated with this procedure. | !PROGRESS ENERGY FLORIDA, INC.CRYSTAL RIVER NUCLEAR UNIT 3 STEAMGENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT PRECISION SURVEILLANCE ,CORPORATION FIELD! AND QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE TENDON VOID CLEANING Prepared by-AI~pivedl by -Approved Ly LEVEL II IQ C.Title 08/29/08 Date PROJECT MANAGER, P.E.0/29/8e Date Title PRESIDENT 08129/08 Date Title V ATTACHMENT Z23R5 14 F&Cp6§EpB4-%$q3g-ý | ||
===1.0 PURPOS=== | |||
ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 | |||
===1.0 PURPOSE=== | |||
1.1 This procedure will establish the requirements for the cleaning of tendon voids at Crystal River Unit 3 for the vertical and horizontal tendon work during the Steam Generator Replacement Project.2.0 SCOPE 2.1 The tendon voids to be cleaned of excess grease are for those tendons that have been removed and are to be replaced as specified in the Owner Work Package.3.0 RESPONSIBILITY | |||
===3.1 Owner=== | |||
Field Construction Personnel shall be responsible for the physical activities associated with this procedure. | |||
==4.0 QUALIFICATIONS== | ==4.0 QUALIFICATIONS== | ||
4.1 Owner Field Construction Personnel shall be fit by skill, training and/or experience to perform these duties.5.0 EQUIPMENT 5.1 Lengths of 5/16" minimum cable.5.2 Cleaning Waffles: A void cleaning device with attachment eyes on each end to accommodate the 5/16" minimum cable.5.3 Walkie-Talkies: | |||
===4.1 Owner=== | |||
Field Construction Personnel shall be fit by skill, training and/or experience to perform these duties.5.0 EQUIPMENT 5.1 Lengths of 5/16" minimum cable.5.2 Cleaning Waffles: A void cleaning device with attachment eyes on each end to accommodate the 5/16" minimum cable.5.3 Walkie-Talkies: | |||
Or field phones for communications from one end of the void to the other.5.4 Plastic bags, plastic sheeting (Visqueen), rags, buckets or drums for waste grease.6.0 PRECAUTIONS 6.1 As in other heavy construction, care should be exercised while working from scaffolds, platforms, ladders, high or restricted access locations. | Or field phones for communications from one end of the void to the other.5.4 Plastic bags, plastic sheeting (Visqueen), rags, buckets or drums for waste grease.6.0 PRECAUTIONS 6.1 As in other heavy construction, care should be exercised while working from scaffolds, platforms, ladders, high or restricted access locations. | ||
Respect for the safety and well-being of the other trades and personnel in the area must be observed, especially during hoisting operations. | Respect for the safety and well-being of the other trades and personnel in the area must be observed, especially during hoisting operations. | ||
CAUTION DO NOT STAND UNDER LOADS WHILE STATIONARY OR DURING HOISTING.DO NOT PERMIT OTHERS TO STAND UNDER LOADS.DO NOT THROW OR DROP OBJECTS.114 F&Q11.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 65 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 6.2 Waste grease from the voids could be a slipping safety hazard, during all operations 6.2 Waste grease from the voids could be a slipping safety hazard, during all operations it should be cleaned up and placed in waste drums.7.0 QUALITY CONTROL DOCUMENTATION AND HOLD POINTS 7.1 There are no Quality Control Documentation (QCD) points or HOLD POINTS in this procedure. | CAUTION DO NOT STAND UNDER LOADS WHILE STATIONARY OR DURING HOISTING.DO NOT PERMIT OTHERS TO STAND UNDER LOADS.DO NOT THROW OR DROP OBJECTS.114 F&Q11.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 65 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 | ||
===6.2 Waste=== | |||
grease from the voids could be a slipping safety hazard, during all operations | |||
===6.2 Waste=== | |||
grease from the voids could be a slipping safety hazard, during all operations it should be cleaned up and placed in waste drums.7.0 QUALITY CONTROL DOCUMENTATION AND HOLD POINTS 7.1 There are no Quality Control Documentation (QCD) points or HOLD POINTS in this procedure. | |||
==8.0 PREREQUISITES== | ==8.0 PREREQUISITES== | ||
8.1 Prior to implementing this procedure the Tendon must have been removed from the void as per PSC Procedure F&Q 10.0.8.2 Adequate communication must be maintained between both ends of the tendon void.9.0 PROCEDURE 9.1 Remove tendon end protection from each end of the tendon sheath.9.2 At the top end of the vertical tendon sheath or one end of the horizontal tendon sheath attach one end of a cleaning waffle to the 5/16" minimum cable that was left in the void from tendon removal. All connections between the cables and the cleaning waffle shall be made in a streamline fashion so that it does not pose a snagging hazard to the sheathing material.9.3 Pull the 5/16" minimum cable into the void until another 5/16" minimum cable can be attached to the other end of the cleaning waffle. At this point there should be two 5/16" minimum cables attached to the cleaning waffle.9.4 From the bottom end of the vertical tendon sheath or the other end of the horizontal tendon sheath pull the 5/16" minimum cable until the cleaning waffle is reached and disconnected and the remaining cable is removed from the sheath, clean up excess grease removed. Manually clean trumpet area of excess grease.9.5 CAUTION: If the cleaning waffle becomes blocked in the void during cleaning of tendon voids and are not able to be pulled back by hand with the 5/16" minimum cable the Owner Site Shift Superintendent shall be notified for determination of additional action.9.6 Once the cleaning is completed the tendon void ends will be protected by applying a temporary cover or grease cap attached to the bearing plate.114 F&Q11.O0CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 66 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 11.0 TENDON VOID CLEANING August 29, 2008 Page 4 of 4 Revision 0 10.0 DOCUMENTATION 10.1 There is no documentation required by this procedure. | |||
===8.1 Prior=== | |||
to implementing this procedure the Tendon must have been removed from the void as per PSC Procedure F&Q 10.0.8.2 Adequate communication must be maintained between both ends of the tendon void.9.0 PROCEDURE 9.1 Remove tendon end protection from each end of the tendon sheath.9.2 At the top end of the vertical tendon sheath or one end of the horizontal tendon sheath attach one end of a cleaning waffle to the 5/16" minimum cable that was left in the void from tendon removal. All connections between the cables and the cleaning waffle shall be made in a streamline fashion so that it does not pose a snagging hazard to the sheathing material.9.3 Pull the 5/16" minimum cable into the void until another 5/16" minimum cable can be attached to the other end of the cleaning waffle. At this point there should be two 5/16" minimum cables attached to the cleaning waffle.9.4 From the bottom end of the vertical tendon sheath or the other end of the horizontal tendon sheath pull the 5/16" minimum cable until the cleaning waffle is reached and disconnected and the remaining cable is removed from the sheath, clean up excess grease removed. Manually clean trumpet area of excess grease.9.5 CAUTION: If the cleaning waffle becomes blocked in the void during cleaning of tendon voids and are not able to be pulled back by hand with the 5/16" minimum cable the Owner Site Shift Superintendent shall be notified for determination of additional action.9.6 Once the cleaning is completed the tendon void ends will be protected by applying a temporary cover or grease cap attached to the bearing plate.114 F&Q11.O0CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 66 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 11.0 TENDON VOID CLEANING August 29, 2008 Page 4 of 4 Revision 0 10.0 DOCUMENTATION 10.1 There is no documentation required by this procedure. | |||
11.0 QUALITY CONTROL 11.1 There is no quality control inspection or documentation required by this procedure. | 11.0 QUALITY CONTROL 11.1 There is no quality control inspection or documentation required by this procedure. | ||
12.0 NOTIFICATION 12.1 Owner Site Shift Superintendent shall be notified when there is any blockage in the tendon void preventing the cleaning waffle from being pulled through the sheathing. | 12.0 NOTIFICATION 12.1 Owner Site Shift Superintendent shall be notified when there is any blockage in the tendon void preventing the cleaning waffle from being pulled through the sheathing. | ||
13.0 ATTACHMENTS 13.1 None 114 F&Q11.0.CR3.SGR Page 67 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&13.0 W I TENDON INSTALLATION I August 29, 2008 Page 1 of 5 Revision 0 Precision Surveillance Corporation Revision 1,6/24/09 I., : PROGRESS ENERGY FLORIDA, INC.CRYSTAL RIVER NUCLEAR UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT PRECISION SURVEILLANCE CORPORATION FIELD AND QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE TENDON INSTALLATION Prepared by Approved by, " Ap- rv~u oy ..QA MANAGER Title 06/24/09 Date PROJECT MANAGER, PIE.Title 06/24109 Date PRESIDENT' 06/24109 Date Title 115 F&Q13.0CR3.SGT doc: Page 68 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 13.0 TENDON INSTALLATION August 29, 2008 Page 2 of 5 Revision 0 Revision 1, 6/24/09 1.0 PURPOSE 1.1 This procedure will establish the requirements for the installation of tendons and quality control inspections/data recording at Crystal River Unit 3 for the vertical and horizontal tendon work during the Steam Generator Replacement Project.2.0 SCOPE 2.1 The tendons to be installed are those removed from the tendon voids as specified in the Owner Work Package. Vertical Tendons shall be installed from the top, horizontal tendons shall be installed from the buttress as per the Owner Work Package 3.0 RESPONSIBILITY 3.1 Owner Field Construction Personnel shall be responsible for the physical activities associated with this procedure. | 13.0 ATTACHMENTS 13.1 None 114 F&Q11.0.CR3.SGR Page 67 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&13.0 W I TENDON INSTALLATION I August 29, 2008 Page 1 of 5 Revision 0 Precision Surveillance Corporation Revision 1,6/24/09 I., : PROGRESS ENERGY FLORIDA, INC.CRYSTAL RIVER NUCLEAR UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT PRECISION SURVEILLANCE CORPORATION FIELD AND QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE TENDON INSTALLATION Prepared by Approved by, " Ap- rv~u oy ..QA MANAGER Title 06/24/09 Date PROJECT MANAGER, PIE.Title 06/24109 Date PRESIDENT' 06/24109 Date Title 115 F&Q13.0CR3.SGT doc: Page 68 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 13.0 TENDON INSTALLATION August 29, 2008 Page 2 of 5 Revision 0 Revision 1, 6/24/09 1.0 PURPOSE 1.1 This procedure will establish the requirements for the installation of tendons and quality control inspections/data recording at Crystal River Unit 3 for the vertical and horizontal tendon work during the Steam Generator Replacement Project.2.0 SCOPE 2.1 The tendons to be installed are those removed from the tendon voids as specified in the Owner Work Package. Vertical Tendons shall be installed from the top, horizontal tendons shall be installed from the buttress as per the Owner Work Package 3.0 RESPONSIBILITY | ||
3.2 Owner Quality Control Personnel to perform all inspections and data recording. | |||
===3.1 Owner=== | |||
Field Construction Personnel shall be responsible for the physical activities associated with this procedure. | |||
===3.2 Owner=== | |||
Quality Control Personnel to perform all inspections and data recording. | |||
==4.0 QUALIFICATIONS== | ==4.0 QUALIFICATIONS== | ||
4.1 Owner Field Construction Personnel shall be fit by skill, training and/or experience to perform these duties.4.2 Owner Quality Control Personnel shall be qualified to a minimum of Level II capability in accordance with the requirements of ANSI N45.2.6.5.0 EQUIPMENT 5.1 Tendon Field Coiler, tendon puller (tugger).5.2 Miscellaneous Tools, wrenches, ratchets, sockets, shackles, come-alongs, etc.5.3 Plastic bags, plastic sheeting (Visqueen), rags, buckets or drums for waste grease.5.4 Walkie-Talkies: | |||
===4.1 Owner=== | |||
Field Construction Personnel shall be fit by skill, training and/or experience to perform these duties.4.2 Owner Quality Control Personnel shall be qualified to a minimum of Level II capability in accordance with the requirements of ANSI N45.2.6.5.0 EQUIPMENT 5.1 Tendon Field Coiler, tendon puller (tugger).5.2 Miscellaneous Tools, wrenches, ratchets, sockets, shackles, come-alongs, etc.5.3 Plastic bags, plastic sheeting (Visqueen), rags, buckets or drums for waste grease.5.4 Walkie-Talkies: | |||
Or field phones for communications from one end of the void to the other.6.0 PRECAUTIONS 6.1 As in other heavy construction, care should be exercised while working from scaffolds, platforms, ladders, high or restricted access locations. | Or field phones for communications from one end of the void to the other.6.0 PRECAUTIONS 6.1 As in other heavy construction, care should be exercised while working from scaffolds, platforms, ladders, high or restricted access locations. | ||
Respect for the safety and well-being of the other trades and personnel in the area must be observed, especially during hoisting operations. | Respect for the safety and well-being of the other trades and personnel in the area must be observed, especially during hoisting operations. | ||
ATTACHMENT Z23R5 115 F&Q13.0.CR3.SGT Page 69 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 13.0 TENDON INSTALLATION August 29, 2008 Page 3 of 5 Revision 0 Revision 1, 6/24/09 CAUTION DO NOT STAND UNDER LOADS WHILE STATIONARY OR DURING HOISTING.DO NOT PERMIT OTHERS TO STAND UNDER LOADS.DO NOT THROW OR DROP OBJECTS.6.2 Use care when uncoiling the tendon and installing it in the void. The tendon has considerable spring force and must be prevented from uncoiling violently. | ATTACHMENT Z23R5 115 F&Q13.0.CR3.SGT Page 69 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 13.0 TENDON INSTALLATION August 29, 2008 Page 3 of 5 Revision 0 Revision 1, 6/24/09 CAUTION DO NOT STAND UNDER LOADS WHILE STATIONARY OR DURING HOISTING.DO NOT PERMIT OTHERS TO STAND UNDER LOADS.DO NOT THROW OR DROP OBJECTS.6.2 Use care when uncoiling the tendon and installing it in the void. The tendon has considerable spring force and must be prevented from uncoiling violently. | ||
6.3 If tendon becomes stuck do not exceed a pulling force of 35,000 lbs. on the tendon tugger.7.0 QUALITY CONTROL DOCUMENTATION AND HOLD POINTS 7.1 All Quality Control Documentation (QCD) points noted in this procedure are HOLD POINTS.8.0 PREREQUISITES 8.1 Tendon void cleaning has been performed per PSC Procedure F&Q 11.0.8.2 Verify sheathing is installed and braced to accept loads imposed during installation. | 6.3 If tendon becomes stuck do not exceed a pulling force of 35,000 lbs. on the tendon tugger.7.0 QUALITY CONTROL DOCUMENTATION AND HOLD POINTS 7.1 All Quality Control Documentation (QCD) points noted in this procedure are HOLD POINTS.8.0 PREREQUISITES | ||
8.3 Verify correct tendon has been selected for installation into the selected tendon void.9.0 PROCEDURE 9.1 If the pulling device, which is used to control the twists in the tendon and to assist with tendon insertion was not applied during storage, it will now be attached using the following steps: 9.1.1 Approximately the first three to four feet of the free end of the tendon will be solvent cleaned with Viscosity Oil, Viscor Industrial No. 16A solvent or Owner approved equivalent to remove the grease compound. | |||
===8.1 Tendon=== | |||
void cleaning has been performed per PSC Procedure F&Q 11.0.8.2 Verify sheathing is installed and braced to accept loads imposed during installation. | |||
===8.3 Verify=== | |||
correct tendon has been selected for installation into the selected tendon void.9.0 PROCEDURE 9.1 If the pulling device, which is used to control the twists in the tendon and to assist with tendon insertion was not applied during storage, it will now be attached using the following steps: 9.1.1 Approximately the first three to four feet of the free end of the tendon will be solvent cleaned with Viscosity Oil, Viscor Industrial No. 16A solvent or Owner approved equivalent to remove the grease compound. | |||
This will allow placement of the grip assist material and placement of the Kellum's Grip.9.1.2 About three to four feet of the tendon will be wrapped with a grip assisting material such as strips of rubber and tape, that will enhance the gripping properties of the Kellum's Grip. A nose cone will be added over the taped end, with a Kellum's Grip placed over the nose cone and grip assist material, and secured with tape, wire, or bands. This encasement shall be installed in a streamline fashion with no sharp edges, abrupt changes in geometry, etc.9.1.3 Attach the pull back eyebolt to the shop anchor head if required.115 F&Q13.0.CR3.SGT ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 70 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 13.0 TENDON INSTALLATION August 29, 2008 Page 4 of 5 Revision 0 Revision 1, 6/24/09 9.2 Hoist the tendon with one sling and place it in the uncoiler.9.2.1 With the tendon in the uncoiler, align the free end of the tendon with the exit/feed opening of the uncoiler. | This will allow placement of the grip assist material and placement of the Kellum's Grip.9.1.2 About three to four feet of the tendon will be wrapped with a grip assisting material such as strips of rubber and tape, that will enhance the gripping properties of the Kellum's Grip. A nose cone will be added over the taped end, with a Kellum's Grip placed over the nose cone and grip assist material, and secured with tape, wire, or bands. This encasement shall be installed in a streamline fashion with no sharp edges, abrupt changes in geometry, etc.9.1.3 Attach the pull back eyebolt to the shop anchor head if required.115 F&Q13.0.CR3.SGT ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 70 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 13.0 TENDON INSTALLATION August 29, 2008 Page 4 of 5 Revision 0 Revision 1, 6/24/09 9.2 Hoist the tendon with one sling and place it in the uncoiler.9.2.1 With the tendon in the uncoiler, align the free end of the tendon with the exit/feed opening of the uncoiler. | ||
The uncoiler will provide the control for uncoiling and placing the tendon into the tendon void.9.2.2 The pull back eyebolt is secured to the spindle of the uncoiler. | The uncoiler will provide the control for uncoiling and placing the tendon into the tendon void.9.2.2 The pull back eyebolt is secured to the spindle of the uncoiler. | ||
This will keep the shop anchor head securely out of the way during uncoiling. | This will keep the shop anchor head securely out of the way during uncoiling. | ||
9.2.3 Expand the coiler hub and install the tendon retention braces.9.2.4 At any time prior to pulling in the tendon a tendon puller, also called a "tugger" may be attached to the bearing plate at the pulling end of the tendon void or a puller cable may be positioned at this end. Tendon feed-in guide rolls may be attached to the bearing plate at the feed-in end of the tendon void.9.2.5 A length of 1/4 inch wire or trailer cable will be placed in the void to use as a"messenger" through the sheath and hook up the tendon puller cable. Pull back the cable with the wire or cable and once out at the feed-in end, hook up the cable to the tendon.9.2.6 The outer bands holding the tendon in a coil shape can now be cut. Do not cut all coil holding bands. Do not cut the bands holding the wires in a bundle. Coil bands are cut to free up the coil as the tendon is being pulled into the void.9.2.7 Gradually rotate the uncoiler while placing the tendon into the void with the tendon puller cable.9.2.7.1 Regulate the speed of the uncoiler while maintaining communications with the placing crews at each end of the tendon void, so that the bands holding the wire in a bundle can be cut and removed just before entering the tendon void. The remaining coil holding bands will be cut as the tendon is being placed.9.2.8 If the tendon is to be button headed at a later time, be certain the protective cap or plate over the shop anchor head is still in position. | |||
====9.2.3 Expand==== | |||
the coiler hub and install the tendon retention braces.9.2.4 At any time prior to pulling in the tendon a tendon puller, also called a "tugger" may be attached to the bearing plate at the pulling end of the tendon void or a puller cable may be positioned at this end. Tendon feed-in guide rolls may be attached to the bearing plate at the feed-in end of the tendon void.9.2.5 A length of 1/4 inch wire or trailer cable will be placed in the void to use as a"messenger" through the sheath and hook up the tendon puller cable. Pull back the cable with the wire or cable and once out at the feed-in end, hook up the cable to the tendon.9.2.6 The outer bands holding the tendon in a coil shape can now be cut. Do not cut all coil holding bands. Do not cut the bands holding the wires in a bundle. Coil bands are cut to free up the coil as the tendon is being pulled into the void.9.2.7 Gradually rotate the uncoiler while placing the tendon into the void with the tendon puller cable.9.2.7.1 Regulate the speed of the uncoiler while maintaining communications with the placing crews at each end of the tendon void, so that the bands holding the wire in a bundle can be cut and removed just before entering the tendon void. The remaining coil holding bands will be cut as the tendon is being placed.9.2.8 If the tendon is to be button headed at a later time, be certain the protective cap or plate over the shop anchor head is still in position. | |||
At this time, place the tendon such that the free wire end is protruding approximately 3 to 4 feet beyond the face of the bearing plate. The threaded bolt/eye bolt inserted onto the shop anchor head is used to guide the shop anchor head into the trumpet.9.2.9 The grip assisting material and kellum's grip and nose cone may be removed at this time or later before button heading.9.2.10 If button heading is not to be performed at this time, the following methods of tendon end protection may be used on the ends at the discretion of the Owner Site Superintendent. | At this time, place the tendon such that the free wire end is protruding approximately 3 to 4 feet beyond the face of the bearing plate. The threaded bolt/eye bolt inserted onto the shop anchor head is used to guide the shop anchor head into the trumpet.9.2.9 The grip assisting material and kellum's grip and nose cone may be removed at this time or later before button heading.9.2.10 If button heading is not to be performed at this time, the following methods of tendon end protection may be used on the ends at the discretion of the Owner Site Superintendent. | ||
The tendon end may be covered with a plastic bag or sheeting and taped to provide protection from the elements, or the grease cap may be replaced using the old gasket.115 F&Q13.0.CR3.SGT ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 71 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 13.0 TENDON INSTALLATION August 29, 2008)Page 5 of 5 Revision 0 Revision 1, 6/24/09 10.0 DOCUMENTATION 10.1 The items requiring documentation in this procedure shall be documented by the Owner Quality Control Inspector on Data Sheet F&Q 13.0 attached to this procedure or on documentation provided in Work Packages.11.0 QUALITY CONTROL 11.1 QCD -Inspector to document on Data Sheet F&Q 13.0 the information required for tendon number and date of installation. | The tendon end may be covered with a plastic bag or sheeting and taped to provide protection from the elements, or the grease cap may be replaced using the old gasket.115 F&Q13.0.CR3.SGT ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 71 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 13.0 TENDON INSTALLATION August 29, 2008)Page 5 of 5 Revision 0 Revision 1, 6/24/09 10.0 DOCUMENTATION 10.1 The items requiring documentation in this procedure shall be documented by the Owner Quality Control Inspector on Data Sheet F&Q 13.0 attached to this procedure or on documentation provided in Work Packages.11.0 QUALITY CONTROL 11.1 QCD -Inspector to document on Data Sheet F&Q 13.0 the information required for tendon number and date of installation. | ||
| Line 301: | Line 464: | ||
Anytime pitting is in evidence, the material shall be graded as rejected. | Anytime pitting is in evidence, the material shall be graded as rejected. | ||
Thirty or more passes with 100 grit sandpaper to bright metal.115 F&Q13.0.CR3.SGT ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 74 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 c PSC.PROCEDURE F&Q 14.0 TENDON BUTTONHEADING AUgust 29, 2008"Page lof8 Revision O Precision Surveillance Corporation Revision 1,.6/24/09 PROGRESS ENERGY FLORIDA, INC.CRYSTAL RIVER NUCLEAR UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT PRECISION SURVEILLANCE CORPORATION FIELD AND QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE TENDON FIELD ANCHOR HEAD AND BUTTONHEADING APPLICATION p QA MANAGER 06/24/09 Date Prepared by ZApproved by-Appi u~ed-6y-Title, PROJECT MANAGER, P.E.06/24/09 Date Title PRESIDENT 06i24/09 Date Title.I ATTACHMENT Z23R5 116 F&$4.0 SL~ | Thirty or more passes with 100 grit sandpaper to bright metal.115 F&Q13.0.CR3.SGT ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 74 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 c PSC.PROCEDURE F&Q 14.0 TENDON BUTTONHEADING AUgust 29, 2008"Page lof8 Revision O Precision Surveillance Corporation Revision 1,.6/24/09 PROGRESS ENERGY FLORIDA, INC.CRYSTAL RIVER NUCLEAR UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT PRECISION SURVEILLANCE CORPORATION FIELD AND QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE TENDON FIELD ANCHOR HEAD AND BUTTONHEADING APPLICATION p QA MANAGER 06/24/09 Date Prepared by ZApproved by-Appi u~ed-6y-Title, PROJECT MANAGER, P.E.06/24/09 Date Title PRESIDENT 06i24/09 Date Title.I ATTACHMENT Z23R5 116 F&$4.0 SL~ | ||
PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 14.0 TENDON BUTTONHEADING August 29, 2008 Page 2 of 8 Revision 0 Revision 1, 6/24/09 1.0 PURPOSE 1.1 This procedure will establish the requirements for the application of field anchor heads to tendons and field buttonheading of the tendons along with quality control inspections/data recording at Crystal River Unit 3 for the vertical and horizontal tendon work during the Steam Generator Replacement Project.2.0 SCOPE 2.1 The tendons to have the field anchor head and buttonheads applied shall be for those tendons removed as specified in the Work Package. Vertical Tendons shall have the button heads and anchor head applied to the bottom (tendon gallery) end of the tendon wires. Horizontal tendons shall have the button heads and field anchor head applied at the buttress as per the Work Package.3.0 RESPONSIBILITY 3.1 Owner Field Construction Personnel shall be responsible for the physical activities associated with this procedure. | PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 14.0 TENDON BUTTONHEADING August 29, 2008 Page 2 of 8 Revision 0 Revision 1, 6/24/09 1.0 PURPOSE 1.1 This procedure will establish the requirements for the application of field anchor heads to tendons and field buttonheading of the tendons along with quality control inspections/data recording at Crystal River Unit 3 for the vertical and horizontal tendon work during the Steam Generator Replacement Project.2.0 SCOPE 2.1 The tendons to have the field anchor head and buttonheads applied shall be for those tendons removed as specified in the Work Package. Vertical Tendons shall have the button heads and anchor head applied to the bottom (tendon gallery) end of the tendon wires. Horizontal tendons shall have the button heads and field anchor head applied at the buttress as per the Work Package.3.0 RESPONSIBILITY | ||
3.2 Owner Quality Control Personnel to perform all inspections and data recording. | |||
===3.1 Owner=== | |||
Field Construction Personnel shall be responsible for the physical activities associated with this procedure. | |||
===3.2 Owner=== | |||
Quality Control Personnel to perform all inspections and data recording. | |||
==4.0 QUALIFICATIONS== | ==4.0 QUALIFICATIONS== | ||
4.1 Owner Field Construction Personnel shall be fit by skill, training and/or experience to perform these duties.4.2 Owner Quality Control Personnel shall be qualified to a minimum of Level II capability in accordance with the requirements of ANSI N45.2.6.5.0 EQUIPMENT 5.1 B-End Device.5.2 Tendon Field Button header.5.3 Button head GO, No-Go Gauge, Feeler Gauges, Optical Comparator, Eccentricity Gauge.5.4 Miscellaneous Tools, wrenches, ratchets, sockets, shackles, come-alongs, etc.5.5 Plastic bags, plastic sheeting (Visqueen), rags, buckets or drums for waste grease.116 F&Q14.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 76 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 14.0 TENDON BUTTONHEADING August 29, 2008 Page 3 of 8 Revision 0 Revision 1, 6/24/09 6.0 PRECAUTIONS 6.1 As in other heavy construction, care should be exercised while working from scaffolds, platforms, ladders high or restricted access locations. | |||
===4.1 Owner=== | |||
Field Construction Personnel shall be fit by skill, training and/or experience to perform these duties.4.2 Owner Quality Control Personnel shall be qualified to a minimum of Level II capability in accordance with the requirements of ANSI N45.2.6.5.0 EQUIPMENT 5.1 B-End Device.5.2 Tendon Field Button header.5.3 Button head GO, No-Go Gauge, Feeler Gauges, Optical Comparator, Eccentricity Gauge.5.4 Miscellaneous Tools, wrenches, ratchets, sockets, shackles, come-alongs, etc.5.5 Plastic bags, plastic sheeting (Visqueen), rags, buckets or drums for waste grease.116 F&Q14.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 76 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 14.0 TENDON BUTTONHEADING August 29, 2008 Page 3 of 8 Revision 0 Revision 1, 6/24/09 6.0 PRECAUTIONS 6.1 As in other heavy construction, care should be exercised while working from scaffolds, platforms, ladders high or restricted access locations. | |||
Respect for the safety and well-being of the other trades and personnel in the area must be observed, especially during hoisting operations. | Respect for the safety and well-being of the other trades and personnel in the area must be observed, especially during hoisting operations. | ||
CAUTION DO NOT STAND UNDER LOADS WHILE STATIONARY OR DURING HOISTING.DO NOT PERMIT OTHERS TO STAND UNDER LOADS.DO NOT THROW OR DROP OBJECTS.7.0 QUALITY CONTROL DOCUMENTATION AND HOLD POINTS 7.1 All Quality Control Documentation (QCD) points noted in this procedure are HOLD L" POINTS.8.0 PREREQUISITES 8.1 The tendon will have been installed in the void.9.0 PROCEDURE 9.1 APPLYING ANCHORHEAD 9.1.1 Prepare the field end by removing any protective coverings or pulling devices.9.1.2 Make sure the end of the tendon protrudes beyond the bearing plate about 3-4 feet.9.1.3 If needed, clean the individual wires with #16A Solvent or Owner approved equivalent about 18 inches from the end.9.1.4 Position the anchor head into the tendon button heading frame or holder making sure the buttonhead bearing side of the anchor head faces away from the bearing plate.9.1.5 With the anchor head properly placed in the holder, run it back toward the bearing plate until the wire ends would extend about 2 inches into the anchor head.116 F&Q14.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 77 of 130 PCHG-DESG EENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 9.1.6 Place each wire into the anchor head by slightly bowing it and allowing it to snap into the wire hole. Place the bottom wires of the tendon into the lower quadrant holes of the anchor head, keeping the wires as parallel as possible to prevent wire crossing. | CAUTION DO NOT STAND UNDER LOADS WHILE STATIONARY OR DURING HOISTING.DO NOT PERMIT OTHERS TO STAND UNDER LOADS.DO NOT THROW OR DROP OBJECTS.7.0 QUALITY CONTROL DOCUMENTATION AND HOLD POINTS 7.1 All Quality Control Documentation (QCD) points noted in this procedure are HOLD L" POINTS.8.0 PREREQUISITES 8.1 The tendon will have been installed in the void.9.0 PROCEDURE 9.1 APPLYING ANCHORHEAD | ||
====9.1.1 Prepare==== | |||
the field end by removing any protective coverings or pulling devices.9.1.2 Make sure the end of the tendon protrudes beyond the bearing plate about 3-4 feet.9.1.3 If needed, clean the individual wires with #16A Solvent or Owner approved equivalent about 18 inches from the end.9.1.4 Position the anchor head into the tendon button heading frame or holder making sure the buttonhead bearing side of the anchor head faces away from the bearing plate.9.1.5 With the anchor head properly placed in the holder, run it back toward the bearing plate until the wire ends would extend about 2 inches into the anchor head.116 F&Q14.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 77 of 130 PCHG-DESG EENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 | |||
====9.1.6 Place==== | |||
each wire into the anchor head by slightly bowing it and allowing it to snap into the wire hole. Place the bottom wires of the tendon into the lower quadrant holes of the anchor head, keeping the wires as parallel as possible to prevent wire crossing. | |||
Do not miss holes while placing the wires, as it will be very difficult to place a missed wire in the center wire holes when all the surrounding holes are filled.9.1.6.1 If a hole is missed, it may be necessary to remove some placed wires to allow placement of the missed wires.9.1.7 After all the wires are placed, push the anchor head back towards the bearing plate to allow free wire length for buttonheading operations. | Do not miss holes while placing the wires, as it will be very difficult to place a missed wire in the center wire holes when all the surrounding holes are filled.9.1.6.1 If a hole is missed, it may be necessary to remove some placed wires to allow placement of the missed wires.9.1.7 After all the wires are placed, push the anchor head back towards the bearing plate to allow free wire length for buttonheading operations. | ||
The tendon is now ready to be buttonheaded. | The tendon is now ready to be buttonheaded. | ||
9.2 BUTTONHEADING MACHINE and OPERATOR QUALIFICATION 9.2.1 Prior to forming any buttonheads on a tendon, the buttonhead machine and operator will be tested for the ability to form acceptable buttonheads, observing the requirements of this procedure. | |||
===9.2 BUTTONHEADING=== | |||
MACHINE and OPERATOR QUALIFICATION | |||
====9.2.1 Prior==== | |||
to forming any buttonheads on a tendon, the buttonhead machine and operator will be tested for the ability to form acceptable buttonheads, observing the requirements of this procedure. | |||
9.2.2 As a minimum, the machine shall be qualified whenever another machine is substituted; whenever the machine has had mechanical repairs or parts replacement that would influence the forming of the buttonhead; or whenever the machine is determined to be responsible for forming unacceptable buttonheads. | 9.2.2 As a minimum, the machine shall be qualified whenever another machine is substituted; whenever the machine has had mechanical repairs or parts replacement that would influence the forming of the buttonhead; or whenever the machine is determined to be responsible for forming unacceptable buttonheads. | ||
9.2.3 Each machine or operator qualification shall be by forming buttonheads on each end of three sample wires about 12 inches in length.9.2.4 QCD Notification | 9.2.3 Each machine or operator qualification shall be by forming buttonheads on each end of three sample wires about 12 inches in length.9.2.4 QCD Notification | ||
| Line 317: | Line 499: | ||
If the visually inspected buttonheads appear to exceed the acceptance criteria, they shall be mechanically checked with the appropriate gauge for the suspect deficiency. | If the visually inspected buttonheads appear to exceed the acceptance criteria, they shall be mechanically checked with the appropriate gauge for the suspect deficiency. | ||
9.2.5 If all the buttonheads are acceptable, that machine and operator is therefore qualified for the forming of buttonheads. | 9.2.5 If all the buttonheads are acceptable, that machine and operator is therefore qualified for the forming of buttonheads. | ||
9.2.6 Machines that do not form acceptable buttonheads, excluding problems with the wire, shall not be used in the forming of buttonheads until that machine is repaired and qualified or replaced by a qualified machine. Operators that do not form acceptable buttonheads shall not form buttonheads in production until qualified. | |||
====9.2.6 Machines==== | |||
that do not form acceptable buttonheads, excluding problems with the wire, shall not be used in the forming of buttonheads until that machine is repaired and qualified or replaced by a qualified machine. Operators that do not form acceptable buttonheads shall not form buttonheads in production until qualified. | |||
9.2.7 The qualification of each machine and operator tested shall be documented on the Buttonheading Machine Qualification Sheet by the QC Inspector. | 9.2.7 The qualification of each machine and operator tested shall be documented on the Buttonheading Machine Qualification Sheet by the QC Inspector. | ||
116 F&Q14.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 78 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 I ir PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 14.0 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 14.0 TENDON BUTTONHEADING August 29, 2008 Page 5 of 8 Revision 0 Revision 1, 6/24/09 I 9.3 FIELD BUTTONHEADING 9.3.1 Be sure the wire ends are clean and dry. Remove any built-up corrosion protection material from approximately the first 12 inches of the wire.9.3.2 Set up the buttonheader and pump for access to the tendon to be buttonheaded. | 116 F&Q14.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 78 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 I ir PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 14.0 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 14.0 TENDON BUTTONHEADING August 29, 2008 Page 5 of 8 Revision 0 Revision 1, 6/24/09 I 9.3 FIELD BUTTONHEADING 9.3.1 Be sure the wire ends are clean and dry. Remove any built-up corrosion protection material from approximately the first 12 inches of the wire.9.3.2 Set up the buttonheader and pump for access to the tendon to be buttonheaded. | ||
| Line 341: | Line 525: | ||
This procedure is based on Inryco Button head Specification BH102.1 .INTRODUCTION: | This procedure is based on Inryco Button head Specification BH102.1 .INTRODUCTION: | ||
The ultimate strength of wires with upset button heads, as used for the Post Tensioning method, depends on the following factors:-Hardness of the anchor head-Dimensions of borehole in the anchor head-Button head dimensions | The ultimate strength of wires with upset button heads, as used for the Post Tensioning method, depends on the following factors:-Hardness of the anchor head-Dimensions of borehole in the anchor head-Button head dimensions | ||
-Button head eccentricity For button heads on stress relieved wire corresponding to ASTM A421 Type BA, to 0.2756 inch diameter, to develop the ultimate strength of wire, the following standards must be met: 2. Dimensions of Wire Hole For the most effective performance of the button head, the bore through the base material must be .286" to .300". The corners at the button head bearing surface will be broken to .015" chamfer + .010", -.005".3. Button head Dimensions 4.1. Diameter | -Button head eccentricity For button heads on stress relieved wire corresponding to ASTM A421 Type BA, to 0.2756 inch diameter, to develop the ultimate strength of wire, the following standards must be met: 2. Dimensions of Wire Hole For the most effective performance of the button head, the bore through the base material must be .286" to .300". The corners at the button head bearing surface will be broken to .015" chamfer + .010", -.005".3. Button head Dimensions | ||
===4.1. Diameter=== | |||
0.410 inch minimum to 0.450 inch maximum 4. Button head Defects 5.1. Fissures in Button heads 5.1.1. Splits are defined as fissures with their larger dimension oriented within +/- 500 to the wire axis. Split width is the dimension perpendicular to larger dimension. | 0.410 inch minimum to 0.450 inch maximum 4. Button head Defects 5.1. Fissures in Button heads 5.1.1. Splits are defined as fissures with their larger dimension oriented within +/- 500 to the wire axis. Split width is the dimension perpendicular to larger dimension. | ||
: a. Maximum split width allowed for any one split: 0.060 inches.b. A button head may have several splits, maximum 4 per buttonhead. | : a. Maximum split width allowed for any one split: 0.060 inches.b. A button head may have several splits, maximum 4 per buttonhead. | ||
| Line 347: | Line 534: | ||
116 F&Q14.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 85 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 14.0 TENDON BUTTONHEADING BUTTONHEAD SPECIFICATION BHCR3 August 29, 2008 Page 2 of 2 Revision 0 5. Eccentricity of Button heads Button head eccentricity is defined as a lack of alignment between the axis of the button head with the axis of the wire.Maximum allowable eccentricity: | 116 F&Q14.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 85 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 14.0 TENDON BUTTONHEADING BUTTONHEAD SPECIFICATION BHCR3 August 29, 2008 Page 2 of 2 Revision 0 5. Eccentricity of Button heads Button head eccentricity is defined as a lack of alignment between the axis of the button head with the axis of the wire.Maximum allowable eccentricity: | ||
0.010 inches.116 F&Q14.0.CR3.SGR Page 86 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 15.0 TENDON RESTRESSING August 29, 2008.....i. .. r. .Page 1 of 8 R Revision 0 Survelac Corporation Revision 1, 6/24/09 PROGRESS ENERGY FLORIDA, INC.CRYSTAL: RIVER NUCLEAR UNIT 3 STEAM. GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT PRECISION SURVEILLANCE CORPORATION FIELD AND QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE TENDON RESTRESSING Prepared by Ap rved by -Appr~oved by QA MANAGER Title 06/24/09 Date PROJECT MANAGER, P.E.06/24/09 Date Title PRESIDENT 06/24/09 Date Title, I 117 F&Q15.0.CR3.SGR~doc Page 87 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 15.0 TENDON RESTRESSING August 29, 2008 Page 2 of 8 Revision 0 Revision 1, 6/24/09 1.0 PURPOSE 1.1 This procedure will establish the requirements for the re-stressing of tendons and quality control inspections/data recording at Crystal River Unit 3 for the vertical and horizontal tendon work during the Steam Generator Replacement Project.2.0 SCOPE 2.1 The tendons to be re-stressed are those new tendons installed to replace those removed from the tendon voids and those de-tensioned but not removed as specified in the Work Package. Vertical tendon stressing shall be performed from the top of the containment. | 0.010 inches.116 F&Q14.0.CR3.SGR Page 86 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 15.0 TENDON RESTRESSING August 29, 2008.....i. .. r. .Page 1 of 8 R Revision 0 Survelac Corporation Revision 1, 6/24/09 PROGRESS ENERGY FLORIDA, INC.CRYSTAL: RIVER NUCLEAR UNIT 3 STEAM. GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT PRECISION SURVEILLANCE CORPORATION FIELD AND QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE TENDON RESTRESSING Prepared by Ap rved by -Appr~oved by QA MANAGER Title 06/24/09 Date PROJECT MANAGER, P.E.06/24/09 Date Title PRESIDENT 06/24/09 Date Title, I 117 F&Q15.0.CR3.SGR~doc Page 87 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 15.0 TENDON RESTRESSING August 29, 2008 Page 2 of 8 Revision 0 Revision 1, 6/24/09 1.0 PURPOSE 1.1 This procedure will establish the requirements for the re-stressing of tendons and quality control inspections/data recording at Crystal River Unit 3 for the vertical and horizontal tendon work during the Steam Generator Replacement Project.2.0 SCOPE 2.1 The tendons to be re-stressed are those new tendons installed to replace those removed from the tendon voids and those de-tensioned but not removed as specified in the Work Package. Vertical tendon stressing shall be performed from the top of the containment. | ||
Horizontal tendon stressing shall be performed from both ends.2.2 The re-stressing sequence shall be as specified in Work Package.3.0 RESPONSIBILITY 3.1 Owner Field Construction Personnel shall be responsible for the physical activities associated with this procedure. | Horizontal tendon stressing shall be performed from both ends.2.2 The re-stressing sequence shall be as specified in Work Package.3.0 RESPONSIBILITY | ||
3.2 Owner Quality Control Personnel to perform all inspections and data recording. | |||
===3.1 Owner=== | |||
Field Construction Personnel shall be responsible for the physical activities associated with this procedure. | |||
===3.2 Owner=== | |||
Quality Control Personnel to perform all inspections and data recording. | |||
==4.0 QUALIFICATIONS== | ==4.0 QUALIFICATIONS== | ||
4.1 Owner Field Construction Personnel shall be fit by skill, training and/or experience to perform these duties.4.2 Owner Quality Control Personnel shall be qualified to a minimum of Level II capability in accordance with the requirements of ANSI N45.2.6.5.0 EQUIPMENT 5.1 Hydraulic ram (calibrated) and pump with appropriate hoses and fittings.5.2 Hydraulic pressure gauge (calibrated). | |||
===4.1 Owner=== | |||
Field Construction Personnel shall be fit by skill, training and/or experience to perform these duties.4.2 Owner Quality Control Personnel shall be qualified to a minimum of Level II capability in accordance with the requirements of ANSI N45.2.6.5.0 EQUIPMENT 5.1 Hydraulic ram (calibrated) and pump with appropriate hoses and fittings.5.2 Hydraulic pressure gauge (calibrated). | |||
5.3 0.030" feeler gauges or shim stock.5.4 Miscellaneous Tools, wrenches, ratchets, sockets, shackles, come-alongs, etc.5.5 Plastic bags, plastic sheeting (Visqueen), rags, buckets or drums for waste grease.117 F&Q15.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 88 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 15.0 TENDON RESTRESSING August 29, 2008 Page 3 of 8 Revision 0 Revision 1, 6/24/09 6.0 PRECAUTIONS 6.1 As in other heavy construction, care should be exercised while working from scaffolds, platforms, ladders, high or restricted access locations. | 5.3 0.030" feeler gauges or shim stock.5.4 Miscellaneous Tools, wrenches, ratchets, sockets, shackles, come-alongs, etc.5.5 Plastic bags, plastic sheeting (Visqueen), rags, buckets or drums for waste grease.117 F&Q15.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 88 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 15.0 TENDON RESTRESSING August 29, 2008 Page 3 of 8 Revision 0 Revision 1, 6/24/09 6.0 PRECAUTIONS 6.1 As in other heavy construction, care should be exercised while working from scaffolds, platforms, ladders, high or restricted access locations. | ||
Respect for the safety and well-being of the other trades and personnel in the area must be observed, especially during hoisting operations. | Respect for the safety and well-being of the other trades and personnel in the area must be observed, especially during hoisting operations. | ||
| Line 362: | Line 556: | ||
9.7 QCD -HOLD POINT -Rams shall be pressurized to a Pre-tensioning Force (PTF), that force necessary to bring the tendon into a lightly stressed condition to remove slack and seat the button heads. This force establishes the base for Elongation Measurement. | 9.7 QCD -HOLD POINT -Rams shall be pressurized to a Pre-tensioning Force (PTF), that force necessary to bring the tendon into a lightly stressed condition to remove slack and seat the button heads. This force establishes the base for Elongation Measurement. | ||
This force shall be shown on Work Package to remove slack from the tendon. Record pressure and elongation. (NOTE: The elongation can be measured with the bearing plate and anchor head as a reference point. The methodology to be used is to select a reference based on field conditions.) | This force shall be shown on Work Package to remove slack from the tendon. Record pressure and elongation. (NOTE: The elongation can be measured with the bearing plate and anchor head as a reference point. The methodology to be used is to select a reference based on field conditions.) | ||
9.7.1 Verify that the equipment and tendon are stable. Verify that anchor heads are parallel to the base plates to within +/- 1/8 inches and that all button heads are seated properly. | |||
====9.7.1 Verify==== | |||
that the equipment and tendon are stable. Verify that anchor heads are parallel to the base plates to within +/- 1/8 inches and that all button heads are seated properly. | |||
For this and following steps the stressing crews shall be in continuous contact during the performance of the work.9.7.2 Ram pressures shall be maintained within 1,000 psi of each other. At final lock-off values the ends of double end stressed tendons should be adjusted if needed to be so that gap between bearing plate and anchor head at each end be within 1 inch of each other.9.8 QCD -HOLD POINT -Rams shall be pressurized to the Overstress Force (OSF)shown on Owner Work Package unless a prorated Overstress Force is required by section 8.1, hold for 1 minute verifying that all load induced movements have ceased, record pressure and elongation. | For this and following steps the stressing crews shall be in continuous contact during the performance of the work.9.7.2 Ram pressures shall be maintained within 1,000 psi of each other. At final lock-off values the ends of double end stressed tendons should be adjusted if needed to be so that gap between bearing plate and anchor head at each end be within 1 inch of each other.9.8 QCD -HOLD POINT -Rams shall be pressurized to the Overstress Force (OSF)shown on Owner Work Package unless a prorated Overstress Force is required by section 8.1, hold for 1 minute verifying that all load induced movements have ceased, record pressure and elongation. | ||
9.8.1 If it is necessary to go beyond the maximum travel of the ram, fill the space between the bearing plate and anchor head with shims, transfer load to shims, lower piston to bottom of travel, screw jack rod nut down tight against piston, then continue to stress.9.9 Compare measured elongation to the target value listed in the Owner Work Package.If the measured value deviates from the target value by more than +10% the tendon can be de-stressed and restressed starting from zero pressure follow the instructions in Steps 9.7 and 9.8 as applicable. | 9.8.1 If it is necessary to go beyond the maximum travel of the ram, fill the space between the bearing plate and anchor head with shims, transfer load to shims, lower piston to bottom of travel, screw jack rod nut down tight against piston, then continue to stress.9.9 Compare measured elongation to the target value listed in the Owner Work Package.If the measured value deviates from the target value by more than +10% the tendon can be de-stressed and restressed starting from zero pressure follow the instructions in Steps 9.7 and 9.8 as applicable. | ||
| Line 379: | Line 575: | ||
11.2 Document the ram and gauge identification. | 11.2 Document the ram and gauge identification. | ||
11.3 Note: The following are instructions for PSC F&Q 15.0 Data Sheet Documentation. | 11.3 Note: The following are instructions for PSC F&Q 15.0 Data Sheet Documentation. | ||
1.1.4 Document on Line 1 of Data Sheet F&Q 15.0 the calculated pressure. | |||
====1.1.4 Document==== | |||
on Line 1 of Data Sheet F&Q 15.0 the calculated pressure. | |||
Document on Line 1.1 the actual pressure and elongation at PTF.11.5 Document on Line 2 of Data Sheet F&Q 15.0 the calculated pressure. | Document on Line 1.1 the actual pressure and elongation at PTF.11.5 Document on Line 2 of Data Sheet F&Q 15.0 the calculated pressure. | ||
Document on Line 2.1 the actual pressure and elongation at OSF.11.6 Document on Line 3 of Data Sheet F&Q 15.0 the calculated elongation. | Document on Line 2.1 the actual pressure and elongation at OSF.11.6 Document on Line 3 of Data Sheet F&Q 15.0 the calculated elongation. | ||
| Line 385: | Line 583: | ||
11.13 Document on Line 6 the number of seated button heads after stressing. | 11.13 Document on Line 6 the number of seated button heads after stressing. | ||
11.14 Document on Line 7 of Data Sheet F&Q 15.0 the anchor head identification. | 11.14 Document on Line 7 of Data Sheet F&Q 15.0 the anchor head identification. | ||
Z 12.0 NOTIFICATION 12.1 Owner is to be notified if elongation is not within the plus or minus 10% after three attempts at elongation or if the lock-offs are not within the minus (-)0 and plus (+)4 percentage ranges, of the values provided.13.0 ATTACHMENTS 13.1 Data Sheet F&Q 15.0 13.2 Data Sheet F&Q 15.OA 117 F&Q15.0.CR3.SGR Page 94 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 15.0 TENDON RESTRESSING DATA SHEET F&Q 15.0 August 29, 2008 Page 1 of I Revision 0 TENDON STRESSING DOCUMENTATION PROJECT: CRYSTAL RIVER UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT TENDON NO.: CIRCLE ONE: Removed & Replaced Tendon or Restress Only Tendon CIRCLE ONE: Single End Stress Tendon or Double End Stress Tendon# EFFECTIVE WIRES: DO NOT EXCEED: 80% OF GUTS: KIPS STRESSING SEQUENCE VERIFIED: TENDON END: TENDON END: RAM NO.: RAM NO.: RAM AREA: K RAM AREA: KID GAUGE NO.: GAUGE NO.: KIPS PSI ELONGATION KIPS PSI ELONGATION 1.0 CALCULATED (PTF)1.1 ACTUAL (PTF)2.0 CALCULATED (OSF) I... '' '2.1. ACTUAL (OSF)3.0 CALCULATED ELONGATION OVER (PTF)3.1. ACTUAL MEASURED ELONGATION (2.1 MINUS 1.1), (+-1% f Iaculated elonain 3.2. TOTAL TENDON ELONGATION.. | Z 12.0 NOTIFICATION 12.1 Owner is to be notified if elongation is not within the plus or minus 10% after three attempts at elongation or if the lock-offs are not within the minus (-)0 and plus (+)4 percentage ranges, of the values provided.13.0 ATTACHMENTS 13.1 Data Sheet F&Q 15.0 13.2 Data Sheet F&Q 15.OA 117 F&Q15.0.CR3.SGR Page 94 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 15.0 TENDON RESTRESSING DATA SHEET F&Q 15.0 August 29, 2008 Page 1 of I Revision 0 TENDON STRESSING DOCUMENTATION PROJECT: CRYSTAL RIVER UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT TENDON NO.: CIRCLE ONE: Removed & Replaced Tendon or Restress Only Tendon CIRCLE ONE: Single End Stress Tendon or Double End Stress Tendon# EFFECTIVE WIRES: DO NOT EXCEED: 80% OF GUTS: KIPS STRESSING SEQUENCE VERIFIED: TENDON END: TENDON END: RAM NO.: RAM NO.: RAM AREA: K RAM AREA: KID GAUGE NO.: GAUGE NO.: KIPS PSI ELONGATION KIPS PSI ELONGATION | ||
===1.0 CALCULATED=== | |||
(PTF)1.1 ACTUAL (PTF)2.0 CALCULATED (OSF) I... '' '2.1. ACTUAL (OSF)3.0 CALCULATED ELONGATION OVER (PTF)3.1. ACTUAL MEASURED ELONGATION (2.1 MINUS 1.1), (+-1% f Iaculated elonain 3.2. TOTAL TENDON ELONGATION.. | |||
.,, .: 4.0 CALCULATED LIFT-OFF 4.1. ACTUAL LIFT-OFF (-,+% of calculated lift-off)ACTUAL LIFT-OFF In kips (1/2 sum of Individual forces)5.0 ACTUAL SHIMSlINSTALLED 6. # seated Buttonheads after stressing: | .,, .: 4.0 CALCULATED LIFT-OFF 4.1. ACTUAL LIFT-OFF (-,+% of calculated lift-off)ACTUAL LIFT-OFF In kips (1/2 sum of Individual forces)5.0 ACTUAL SHIMSlINSTALLED 6. # seated Buttonheads after stressing: | ||
: 7. ANCHOR HEAD ID ANCHOR HEAD ID PSI m (KIPS -K) X 1000 KIPS = RAM AREA X PSI + K RAM AREA 1000 COMMENTS: QC INSP. SIGNOFF: LEVEL: DATE: QC REVIEW: LEVEL: DATE: 117 F&Q15.0.CR3.SGR Page 95 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 15.0 TENDON LOCK-OFF DATA SHEET F&Q 15.OA August 29, 2008 Page 1 of 1 Revision 0 TENDON STRESSING DOCUMENTATION TENDON LOCK-OFF STRESS MEASUREMENT DOCUMENTATION PROJECT: CRYSTAL RIVER UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT TENDON NO.: TENDC RAM NO.: GAUGE NO.: RAM AREA: K =)N END: MEASUREMENT | : 7. ANCHOR HEAD ID ANCHOR HEAD ID PSI m (KIPS -K) X 1000 KIPS = RAM AREA X PSI + K RAM AREA 1000 COMMENTS: QC INSP. SIGNOFF: LEVEL: DATE: QC REVIEW: LEVEL: DATE: 117 F&Q15.0.CR3.SGR Page 95 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 15.0 TENDON LOCK-OFF DATA SHEET F&Q 15.OA August 29, 2008 Page 1 of 1 Revision 0 TENDON STRESSING DOCUMENTATION TENDON LOCK-OFF STRESS MEASUREMENT DOCUMENTATION PROJECT: CRYSTAL RIVER UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT TENDON NO.: TENDC RAM NO.: GAUGE NO.: RAM AREA: K =)N END: MEASUREMENT | ||
#Gauge Pressure (PSI)Feeler Gauge Withdrawal Average Pressure/ | #Gauge Pressure (PSI)Feeler Gauge Withdrawal Average Pressure/ | ||
Force (kips)[Ave of Measurements 1,2,3]2 nd.Gauge 1 2 3 I. I.-PSI/ KIPS PSI = (KIPS -K) X 1000 RAM AREA KIPS = RAM AREA X PSI + K 1000 COMMENTS QC INSP. SIGNOFF QC REVIEW LEVEL DATE LEVEL DATE 117 F&Q15..0CR3.SGR Page 96 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 Precision Surveillance-CorporatiOnh PSC PROCEDURE ANCHORAGE INSPECTION ,August29,2008 Page 1 of 6 Revision 0 Revisiqn 1., 09/1I6/09 PROGRESS ENERGY.FLORIDA, INC., CRYSTAL RIVER: NUCLEAR UNIT 3 STEAM GENERTTOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT PRECISION SURVEILLANCE CORPORATION FIELD AND QUALITY"CONTROL PROCEDURE ANCHORAGE INSPECTION OF STRESSED TENDON Prepared by Approved by,>'LEVEL II Q.C.Title 09/16109 Date PROJECT MANAGER,,'P.E.' | Force (kips)[Ave of Measurements 1,2,3]2 nd.Gauge 1 2 3 I. I.-PSI/ KIPS PSI = (KIPS -K) X 1000 RAM AREA KIPS = RAM AREA X PSI + K 1000 COMMENTS QC INSP. SIGNOFF QC REVIEW LEVEL DATE LEVEL DATE 117 F&Q15..0CR3.SGR Page 96 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 Precision Surveillance-CorporatiOnh PSC PROCEDURE ANCHORAGE INSPECTION ,August29,2008 Page 1 of 6 Revision 0 Revisiqn 1., 09/1I6/09 PROGRESS ENERGY.FLORIDA, INC., CRYSTAL RIVER: NUCLEAR UNIT 3 STEAM GENERTTOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT PRECISION SURVEILLANCE CORPORATION FIELD AND QUALITY"CONTROL PROCEDURE ANCHORAGE INSPECTION OF STRESSED TENDON Prepared by Approved by,>'LEVEL II Q.C.Title 09/16109 Date PROJECT MANAGER,,'P.E.' | ||
09/16109 Date Title c~PRESIDENT'09/16/9 Date Approved by, Title 118 F&Q15.1.CR3.SGR.REV 1.doo Page 97 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-D)ESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 15.1 ANCHORAGE INSPECTION August 29, 2008 Page 2 of 6 Revision 0 Revision 1. 09/16/09 1.0 PURPOSE 1.1 This procedure will establish the requirements for a detailed visual inspection of the anchor head, shims, bearing plate and wire button heads on each end of a tendon at Crystal River Unit 3 for the vertical and horizontal tendon work during the Steam Generator Replacement Project.1.2 Inspection shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of 2001 Edition and 2003 Addenda of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section XI, Subsection IWL.1.3 A detailed visual inspection is to be performed prior to de-tensioning for those tendons to be de-tensioned but not removed as specified in the Work Package.1.4 Also a detailed visual inspection is to be performed on those re-stressed new tendons installed to replace those removed from the tendon voids and those de-tensioned but not removed as specified in the Work Package.2.0 RESPONSIBILITY 2.1 Owner Quality Control Personnel to perform all inspections and data recording. | 09/16109 Date Title c~PRESIDENT'09/16/9 Date Approved by, Title 118 F&Q15.1.CR3.SGR.REV 1.doo Page 97 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-D)ESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 15.1 ANCHORAGE INSPECTION August 29, 2008 Page 2 of 6 Revision 0 Revision 1. 09/16/09 1.0 PURPOSE 1.1 This procedure will establish the requirements for a detailed visual inspection of the anchor head, shims, bearing plate and wire button heads on each end of a tendon at Crystal River Unit 3 for the vertical and horizontal tendon work during the Steam Generator Replacement Project.1.2 Inspection shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of 2001 Edition and 2003 Addenda of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section XI, Subsection IWL.1.3 A detailed visual inspection is to be performed prior to de-tensioning for those tendons to be de-tensioned but not removed as specified in the Work Package.1.4 Also a detailed visual inspection is to be performed on those re-stressed new tendons installed to replace those removed from the tendon voids and those de-tensioned but not removed as specified in the Work Package.2.0 RESPONSIBILITY | ||
===2.1 Owner=== | |||
Quality Control Personnel to perform all inspections and data recording. | |||
==3.0 QUALIFICATIONS== | ==3.0 QUALIFICATIONS== | ||
3.1 The inspector performing this inspection is to be qualified as a Level II per PSC Procedure or as qualified by Progress Energy.4.0 EQUIPMENT 4.1 Magnifying Glass with suitable illumination. | 3.1 The inspector performing this inspection is to be qualified as a Level II per PSC Procedure or as qualified by Progress Energy.4.0 EQUIPMENT 4.1 Magnifying Glass with suitable illumination. | ||
4.2 Optical Comparator with 0.005 inch (min.) Measuring Reticle.4.3 Steel Ruler.4.4 Light Meter.5.0 QUALITY CONTROL 5.1 All Quality Control Documentation (QCD) points noted in this procedure are Hold Points. The work shall not progress past or through a QCD without a verbal release from the Inspector. | |||
===4.2 Optical=== | |||
Comparator with 0.005 inch (min.) Measuring Reticle.4.3 Steel Ruler.4.4 Light Meter.5.0 QUALITY CONTROL 5.1 All Quality Control Documentation (QCD) points noted in this procedure are Hold Points. The work shall not progress past or through a QCD without a verbal release from the Inspector. | |||
The required information or evaluative data shall be documented on Data Sheet F&Q 15.1 or Work Package Documentation. | The required information or evaluative data shall be documented on Data Sheet F&Q 15.1 or Work Package Documentation. | ||
118 F&Q15.1.CR3.SGR.REV 1.doc ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 98 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 15.1 ANCHORAGE INSPECTION August 29, 2008 Page 3 of 6 Revision 0 Revision 1. 09/16/09 6.0 PRECAUTIONS 6.1 CAUTION -NEVER STRIKE THE BUTTON HEADS, THE WIRES OR THE ANCHOR HEAD OF A STRESSED TENDON WITH A HAMMER.OR ANY OTHER METAL OBJECT.6.2 CAUTION -IF AT ANY TIME A CRACKED OR BROKEN ANCHOR HEAD IS DETECTED AS A RESULT OF INSPECTION, ALL WORK SHALL STOP. ALL PERSONNEL SHALL BE MOVED AWAY FROM THAT AREA AND THE OWNER CONSTRUCTION SUPERVISOR SHALL BE NOTIFIED. | 118 F&Q15.1.CR3.SGR.REV 1.doc ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 98 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 15.1 ANCHORAGE INSPECTION August 29, 2008 Page 3 of 6 Revision 0 Revision 1. 09/16/09 6.0 PRECAUTIONS | ||
===6.1 CAUTION=== | |||
-NEVER STRIKE THE BUTTON HEADS, THE WIRES OR THE ANCHOR HEAD OF A STRESSED TENDON WITH A HAMMER.OR ANY OTHER METAL OBJECT.6.2 CAUTION -IF AT ANY TIME A CRACKED OR BROKEN ANCHOR HEAD IS DETECTED AS A RESULT OF INSPECTION, ALL WORK SHALL STOP. ALL PERSONNEL SHALL BE MOVED AWAY FROM THAT AREA AND THE OWNER CONSTRUCTION SUPERVISOR SHALL BE NOTIFIED. | |||
THE WORK AND/OR INSPECTIONS SHALL CONTINUE ONLY AFTER A SAFETY EVALUATION HAS BEEN MADE AND ONLY AT THE DIRECTION AND CONTROL OF THE OWNER CONSTRUCTION SUPERVISOR. | THE WORK AND/OR INSPECTIONS SHALL CONTINUE ONLY AFTER A SAFETY EVALUATION HAS BEEN MADE AND ONLY AT THE DIRECTION AND CONTROL OF THE OWNER CONSTRUCTION SUPERVISOR. | ||
| Line 402: | Line 611: | ||
7.1 The tendon will be in a stressed condition. | 7.1 The tendon will be in a stressed condition. | ||
7.2 The anchor head, shims, bearing plate and wire button heads are to be cleaned to permit inspection. | 7.2 The anchor head, shims, bearing plate and wire button heads are to be cleaned to permit inspection. | ||
8.0 ANCHORAGE INSPECTION 8.1 The tendon anchorage, including the anchor head, bearing plate, stressing shims and button heads of all selected tendons shall be visually inspected for signs of corrosion, cracks, missing wires, broken/damaged or protruding wires and malformed button heads.8.2 These inspections are to be performed with light conditions supplemented by auxiliary light sources if needed to attain a minimum illumination level of 50 foot-candles (fc) as verified by a light meter provided by owner. The light meter ID with its calibration due date and a description of any auxiliary lighting used is to be documented on Data Sheet F&Q 15.1 or Work Package Documentation. | |||
8.3 CORROSION INSPECTION 8.3.1 BUTTON HEADS 8.3.1.1 The Category of Corrosion that could be seen on Button heads or Tendon Wire will be described in PSC Specification EW101 of PSC Procedure F&Q 13.0. As the tendon is still in a stressed condition, there will not be much area to review for Category of Corrosion, therefore only the exposed, visible portions of the button heads shall be evaluated. | ===8.0 ANCHORAGE=== | ||
INSPECTION 8.1 The tendon anchorage, including the anchor head, bearing plate, stressing shims and button heads of all selected tendons shall be visually inspected for signs of corrosion, cracks, missing wires, broken/damaged or protruding wires and malformed button heads.8.2 These inspections are to be performed with light conditions supplemented by auxiliary light sources if needed to attain a minimum illumination level of 50 foot-candles (fc) as verified by a light meter provided by owner. The light meter ID with its calibration due date and a description of any auxiliary lighting used is to be documented on Data Sheet F&Q 15.1 or Work Package Documentation. | |||
===8.3 CORROSION=== | |||
INSPECTION | |||
====8.3.1 BUTTON==== | |||
HEADS 8.3.1.1 The Category of Corrosion that could be seen on Button heads or Tendon Wire will be described in PSC Specification EW101 of PSC Procedure F&Q 13.0. As the tendon is still in a stressed condition, there will not be much area to review for Category of Corrosion, therefore only the exposed, visible portions of the button heads shall be evaluated. | |||
8.3.1.1.1 QCD- Document the Category of Corrosion of the Button heads on Data Sheet F&Q 15.1 or Work Package Documentation. | 8.3.1.1.1 QCD- Document the Category of Corrosion of the Button heads on Data Sheet F&Q 15.1 or Work Package Documentation. | ||
118 F&Q15.1.CR3.SGR.REV 1.doc ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 99 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 15.1 ANCHORAGE INSPECTION August 29, 2008 Page 4 of 6 Revision 0 Revision 1. 09/16/09 8.3.2 ANCHOR HEAD, SHIMS, BEARING PLATE 8.3.2.1 The Category of Corrosion that could be seen on Anchor Head, Shims, or Bearing Plates will be described in PSC Specification EW101 of PSC Procedure F&Q 13.0. As the tendon is still in a stressed condition, the areas to be reviewed will be somewhat limited, therefore only the exposed, visible portions of the anchor head, shims and bearing plate shall be evaluated. | 118 F&Q15.1.CR3.SGR.REV 1.doc ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 99 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 15.1 ANCHORAGE INSPECTION August 29, 2008 Page 4 of 6 Revision 0 Revision 1. 09/16/09 8.3.2 ANCHOR HEAD, SHIMS, BEARING PLATE 8.3.2.1 The Category of Corrosion that could be seen on Anchor Head, Shims, or Bearing Plates will be described in PSC Specification EW101 of PSC Procedure F&Q 13.0. As the tendon is still in a stressed condition, the areas to be reviewed will be somewhat limited, therefore only the exposed, visible portions of the anchor head, shims and bearing plate shall be evaluated. | ||
8.3.2.1.1 QCD- Document the Category of Corrosion of each item on Data Sheet F&Q 15.1 or Work Package Documentation. | 8.3.2.1.1 QCD- Document the Category of Corrosion of each item on Data Sheet F&Q 15.1 or Work Package Documentation. | ||
8.3.3 CRACKS 8.3.3.1 The Anchor Head, Shims and Bearing Plates shall be visually inspected for signs of Cracks.8.3.3.1.1 QCD- If there are no signs of Cracks present, "None" shall be entered into the "Cracks" area of Data Sheet F&Q 15.1 or Work Package Documentation for each item as it occurs.8.3.3.1.2 QCD- If signs of Cracks are present in any item, regardless of size, the crack shall be sketched on Sketch Sheet F&Q 15.1 or Work Package Documentation and identified with a Sketch Number, which shall be entered into the "Cracks" area of Data Sheet F&Q 15.1 or Work Package Documentation. | |||
8.3.4 BUTTON HEAD PHYSICAL INSPECTION 8.3.4.1 While the tendon is in a Stressed Condition, it shall be necessary to inspect the button heads/wires for those button heads/wires that may be missing, damaged or protruding/unseated. | ====8.3.3 CRACKS==== | ||
8.3.3.1 The Anchor Head, Shims and Bearing Plates shall be visually inspected for signs of Cracks.8.3.3.1.1 QCD- If there are no signs of Cracks present, "None" shall be entered into the "Cracks" area of Data Sheet F&Q 15.1 or Work Package Documentation for each item as it occurs.8.3.3.1.2 QCD- If signs of Cracks are present in any item, regardless of size, the crack shall be sketched on Sketch Sheet F&Q 15.1 or Work Package Documentation and identified with a Sketch Number, which shall be entered into the "Cracks" area of Data Sheet F&Q 15.1 or Work Package Documentation. | |||
====8.3.4 BUTTON==== | |||
HEAD PHYSICAL INSPECTION 8.3.4.1 While the tendon is in a Stressed Condition, it shall be necessary to inspect the button heads/wires for those button heads/wires that may be missing, damaged or protruding/unseated. | |||
The button heads shall be inspected for obvious gross deficiencies as part of the Off-size Button head Inspection. | The button heads shall be inspected for obvious gross deficiencies as part of the Off-size Button head Inspection. | ||
8.3.4.2 All conditions for button heads and wires, whether missing or defective, shall be documented. | 8.3.4.2 All conditions for button heads and wires, whether missing or defective, shall be documented. | ||
| Line 419: | Line 641: | ||
8.3.4.4 QCD- Document the Button head Inspection on the Sketch shown on Data Sheet F&Q 15.1 or Work Package Documentation in accordance with the Button head Code shown of Data Sheet F&Q 15.1 or Work Package Documentation. | 8.3.4.4 QCD- Document the Button head Inspection on the Sketch shown on Data Sheet F&Q 15.1 or Work Package Documentation in accordance with the Button head Code shown of Data Sheet F&Q 15.1 or Work Package Documentation. | ||
8.3.4.5 QCD- Document the Anchor Head ID and Heat Number Code Identification Number for each anchorage component on Data Sheet F&Q 15.1 or Work Package Documentation. | 8.3.4.5 QCD- Document the Anchor Head ID and Heat Number Code Identification Number for each anchorage component on Data Sheet F&Q 15.1 or Work Package Documentation. | ||
8.3.4.6 IF any missing, broken and/or damaged wires are detected, THEN check the installation records, i.e., the button heading records, stressing records or reports, to determine if the missing, broken, and/or damaged wires were previously noted.9.0 NOTIFICATION 9.1 Owner should be formally notified when each one or more of the following conditions are detected as a result of the inspection of a tendon. Notification should be by a nonconformance report or a formal letter.118 F&Q15.1.CR3.SGR.REV 1.doc ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 101 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 15.1 ANCHORAGE INSPECTION August 29, 2008 Page 6 of 6 Revision 0 Revision 1. 09/16/09 9.1.1 CATEGORY OF CORROSION D, or E -when detected for Button heads or Wires, Owner should be notified.9.1.2 CATEGORY OF CORROSION D, or E -when detected for Anchor Heads, Shims, i or Bearing plates, Owner should be notified.9.1.3 CRACKS -no matter how small, when detected for Anchor Heads, Shims and/or Bearing Plates, Owner should be notified.9.1.4 OFFSIZE BUTTON HEADS -when detected for Button heads, document on Data Sheet F&Q 15.1A or 15.1B as applicable or Work Package Documentation. | 8.3.4.6 IF any missing, broken and/or damaged wires are detected, THEN check the installation records, i.e., the button heading records, stressing records or reports, to determine if the missing, broken, and/or damaged wires were previously noted.9.0 NOTIFICATION | ||
9.1.5 PROTRUDING WIRES -when detected for Button head/Wires the quantity and length of protrusion of each Button head shall be reported and Owner should be notified.9.1.6 MISSING OR BROKEN WIRES/BUTTON HEADS -when detected and not previously documented, Owner should be notified.10.0 DOCUMENTATION 10.1 The items in this procedure requiring documentation shall be documented on Data Sheet F&Q 15.1 or Work Package Documentation. | |||
===9.1 Owner=== | |||
should be formally notified when each one or more of the following conditions are detected as a result of the inspection of a tendon. Notification should be by a nonconformance report or a formal letter.118 F&Q15.1.CR3.SGR.REV 1.doc ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 101 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 15.1 ANCHORAGE INSPECTION August 29, 2008 Page 6 of 6 Revision 0 Revision 1. 09/16/09 9.1.1 CATEGORY OF CORROSION D, or E -when detected for Button heads or Wires, Owner should be notified.9.1.2 CATEGORY OF CORROSION D, or E -when detected for Anchor Heads, Shims, i or Bearing plates, Owner should be notified.9.1.3 CRACKS -no matter how small, when detected for Anchor Heads, Shims and/or Bearing Plates, Owner should be notified.9.1.4 OFFSIZE BUTTON HEADS -when detected for Button heads, document on Data Sheet F&Q 15.1A or 15.1B as applicable or Work Package Documentation. | |||
====9.1.5 PROTRUDING==== | |||
WIRES -when detected for Button head/Wires the quantity and length of protrusion of each Button head shall be reported and Owner should be notified.9.1.6 MISSING OR BROKEN WIRES/BUTTON HEADS -when detected and not previously documented, Owner should be notified.10.0 DOCUMENTATION 10.1 The items in this procedure requiring documentation shall be documented on Data Sheet F&Q 15.1 or Work Package Documentation. | |||
10.2 The Data Sheet references the applicable section number of the procedure for each QCD point.10.3 Sketch Sheet F&Q 15.1 or Work Package Documentation accompanies this procedure and shall be filled in for the required information if applicable. | 10.2 The Data Sheet references the applicable section number of the procedure for each QCD point.10.3 Sketch Sheet F&Q 15.1 or Work Package Documentation accompanies this procedure and shall be filled in for the required information if applicable. | ||
11.0 ATTACHMENTS 11.1 DATA SHEET F&Q 15.1 11.2 SKETCH SHEET F&Q 15.1 118 F&Q15.1.CR3.SGR.REV 1.doc ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 102 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 Project: CRYSTAL RIVER UNIT 3 -SGR M&TE: ITEM: ID: DUE: Tendon No.: Tendon End: ITEM: ID: DUE: ITEM: ID: DUE: ANCHORAGE INSPECTION CRITERIA El As-Found F] Post Re-Tensioning Q.C. Signoff C-ORRflRIOlN A (-RA-K IN-PF--TION (8.3.1.1.1) | 11.0 ATTACHMENTS 11.1 DATA SHEET F&Q 15.1 11.2 SKETCH SHEET F&Q 15.1 118 F&Q15.1.CR3.SGR.REV 1.doc ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 102 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 Project: CRYSTAL RIVER UNIT 3 -SGR M&TE: ITEM: ID: DUE: Tendon No.: Tendon End: ITEM: ID: DUE: ITEM: ID: DUE: ANCHORAGE INSPECTION CRITERIA El As-Found F] Post Re-Tensioning Q.C. Signoff C-ORRflRIOlN A (-RA-K IN-PF--TION (8.3.1.1.1) | ||
| Line 444: | Line 672: | ||
[] Yes E] No; Quantity: Protruding BH: Missing BH: Total # of Effective Buttonheads Seated: Overall Results E] Acceptable El Un-Acceptable Total (Protruding+Missing): | [] Yes E] No; Quantity: Protruding BH: Missing BH: Total # of Effective Buttonheads Seated: Overall Results E] Acceptable El Un-Acceptable Total (Protruding+Missing): | ||
Owner Notified NCR#: QC Reviewed: Level: Date: 118 F&Q15.1.CR3.SGR.REV 1.doc Page 103 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 15.1 ANCHORAGE INSPECTION SKETCH SHEET F&Q 15.1 August 29, 2008 Page 1 of 1 Revision 0 PROJECT: CRYSTAL RIVER UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT TENDON NO.: TENDON END/BUTTRESS No: Sketch each crack as it appears in the Anchorage, Shims or Bearing Plate. Identify each item by name; apply the heat code identification if available and locate that identification on the sketch. Use as many Sketch Sheets as necessary being sure to list the page number below and to apply a Sketch Number to each item with cracks.Inspected By: Date: Reviewed By: Date: 118 F&Q15.1.CR3.SGR.REV 1.doc Page 104 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 15.2 BEARING PLATE CONCRETE INSPECTION August 29, 2008 Page 1 of 3 Precision Surveillance Corporation Revision 0'PROGRESS. | Owner Notified NCR#: QC Reviewed: Level: Date: 118 F&Q15.1.CR3.SGR.REV 1.doc Page 103 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 15.1 ANCHORAGE INSPECTION SKETCH SHEET F&Q 15.1 August 29, 2008 Page 1 of 1 Revision 0 PROJECT: CRYSTAL RIVER UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT TENDON NO.: TENDON END/BUTTRESS No: Sketch each crack as it appears in the Anchorage, Shims or Bearing Plate. Identify each item by name; apply the heat code identification if available and locate that identification on the sketch. Use as many Sketch Sheets as necessary being sure to list the page number below and to apply a Sketch Number to each item with cracks.Inspected By: Date: Reviewed By: Date: 118 F&Q15.1.CR3.SGR.REV 1.doc Page 104 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 15.2 BEARING PLATE CONCRETE INSPECTION August 29, 2008 Page 1 of 3 Precision Surveillance Corporation Revision 0'PROGRESS. | ||
ENERGY FLORIDA, INC.CRYSTAL RIVER, NUCLEAR UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT PRECISION SURVEILLANCE CORPORATION FIELDAND QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE BEARING PLATE, CONCRETE INSPECTION LEVEL II Q'.C Title 08/29/08 Date Prepared by Approved byj.7 t-Approvea by *PROJECT MANAGER, RE Title PRESIDENT Title 08129/08 Date 08/29/08 Date ATTACHMENT Z23R5 19 F&PjW&RIý1, PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 15.2 BEARING PLATE CONCRETE INSPECTION August 29, 2008 Page 2 of 3 Revision 0 1.0 PURPOSE 1.1 This procedure will establish the requirements for a detailed visual inspection of the concrete around/adjoining each end of a tendon prior to detensioning and after re-stressing the tendon at Crystal River Unit 3 for the vertical and horizontal tendon work during the Steam Generator Replacement Project.1.2 Inspection shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of 2001 Edition and 2003 Addenda of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section Xl, Subsection IWL.1.3 The tendons to have a detailed visual inspection performed on them are those new tendons installed to replace those removed from the tendon voids and those de-tensioned but not removed as specified in the Work Package.2.0 RESPONSIBILITY 2.1 Owner Quality Control Personnel to perform all inspections and data recording. | ENERGY FLORIDA, INC.CRYSTAL RIVER, NUCLEAR UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT PRECISION SURVEILLANCE CORPORATION FIELDAND QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE BEARING PLATE, CONCRETE INSPECTION LEVEL II Q'.C Title 08/29/08 Date Prepared by Approved byj.7 t-Approvea by *PROJECT MANAGER, RE Title PRESIDENT Title 08129/08 Date 08/29/08 Date ATTACHMENT Z23R5 19 F&PjW&RIý1, PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 15.2 BEARING PLATE CONCRETE INSPECTION August 29, 2008 Page 2 of 3 Revision 0 1.0 PURPOSE 1.1 This procedure will establish the requirements for a detailed visual inspection of the concrete around/adjoining each end of a tendon prior to detensioning and after re-stressing the tendon at Crystal River Unit 3 for the vertical and horizontal tendon work during the Steam Generator Replacement Project.1.2 Inspection shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of 2001 Edition and 2003 Addenda of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section Xl, Subsection IWL.1.3 The tendons to have a detailed visual inspection performed on them are those new tendons installed to replace those removed from the tendon voids and those de-tensioned but not removed as specified in the Work Package.2.0 RESPONSIBILITY | ||
===2.1 Owner=== | |||
Quality Control Personnel to perform all inspections and data recording. | |||
==3.0 QUALIFICATIONS== | ==3.0 QUALIFICATIONS== | ||
| Line 457: | Line 688: | ||
7.2.1 QCD- Any crack that is 0.010" in width or wider shall be documented on Data Sheet F&Q 15.2 or Work Package Documentation. | 7.2.1 QCD- Any crack that is 0.010" in width or wider shall be documented on Data Sheet F&Q 15.2 or Work Package Documentation. | ||
7.2.1.1 The full length and width of each crack shall be documented as well as sketching the crack pattern.8.0 NOTIFICATION | 7.2.1.1 The full length and width of each crack shall be documented as well as sketching the crack pattern.8.0 NOTIFICATION | ||
-UNACCEPTABLE CONDITIONS 8.1 Owner should be notified when any crack width or gaps greater than 0.010" in width are detected.9.0 DOCUMENTATION 9.1 Data Sheet F&Q 15.2 or Work Package Documentation shall be used for documenting the requirements of this inspection. | -UNACCEPTABLE CONDITIONS | ||
===8.1 Owner=== | |||
should be notified when any crack width or gaps greater than 0.010" in width are detected.9.0 DOCUMENTATION 9.1 Data Sheet F&Q 15.2 or Work Package Documentation shall be used for documenting the requirements of this inspection. | |||
10.0 ATTACHMENTS 10.1 Data Sheet F&Q 15.2.119 F&Q15.2.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 107 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 15.2 BEARING PLATE CONCRETE INSPECTION DATA SHEET F&Q 15.2 August 29, 2008 Page 1 of 1 Revision 0 Revision 1. 6/24/2009 PROJECT: CRYSTAL RIVER UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT TENDON NO.: 0 As-Found E] Post Re-Tensioning TENDON END: BEARING PLATE I.D. NO.: The bearing plate shall be oriented as shown below. Place the location of the bearing plate identification on the sketch below. Sketch all visible concrete cracks and/or other abnormal indications."or Horizontal Tendon his edge is up.:or Vertical Tendon this is toward"eactor or center of containment For above inspection: | 10.0 ATTACHMENTS 10.1 Data Sheet F&Q 15.2.119 F&Q15.2.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 107 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 15.2 BEARING PLATE CONCRETE INSPECTION DATA SHEET F&Q 15.2 August 29, 2008 Page 1 of 1 Revision 0 Revision 1. 6/24/2009 PROJECT: CRYSTAL RIVER UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT TENDON NO.: 0 As-Found E] Post Re-Tensioning TENDON END: BEARING PLATE I.D. NO.: The bearing plate shall be oriented as shown below. Place the location of the bearing plate identification on the sketch below. Sketch all visible concrete cracks and/or other abnormal indications."or Horizontal Tendon his edge is up.:or Vertical Tendon this is toward"eactor or center of containment For above inspection: | ||
Light Conditions 50fc or greater? circle one: YES or Light Meter ID: Date due calibration: | Light Conditions 50fc or greater? circle one: YES or Light Meter ID: Date due calibration: | ||
| Line 463: | Line 697: | ||
Q.C. Review Level Date 119 F&Q15.2.CR3.SGR Page 108 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 4 Precision Surveillance Corporation PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 16.0 GREASE CAP REPLACEMENT August 29, 2008, Page 1 of4 Revision 0 PROGRESS ENERGY FLORIDA, INC..CRYSTAL RIVER NUCLEAR UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT PRECISION SURVEILLANCE. | Q.C. Review Level Date 119 F&Q15.2.CR3.SGR Page 108 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 4 Precision Surveillance Corporation PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 16.0 GREASE CAP REPLACEMENT August 29, 2008, Page 1 of4 Revision 0 PROGRESS ENERGY FLORIDA, INC..CRYSTAL RIVER NUCLEAR UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT PRECISION SURVEILLANCE. | ||
CORPORATION FIELD AND QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE GREASE CAP REPLACEMENT | CORPORATION FIELD AND QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE GREASE CAP REPLACEMENT | ||
":ýf , I -- Prepared by App ved by LEVEL II Q.C.Title PROJECT MANAGER, P.E.Title PRESIDENT Title 08/29/08 Date 08&29/08 Date 08&29/08 Date ATTACHMENT Z23R5 20 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 16.0 GREASE CAP REPLACEMENT August 29, 2008 Page 2 of 4 Revision 0 1.0 PURPOSE 1.1 This procedure will establish the requirements for the final placement of grease caps after all other work has been completed (except re-greasing) for the vertical and horizontal tendon work during the Steam Generator Replacement Project at Crystal River Unit 3.2.0 SCOPE 2.1 This procedure applies to those new tendons installed to replace those removed from the tendon voids and those de-tensioned but not removed as specified in the Work Package. This procedure may also be used for any other tendon as needed by Owner.3.0 RESPONSIBILITY 3.1 Owner Field Construction Personnel shall be responsible for the physical activities and recording of documentation associated with this procedure. | ":ýf , I -- Prepared by App ved by LEVEL II Q.C.Title PROJECT MANAGER, P.E.Title PRESIDENT Title 08/29/08 Date 08&29/08 Date 08&29/08 Date ATTACHMENT Z23R5 20 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 16.0 GREASE CAP REPLACEMENT August 29, 2008 Page 2 of 4 Revision 0 1.0 PURPOSE 1.1 This procedure will establish the requirements for the final placement of grease caps after all other work has been completed (except re-greasing) for the vertical and horizontal tendon work during the Steam Generator Replacement Project at Crystal River Unit 3.2.0 SCOPE 2.1 This procedure applies to those new tendons installed to replace those removed from the tendon voids and those de-tensioned but not removed as specified in the Work Package. This procedure may also be used for any other tendon as needed by Owner.3.0 RESPONSIBILITY | ||
===3.1 Owner=== | |||
Field Construction Personnel shall be responsible for the physical activities and recording of documentation associated with this procedure. | |||
==4.0 QUALIFICATIONS== | ==4.0 QUALIFICATIONS== | ||
4.1 Owner Field Construction Personnel shall be fit by skill, training and/or experience to perform these duties.5.0 EQUIPMENT 5.1 Miscellaneous Tools, wrenches, ratchets, sockets, etc.6.0 PRECAUTIONS 6.1 As in other heavy construction, care should be exercised while working from scaffolds, platforms, ladders, high or restricted access locations. | |||
===4.1 Owner=== | |||
Field Construction Personnel shall be fit by skill, training and/or experience to perform these duties.5.0 EQUIPMENT 5.1 Miscellaneous Tools, wrenches, ratchets, sockets, etc.6.0 PRECAUTIONS 6.1 As in other heavy construction, care should be exercised while working from scaffolds, platforms, ladders, high or restricted access locations. | |||
Respect for the safety and well-being of the other trades and personnel in the area must be observed, especially during hoisting operations. | Respect for the safety and well-being of the other trades and personnel in the area must be observed, especially during hoisting operations. | ||
6.2 Be prepared to support the weight of the grease cap.7.0 QUALITY CONTROL DOCUMENTATION AND HOLD POINTS 7.1 There are no Quality Control Documentation (QCD) points or HOLD POINTS in this procedure. | 6.2 Be prepared to support the weight of the grease cap.7.0 QUALITY CONTROL DOCUMENTATION AND HOLD POINTS 7.1 There are no Quality Control Documentation (QCD) points or HOLD POINTS in this procedure. | ||
| Line 474: | Line 713: | ||
120 F&Q16.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 110 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 16.0 GREASE CAP REPLACEMENT August 29, 2008 Page 3 of 4 Revision 0 9.0 GREASE CAP REPLACEMENT 9.1 Only minor cleaning and brushing may be necessary to prepare the bearing plate and grease cap for remounting to the bearing plate.9.2 Inspect and prepare bearing plate surface by cleaning with rags and solvent. If detrimental foreign matter such as mill scale, rust, and dirt is detected on the gasket bearing surface of the plate, and power tool cleaning is required, then: 9.2.1 Make suitable provisions to protect the tendon wires and anchor head threads from accidental rubbing, cutting, or scratching by coming into contact with the power tool's rotating wire brushes and/or abrasive disks. Sheet metal shrouds around the tendon and end anchorage may be necessary. | 120 F&Q16.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 110 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 16.0 GREASE CAP REPLACEMENT August 29, 2008 Page 3 of 4 Revision 0 9.0 GREASE CAP REPLACEMENT 9.1 Only minor cleaning and brushing may be necessary to prepare the bearing plate and grease cap for remounting to the bearing plate.9.2 Inspect and prepare bearing plate surface by cleaning with rags and solvent. If detrimental foreign matter such as mill scale, rust, and dirt is detected on the gasket bearing surface of the plate, and power tool cleaning is required, then: 9.2.1 Make suitable provisions to protect the tendon wires and anchor head threads from accidental rubbing, cutting, or scratching by coming into contact with the power tool's rotating wire brushes and/or abrasive disks. Sheet metal shrouds around the tendon and end anchorage may be necessary. | ||
9.2.1.1 Take precautions to keep dirt and other foreign material out of the tendon, and from the inside of the trumpet and conduit.9.2.2 Power tools should remove loose mill scale, loose rust, loose or flaking paint, etc.Surfaces must be clean and smooth but not necessarily burnished after using power tools.9.2.2.1 Remove sharp edges, and smooth down remaining mill scale to a "feather-edge".9.3 At the discretion of the Owner's Representative fill scratches, nicks, and other sharp depressions in the gasket bearing surface with nonmetallic epoxy, such as "Belzona" epoxy. Use of epoxy shall be according to manufacture's application instructions. | 9.2.1.1 Take precautions to keep dirt and other foreign material out of the tendon, and from the inside of the trumpet and conduit.9.2.2 Power tools should remove loose mill scale, loose rust, loose or flaking paint, etc.Surfaces must be clean and smooth but not necessarily burnished after using power tools.9.2.2.1 Remove sharp edges, and smooth down remaining mill scale to a "feather-edge".9.3 At the discretion of the Owner's Representative fill scratches, nicks, and other sharp depressions in the gasket bearing surface with nonmetallic epoxy, such as "Belzona" epoxy. Use of epoxy shall be according to manufacture's application instructions. | ||
9.3.1 Smooth out epoxy to prevent grease leakage under the gasket.9.4 Remove all dust and loose matter from the vicinity of the tendon and entrance to the trumpet.9.5 Clean any foreign material from the three threaded bearing plate grease can mounting holes.9.6 Smear, swab or brush a coating of grease over all the exposed portions of the anchor head, bearing plate, shims, buttonheads and wires.9.7 A 3/4" thread chaser or tap may be required to clear the threads of the bearing plate's grease cap mounting holes so that the mounting studs can be sufficiently tightened to bottom in the threaded holes.9.8 Thread the three 3/4" studs in the three mounting holes of the bearing plate.9.9 Clean and dry the flange and gasket sealing surface of the grease cap.120 F&Q16.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 111 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 16.0 GREASE CAP REPLACEMENT August 29, 2008 Page 4 of 4 Revision 0 9.10 With the grease cap on end, apply adhesive to the grease cap gasket flange groove, in such quantity so as to hold the gasket in position. | |||
====9.3.1 Smooth==== | |||
out epoxy to prevent grease leakage under the gasket.9.4 Remove all dust and loose matter from the vicinity of the tendon and entrance to the trumpet.9.5 Clean any foreign material from the three threaded bearing plate grease can mounting holes.9.6 Smear, swab or brush a coating of grease over all the exposed portions of the anchor head, bearing plate, shims, buttonheads and wires.9.7 A 3/4" thread chaser or tap may be required to clear the threads of the bearing plate's grease cap mounting holes so that the mounting studs can be sufficiently tightened to bottom in the threaded holes.9.8 Thread the three 3/4" studs in the three mounting holes of the bearing plate.9.9 Clean and dry the flange and gasket sealing surface of the grease cap.120 F&Q16.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 111 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 16.0 GREASE CAP REPLACEMENT August 29, 2008 Page 4 of 4 Revision 0 9.10 With the grease cap on end, apply adhesive to the grease cap gasket flange groove, in such quantity so as to hold the gasket in position. | |||
Place the gasket onto the groove and allow it to dry for a few minutes. Pliobond or a similar industrial adhesive shall be used for gluing. Water soluble adhesives shall not be used.9.10.1 New gaskets shall be used in the final placement of the grease cap. Old or used gaskets may be used during temporary placement of the grease caps.9.11 Lift the grease cap and slide it onto the three mounting studs. For Hoop tendons the grease cap shall be placed so that the bushing (inlet, outlet) is oriented in its highest altitude or toward the top of the containment. | Place the gasket onto the groove and allow it to dry for a few minutes. Pliobond or a similar industrial adhesive shall be used for gluing. Water soluble adhesives shall not be used.9.10.1 New gaskets shall be used in the final placement of the grease cap. Old or used gaskets may be used during temporary placement of the grease caps.9.11 Lift the grease cap and slide it onto the three mounting studs. For Hoop tendons the grease cap shall be placed so that the bushing (inlet, outlet) is oriented in its highest altitude or toward the top of the containment. | ||
9.12 Be sure the gasket is in the groove of the flange and is seated against the bearing plate. Install the three washers and the three nuts to the mounting studs.9.13 Tighten each nut with a wrench, equalizing the load on each nut as well as possible.Tighten each nut in a gradual and even manner to allow the gasket to deform evenly until compressed and snug tight.9.14 If new studs, nuts, and washers are used, or grease caps and/or bearing plates are scratched, then the exposed surfaces shall be touched up with Carbo Zinc 11 ( or approved equal) per the manufacture's application instructions. | 9.12 Be sure the gasket is in the groove of the flange and is seated against the bearing plate. Install the three washers and the three nuts to the mounting studs.9.13 Tighten each nut with a wrench, equalizing the load on each nut as well as possible.Tighten each nut in a gradual and even manner to allow the gasket to deform evenly until compressed and snug tight.9.14 If new studs, nuts, and washers are used, or grease caps and/or bearing plates are scratched, then the exposed surfaces shall be touched up with Carbo Zinc 11 ( or approved equal) per the manufacture's application instructions. | ||
9.15 The replacement is now complete and regreasing can be performed observing the requirements of PSC Procedure F&Q 17.0.10.0 DOCUMENTATION 10.1 None required.11.0 ATTACHMENTS 11.1 None ATTACHMENT Z23R5 120 F&Q16.0.CR3.SGR Page 112 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 Precision Surveillance Corporation PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 17.0 GREASE. REPLACEMENT August 29, 2008 Page 1 of 5 Revision 0 PROGRESS ENERGY FLORIDA, INC.CRYSTAL RIVER NUCLEAR UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR. | 9.15 The replacement is now complete and regreasing can be performed observing the requirements of PSC Procedure F&Q 17.0.10.0 DOCUMENTATION 10.1 None required.11.0 ATTACHMENTS 11.1 None ATTACHMENT Z23R5 120 F&Q16.0.CR3.SGR Page 112 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 Precision Surveillance Corporation PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 17.0 GREASE. REPLACEMENT August 29, 2008 Page 1 of 5 Revision 0 PROGRESS ENERGY FLORIDA, INC.CRYSTAL RIVER NUCLEAR UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR. | ||
REPLACEMENT PROJECT PRECISION SURVEILLANCE CORPORATION FIELD AND QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE GREASE REPLACEMENT LEVEL II: Q..C.08/29/08 Date Title PROJECT MANAGER, PRE 08/29/08 Date Title C L<AZ'14 PRESIDENT 08/29/08 Date'Approved by Title ATTACHMENT Z23R5 21 F W US f f a .Hoffjýc PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 1.0 PURPOSE 1.1 This procedure will establish the requirements for the replacement of grease (sheathing filler) into the voids of tendons after all other work has been completed for the vertical and horizontal tendon work during the Steam Generator Replacement Project at Crystal River Unit 3.2.0 SCOPE 2.1 This procedure applies to those new tendons installed to replace those removed from the tendon voids and those de-tensioned but not removed as specified in the Work Package. This procedure may also be used for any other tendon as needed by Owner.3.0 RESPONSIBILITY 3.1 Owner Field Construction Personnel shall be responsible for the physical activities associated with this procedure. | REPLACEMENT PROJECT PRECISION SURVEILLANCE CORPORATION FIELD AND QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE GREASE REPLACEMENT LEVEL II: Q..C.08/29/08 Date Title PROJECT MANAGER, PRE 08/29/08 Date Title C L<AZ'14 PRESIDENT 08/29/08 Date'Approved by Title ATTACHMENT Z23R5 21 F W US f f a .Hoffjýc PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 | ||
3.2 Owner Quality Control Personnel to perform all inspections and data recording. | |||
===1.0 PURPOSE=== | |||
1.1 This procedure will establish the requirements for the replacement of grease (sheathing filler) into the voids of tendons after all other work has been completed for the vertical and horizontal tendon work during the Steam Generator Replacement Project at Crystal River Unit 3.2.0 SCOPE 2.1 This procedure applies to those new tendons installed to replace those removed from the tendon voids and those de-tensioned but not removed as specified in the Work Package. This procedure may also be used for any other tendon as needed by Owner.3.0 RESPONSIBILITY | |||
===3.1 Owner=== | |||
Field Construction Personnel shall be responsible for the physical activities associated with this procedure. | |||
===3.2 Owner=== | |||
Quality Control Personnel to perform all inspections and data recording. | |||
==4.0 QUALIFICATIONS== | ==4.0 QUALIFICATIONS== | ||
4.1 Owner Field Construction Personnel shall be fit by skill, training and/or experience to perform these duties.4.2 Owner Quality Control Personnel shall be qualified to a minimum of Level II capability in accordance with the requirements of ANSI N45.2.6.5.0 EQUIPMENT 5.1 Grease heating and storage system 5.2 Grease pumping system, miscellaneous grease hoses and fittings.5.3 Y-Devices 5.4 Thermometers 5.5 Miscellaneous Tools, wrenches, ratchets, sockets, shackles, come-alongs, etc.5.6 Plastic bags, plastic sheeting (Visqueen), rags, buckets or drums for waste grease.ATTACHMENT Z23R5 121 F&Q17.0.CR3.SGR Page 114 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 17.0 GREASE REPLACEMENT August 29, 2008 Page 3 of 5 Revision 0 6.0 PRECAUTIONS 6.1 As in other heavy construction, care should be exercised while working from scaffolds, platforms, ladders, high or restricted access locations. | |||
===4.1 Owner=== | |||
Field Construction Personnel shall be fit by skill, training and/or experience to perform these duties.4.2 Owner Quality Control Personnel shall be qualified to a minimum of Level II capability in accordance with the requirements of ANSI N45.2.6.5.0 EQUIPMENT 5.1 Grease heating and storage system 5.2 Grease pumping system, miscellaneous grease hoses and fittings.5.3 Y-Devices 5.4 Thermometers | |||
===5.5 Miscellaneous=== | |||
Tools, wrenches, ratchets, sockets, shackles, come-alongs, etc.5.6 Plastic bags, plastic sheeting (Visqueen), rags, buckets or drums for waste grease.ATTACHMENT Z23R5 121 F&Q17.0.CR3.SGR Page 114 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 17.0 GREASE REPLACEMENT August 29, 2008 Page 3 of 5 Revision 0 6.0 PRECAUTIONS 6.1 As in other heavy construction, care should be exercised while working from scaffolds, platforms, ladders, high or restricted access locations. | |||
Respect for the* safety and well-being of the other trades and personnel in the area must be observed, especially during hoisting operations. | Respect for the* safety and well-being of the other trades and personnel in the area must be observed, especially during hoisting operations. | ||
When grease is under pressure, personnel will wear face shields, coveralls, and gloves if within 10 (ten) feet of the process.6.2 During Grease Replacement, the grease may be pumped under pressure with an exit temperature of 140°F or higher. It is therefore essential to avoid direct contact with the hot grease and to make sure all connections are secure.CAUTION DURING GREASING THE GREASE IS HOT AND MAY BE PUMPED UNDER PRESSURE. | When grease is under pressure, personnel will wear face shields, coveralls, and gloves if within 10 (ten) feet of the process.6.2 During Grease Replacement, the grease may be pumped under pressure with an exit temperature of 140°F or higher. It is therefore essential to avoid direct contact with the hot grease and to make sure all connections are secure.CAUTION DURING GREASING THE GREASE IS HOT AND MAY BE PUMPED UNDER PRESSURE. | ||
| Line 489: | Line 744: | ||
==8.0 PREREQUISITES== | ==8.0 PREREQUISITES== | ||
8.1 All other work has been completed on this tendon and the grease caps have been installed. | 8.1 All other work has been completed on this tendon and the grease caps have been installed. | ||
9.0 PROCEDURE 9.1 COMPLETE TENDON VOID REFILLING 9.1.1 The pumping pressure for complete tendon void refilling shall not exceed 100 psig at the point of installation for hoop tendons and 150 psig for vertical tendons.9.1.1.1 Notification | |||
===9.0 PROCEDURE=== | |||
9.1 COMPLETE TENDON VOID REFILLING 9.1.1 The pumping pressure for complete tendon void refilling shall not exceed 100 psig at the point of installation for hoop tendons and 150 psig for vertical tendons.9.1.1.1 Notification | |||
-Remove grease cap pipe plug from each end of the tendon and attach to the operating shaft of the Y-device. | -Remove grease cap pipe plug from each end of the tendon and attach to the operating shaft of the Y-device. | ||
The Y-device will be similar as seen in Sketch 8-1.121 F&Q17.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 115 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 17.0 GREASE REPLACEMENT August 29, 2008 Page 4 of 5 Revision 0 9.1.2 Connect the Y-device to the tendon end grease cap filler bushing on each end of the tendon, at outlet end push Y-device plunger in to open internal valve.9.1.2.1 The Y-device at the pumping end (inlet end) to have grease hose attached, the Y-device at the opposite end (outlet end) to have waste line attached.9.1.3 A grease control station shall be set up near the tendons to be filled and a communications network established so that the personnel at the furthest end of the tendon to be filled, will be able to communicate with the crew leader or control station attendant. | The Y-device will be similar as seen in Sketch 8-1.121 F&Q17.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 115 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 17.0 GREASE REPLACEMENT August 29, 2008 Page 4 of 5 Revision 0 9.1.2 Connect the Y-device to the tendon end grease cap filler bushing on each end of the tendon, at outlet end push Y-device plunger in to open internal valve.9.1.2.1 The Y-device at the pumping end (inlet end) to have grease hose attached, the Y-device at the opposite end (outlet end) to have waste line attached.9.1.3 A grease control station shall be set up near the tendons to be filled and a communications network established so that the personnel at the furthest end of the tendon to be filled, will be able to communicate with the crew leader or control station attendant. | ||
9.1.4 CAUTION | |||
====9.1.4 CAUTION==== | |||
Operation of the system pressurizes the grease lines. Assure proper PPE. Re-check Y-plunger has opened the internal valve on the outlet by listening or feeling for air exiting during initial operation. | |||
9.1.5 The grease will be pumped through the void at a temperature of 2200 to 260°F at the point of injection until it exits from the waste line and emerges clean and essentially free of air bubbles.9.1.5.1 QCD -Exit grease verified free of air bubbles onto Data Sheet F&Q 17.0 or Work Package Documentation. | 9.1.5 The grease will be pumped through the void at a temperature of 2200 to 260°F at the point of injection until it exits from the waste line and emerges clean and essentially free of air bubbles.9.1.5.1 QCD -Exit grease verified free of air bubbles onto Data Sheet F&Q 17.0 or Work Package Documentation. | ||
9.1.5.2 QCD -Exit grease temperature (140°F minimum) and M&TE data onto Data Sheet F&Q 17.0 or Work Package Documentation. | 9.1.5.2 QCD -Exit grease temperature (140°F minimum) and M&TE data onto Data Sheet F&Q 17.0 or Work Package Documentation. | ||
| Line 507: | Line 766: | ||
2.11 Equipment used to measure tendon force shall be calibrated prior to performing post-tensioning operations and within 3 months following completion of post-tensioning operations. | 2.11 Equipment used to measure tendon force shall be calibrated prior to performing post-tensioning operations and within 3 months following completion of post-tensioning operations. | ||
Accuracy of the calibration shall be within 1.5% of the specified minimum ultimate strength of the tendon. If the calibration results following post-tensioning operations differ by more than the specified accuracy tolerance from the pretest calibrations, the accuracy of the post-tensioning operations shall be evaluated. | Accuracy of the calibration shall be within 1.5% of the specified minimum ultimate strength of the tendon. If the calibration results following post-tensioning operations differ by more than the specified accuracy tolerance from the pretest calibrations, the accuracy of the post-tensioning operations shall be evaluated. | ||
3.0 OUT OF CALIBRATION 3.1 Devices out of calibration shall be processed as non-conformances. | 3.0 OUT OF CALIBRATION | ||
===3.1 Devices=== | |||
out of calibration shall be processed as non-conformances. | |||
Devices out of calibration that are determined to have an adverse effect on quality shall have copies of that nonconformance report submitted to PSC Executive Management for review, and comments where applicable. | Devices out of calibration that are determined to have an adverse effect on quality shall have copies of that nonconformance report submitted to PSC Executive Management for review, and comments where applicable. | ||
3.1.1 Nonconformance Reports shall be drafted, submitted and distributed in accordance with the requirements of Progress Energy Procedures. | |||
3.2 Instruments that are found to be out of calibration shall be re-calibrated and a comparison made of the results of the new calibration and the out-of-calibration variance, if any. If no significant variation exists, the instrument shall be put back into service. In the event that a discrepancy exists, then the Engineering and/or Quality Assurance and Quality Control Sections shall make an evaluation of the discrepancy and the possible effect on the items processed with the out-of-calibration device, with regard to quality, accuracy or reliability. | ====3.1.1 Nonconformance==== | ||
Reports shall be drafted, submitted and distributed in accordance with the requirements of Progress Energy Procedures. | |||
===3.2 Instruments=== | |||
that are found to be out of calibration shall be re-calibrated and a comparison made of the results of the new calibration and the out-of-calibration variance, if any. If no significant variation exists, the instrument shall be put back into service. In the event that a discrepancy exists, then the Engineering and/or Quality Assurance and Quality Control Sections shall make an evaluation of the discrepancy and the possible effect on the items processed with the out-of-calibration device, with regard to quality, accuracy or reliability. | |||
If it is determined that a serious problem exists, then the Quality Assurance Section shall determine what items checked with the out-of-calibration device shall be rechecked with an effective calibrated device.3.3 Instruments that are found to be in excess of the required accuracy or tolerance band after being returned from Field Service, shall be controlled with Nonconformance Reports as required of Sections 3.1 and 3.2 of this Procedure. | If it is determined that a serious problem exists, then the Quality Assurance Section shall determine what items checked with the out-of-calibration device shall be rechecked with an effective calibrated device.3.3 Instruments that are found to be in excess of the required accuracy or tolerance band after being returned from Field Service, shall be controlled with Nonconformance Reports as required of Sections 3.1 and 3.2 of this Procedure. | ||
4.0 TOOL AND GAUGE CONTROL 4.1 The calibration standards used to calibrate measuring and test equipment shall be traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) formerly National Bureau of Standards (NBS) and shall be controlled to an accuracy not to exceed a limit of 0.25% of the tolerance of the equipment being calibrated or the smallest used division of that instrument's scale, unless otherwise limited by "State-of-the Art" conditions. | 4.0 TOOL AND GAUGE CONTROL 4.1 The calibration standards used to calibrate measuring and test equipment shall be traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) formerly National Bureau of Standards (NBS) and shall be controlled to an accuracy not to exceed a limit of 0.25% of the tolerance of the equipment being calibrated or the smallest used division of that instrument's scale, unless otherwise limited by "State-of-the Art" conditions. | ||
| Line 526: | Line 794: | ||
GAUGES'Prrepared by Aprella veu by " LEVEL I I; Q..Title PROJECT MANAGER, PE.Title PRESIDENT 0&29/08 Date 08/29/08 Date: o8M29108 Date Title ATTACHMENT Z23R5 23 S? c PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE QA10.1 CALIBRATION VERIFICATION August 29, 2008 Page 2 of 5 Revision 0 1.0 FIELD VERIFICATION OF PRESSURE GAUGES 1.1 The following procedure shall be used to verify the calibration of hydraulic pressure gauges during field operations. | GAUGES'Prrepared by Aprella veu by " LEVEL I I; Q..Title PROJECT MANAGER, PE.Title PRESIDENT 0&29/08 Date 08/29/08 Date: o8M29108 Date Title ATTACHMENT Z23R5 23 S? c PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE QA10.1 CALIBRATION VERIFICATION August 29, 2008 Page 2 of 5 Revision 0 1.0 FIELD VERIFICATION OF PRESSURE GAUGES 1.1 The following procedure shall be used to verify the calibration of hydraulic pressure gauges during field operations. | ||
These gauges may be used in stressing operations with the rams or other devices that require a measure of accuracy to produce quality results. Frequency and Accuracy of Calibration shall be controlled as stated in Section 5.2 of Procedure QA 10.0 Equipment List.2.0 GENERAL 2.1 Prior to being used for any work, all gauges shall be calibrated with the use of a Dead Weight Tester or the Heise Digital electronic pressure indicator. | These gauges may be used in stressing operations with the rams or other devices that require a measure of accuracy to produce quality results. Frequency and Accuracy of Calibration shall be controlled as stated in Section 5.2 of Procedure QA 10.0 Equipment List.2.0 GENERAL 2.1 Prior to being used for any work, all gauges shall be calibrated with the use of a Dead Weight Tester or the Heise Digital electronic pressure indicator. | ||
2.2 In addition to the pressure gauges used during the field operations, one gauge, designated as the Master Gauge or a Heise Digital Gauge, shall be set aside for purposes of Calibration Verification during the process of the work. Prior to use the Master Gauge or Heise Digital Gauge used for Calibration Verification shall have been calibrated with a dead weight tester traceable to NIST.2.3 Owner Quality Control personnel shall maintain the controls for distribution and recall of each Pressure Gauge being used on site.2.4 A Pressure Gauge may be verified for calibration or accuracy at shorter frequencies than stated in Section 5.2 of Procedure QA 10.0. It is important that verification be performed any time that the gauge has been damaged, subjected to some physical abuse or there is some reason to suspect its accuracy.2.5 Pressure Gauges used for De-tensioning or Re-tensioning (Stressing) tendons of Post-Tensioning Tendon Systems of Nuclear Power Plants, shall be Verified for Calibrated status at least once a day during the operational use of those gauges.3.0 VERIFICATION OF CALIBRATION 3.1 Clean and remove any dirt, grease or residue that could affect the accuracy of the calibration or use of the pressure gauge.3.2 At the option of the Owner Quality Control Section it shall be acceptable to use a Heise Digital Pressure Indicating Gauge for Calibration Verification of Pressure Gauges, rather than a Master Gauge.3.3 Attach the Pressure Gauge to the Calibration Pump of the Heise Indicator or Master Gauge.3.4 Close the back pressure valves before pressurizing the system.123 QA10.1.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 126 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE QA10.1 CALIBRATION VERIFICATION August 29, 2008 Page 3 of 5 Revision 0 3.5 Increase the hydraulic pressure to the point of the desired reading on the Pressure Gauge, usually 1,000 psi plus or minus 100 psi increments. | 2.2 In addition to the pressure gauges used during the field operations, one gauge, designated as the Master Gauge or a Heise Digital Gauge, shall be set aside for purposes of Calibration Verification during the process of the work. Prior to use the Master Gauge or Heise Digital Gauge used for Calibration Verification shall have been calibrated with a dead weight tester traceable to NIST.2.3 Owner Quality Control personnel shall maintain the controls for distribution and recall of each Pressure Gauge being used on site.2.4 A Pressure Gauge may be verified for calibration or accuracy at shorter frequencies than stated in Section 5.2 of Procedure QA 10.0. It is important that verification be performed any time that the gauge has been damaged, subjected to some physical abuse or there is some reason to suspect its accuracy.2.5 Pressure Gauges used for De-tensioning or Re-tensioning (Stressing) tendons of Post-Tensioning Tendon Systems of Nuclear Power Plants, shall be Verified for Calibrated status at least once a day during the operational use of those gauges.3.0 VERIFICATION OF CALIBRATION | ||
===3.1 Clean=== | |||
and remove any dirt, grease or residue that could affect the accuracy of the calibration or use of the pressure gauge.3.2 At the option of the Owner Quality Control Section it shall be acceptable to use a Heise Digital Pressure Indicating Gauge for Calibration Verification of Pressure Gauges, rather than a Master Gauge.3.3 Attach the Pressure Gauge to the Calibration Pump of the Heise Indicator or Master Gauge.3.4 Close the back pressure valves before pressurizing the system.123 QA10.1.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 126 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE QA10.1 CALIBRATION VERIFICATION August 29, 2008 Page 3 of 5 Revision 0 3.5 Increase the hydraulic pressure to the point of the desired reading on the Pressure Gauge, usually 1,000 psi plus or minus 100 psi increments. | |||
Take a reading of the Pressure Gauge and the Heise Indicator and document both on the Pressure Gauge Calibration Form.3.6 MASTER GAUGE (1/4% Accuracy)3.6.1 Where a Master gauge is used for verification of calibration, the master gauge and field gauge to be calibrated shall be connected to a common line (manifold) on a hydraulic pump. The pump shall be pressurized in no greater than 1,000 psi increments, plus or minus 100 psi, to the highest overstress pressure that shall be encountered during stressing activities; for example, 7,600 psi overstress will require calibration on that gauge to at least 7,600 psi. It shall be acceptable to go to 8,000 psi.3.6.2 The accuracy of a gauge verified in this manner shall be acceptable, if it reads to within 50 psi of any reading on the Master Gauge.3.7 HEISE DIGITAL GAUGE 3.7.1 A Pressure Gauge may be verified for calibration by connecting that gauge and the Heise Digital Gauge to a common line, which is in turn connected to a hydraulic pump and pressurized to the same values noted in 3.6.1 above.3.7.2 The verification accuracy of that Pressure Gauge shall be acceptable if it reads to within 30 psi of the Heise Digital Gauge reading for a 1/4 percent accuracy gauge or 55 psi for 1/2 percent accuracy gauge. As a 1/2 percent gauge cannot be accurately interpolated to increments of 5 psi it will be acceptable to take the reading to some point equal to or above 50 psi but not to exceed 60 psi.3.7.3 Pressure Gauges with an accuracy of 1/2 percent or greater shall not be used for Monitoring Force, De-tensioning or Re-tensioning operations of the Post-Tensioning Tendon System.3.8 With the Verification and Documentation of the Pressure Gauge being acceptable, the pump and gauge shall be depressurized and prepared for disassembly. | Take a reading of the Pressure Gauge and the Heise Indicator and document both on the Pressure Gauge Calibration Form.3.6 MASTER GAUGE (1/4% Accuracy)3.6.1 Where a Master gauge is used for verification of calibration, the master gauge and field gauge to be calibrated shall be connected to a common line (manifold) on a hydraulic pump. The pump shall be pressurized in no greater than 1,000 psi increments, plus or minus 100 psi, to the highest overstress pressure that shall be encountered during stressing activities; for example, 7,600 psi overstress will require calibration on that gauge to at least 7,600 psi. It shall be acceptable to go to 8,000 psi.3.6.2 The accuracy of a gauge verified in this manner shall be acceptable, if it reads to within 50 psi of any reading on the Master Gauge.3.7 HEISE DIGITAL GAUGE 3.7.1 A Pressure Gauge may be verified for calibration by connecting that gauge and the Heise Digital Gauge to a common line, which is in turn connected to a hydraulic pump and pressurized to the same values noted in 3.6.1 above.3.7.2 The verification accuracy of that Pressure Gauge shall be acceptable if it reads to within 30 psi of the Heise Digital Gauge reading for a 1/4 percent accuracy gauge or 55 psi for 1/2 percent accuracy gauge. As a 1/2 percent gauge cannot be accurately interpolated to increments of 5 psi it will be acceptable to take the reading to some point equal to or above 50 psi but not to exceed 60 psi.3.7.3 Pressure Gauges with an accuracy of 1/2 percent or greater shall not be used for Monitoring Force, De-tensioning or Re-tensioning operations of the Post-Tensioning Tendon System.3.8 With the Verification and Documentation of the Pressure Gauge being acceptable, the pump and gauge shall be depressurized and prepared for disassembly. | ||
4.0 UNACCEPTABLE CONDITIONS 4.1 If a Pressure Gauge fails to meet the accuracy requirements of Section 3.6.2 or 3.7.2 after being used for Stressing or De-tensioning operations, it shall be necessary to contact the Client and draft a Nonconformance Report in accordance with the PSC requirements, to control that Gauge and any Tendons worked with that Gauge.123 QA10.1.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 127 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE QA10.1 CALIBRATION VERIFICATION August 29, 2008 Page 4 of 5 Revision 0 4.1.1 Any Pressure Gauge not capable of meeting the stated accuracy requirements of Section 3.6.2 or 3.7.2 for the method of calibration being used shall be returned to the PSC shop for adjustment or repair. Any repaired or adjusted Gauge shall be recalibrated before use.4.1.2 ZERO ALIGNMENT (Zero Beating)4.1.2.1 On occasion, the Pressure Gauge Indicating Needle may not be in precise alignment with the Zero mark on the Gauge Face, necessitating realignment. | |||
===4.0 UNACCEPTABLE=== | |||
CONDITIONS 4.1 If a Pressure Gauge fails to meet the accuracy requirements of Section 3.6.2 or 3.7.2 after being used for Stressing or De-tensioning operations, it shall be necessary to contact the Client and draft a Nonconformance Report in accordance with the PSC requirements, to control that Gauge and any Tendons worked with that Gauge.123 QA10.1.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 127 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE QA10.1 CALIBRATION VERIFICATION August 29, 2008 Page 4 of 5 Revision 0 4.1.1 Any Pressure Gauge not capable of meeting the stated accuracy requirements of Section 3.6.2 or 3.7.2 for the method of calibration being used shall be returned to the PSC shop for adjustment or repair. Any repaired or adjusted Gauge shall be recalibrated before use.4.1.2 ZERO ALIGNMENT (Zero Beating)4.1.2.1 On occasion, the Pressure Gauge Indicating Needle may not be in precise alignment with the Zero mark on the Gauge Face, necessitating realignment. | |||
Before calibration the needle is to be realigned to the zero mark, with the realignment completed the Verification shall be performed and documented. | Before calibration the needle is to be realigned to the zero mark, with the realignment completed the Verification shall be performed and documented. | ||
5.0 ACCURACY VARIATIONS 5.1 Even though Pressure Gauges that have been calibrated or verified for calibration, variations in excess of the requirements of Sections 3.6.2 and 3.7.2 may be detected between calibrations or verifications. | |||
===5.0 ACCURACY=== | |||
VARIATIONS 5.1 Even though Pressure Gauges that have been calibrated or verified for calibration, variations in excess of the requirements of Sections 3.6.2 and 3.7.2 may be detected between calibrations or verifications. | |||
In an effort to explain and control this deficiency, this Section shall be reviewed before the Verification of any Pressure Gauges.5.1.1 The accuracy of the calibration of Pressure Gauges or the verification of calibration is highly dependent on the accuracy of the reading of the location of the Pressure Indicating Needle on the Gauge Face. While there is an attempt to precisely align the needle with the Gauge Face Indicating Line, it is nearly impossible to maintain that control. In an effort to explain any variations that could be noted between calibrations or verifications, it is recommended that a notation be added to the Calibration Document to signify that the intended increment was not precisely obtained. | In an effort to explain and control this deficiency, this Section shall be reviewed before the Verification of any Pressure Gauges.5.1.1 The accuracy of the calibration of Pressure Gauges or the verification of calibration is highly dependent on the accuracy of the reading of the location of the Pressure Indicating Needle on the Gauge Face. While there is an attempt to precisely align the needle with the Gauge Face Indicating Line, it is nearly impossible to maintain that control. In an effort to explain any variations that could be noted between calibrations or verifications, it is recommended that a notation be added to the Calibration Document to signify that the intended increment was not precisely obtained. | ||
At that increment it would be noted that the value actually achieved was plus or minus an extrapolated pressure noted during the calibration. | At that increment it would be noted that the value actually achieved was plus or minus an extrapolated pressure noted during the calibration. | ||
| Line 537: | Line 813: | ||
It is therefore necessary to document any minor variations during calibration or verification activities, so as to maintain the integrity of the accuracy of the Pressure Gauges.123 QA10.1.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 128 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE QA10.1 CALIBRATION VERIFICATION August 29, 2008 Page 5 of 5 Revision 0 16.0 DOCUMENTATION 6.1 6.2 A gauge Calibration Record form shall be prepared for each gauge being calibrated or verified. | It is therefore necessary to document any minor variations during calibration or verification activities, so as to maintain the integrity of the accuracy of the Pressure Gauges.123 QA10.1.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 128 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE QA10.1 CALIBRATION VERIFICATION August 29, 2008 Page 5 of 5 Revision 0 16.0 DOCUMENTATION 6.1 6.2 A gauge Calibration Record form shall be prepared for each gauge being calibrated or verified. | ||
All pertinent information as required by the form shall be posted during calibration or verification. | All pertinent information as required by the form shall be posted during calibration or verification. | ||
Calibration or verification documents shall be retained in the appropriate jobsite Quality file.7.0 ATTACHMENTS 7.1 Gauge Calibration Record Form 123 QA1O.1.CR3.SGR Page 129 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE QA10.1 GAUGE CALIBRATION RECORD FORM August 29, 2008 Page I of 1 Revision 0 Project: CRYSTAL RIVER UNIT 3 -SGR Job #GAUGE CALIBRATION VERIFICATION RECORD DATE CHECKED MASTER GAUGE (PSI) JACK GAUGE (PSI)GAUGE I.D.MASTER GAUGE I.D.REMARKS Project: CRYSTAL-RIVER UNIT 3 -SGR Job #GAUGE CALIBRATION VERIFICATION RECORD DATE CHECKED MASTER GAUGE (PSI) JACK GAUGE (PSI)GAUGE I.D.MASTER GAUGE I.D.REMARKS 123 QA10.1 .CR3.SGR Page 130 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 R16 Shutdown Mode 3 -Mode 4 Mode 5 Mode 6 09/26/09, 09/26/09 09/26/09 10/01/09 0:00 1 9:00 J 17:00 1 18:00 T I I 1 1 T.Log entries in W.O.Notes / Remarks Date Time Plant Mode Photos I Reports 4 + 4 I 4. -_______Layout of Cut lines on RB face No QC visual examinations performed on the QC visual inspection of the cut area containment surface in the area of the lay-out / saw cut.(2 foot VT insp. Adjacent to the cut) (Source: Richard Griffith -SGR QC Lead 10/16/09) | Calibration or verification documents shall be retained in the appropriate jobsite Quality file.7.0 ATTACHMENTS | ||
===7.1 Gauge=== | |||
Calibration Record Form 123 QA1O.1.CR3.SGR Page 129 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE QA10.1 GAUGE CALIBRATION RECORD FORM August 29, 2008 Page I of 1 Revision 0 Project: CRYSTAL RIVER UNIT 3 -SGR Job #GAUGE CALIBRATION VERIFICATION RECORD DATE CHECKED MASTER GAUGE (PSI) JACK GAUGE (PSI)GAUGE I.D.MASTER GAUGE I.D.REMARKS Project: CRYSTAL-RIVER UNIT 3 -SGR Job #GAUGE CALIBRATION VERIFICATION RECORD DATE CHECKED MASTER GAUGE (PSI) JACK GAUGE (PSI)GAUGE I.D.MASTER GAUGE I.D.REMARKS 123 QA10.1 .CR3.SGR Page 130 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 R16 Shutdown Mode 3 -Mode 4 Mode 5 Mode 6 09/26/09, 09/26/09 09/26/09 10/01/09 0:00 1 9:00 J 17:00 1 18:00 T I I 1 1 T.Log entries in W.O.Notes / Remarks Date Time Plant Mode Photos I Reports 4 + 4 I 4. -_______Layout of Cut lines on RB face No QC visual examinations performed on the QC visual inspection of the cut area containment surface in the area of the lay-out / saw cut.(2 foot VT insp. Adjacent to the cut) (Source: Richard Griffith -SGR QC Lead 10/16/09) | |||
N/A Initial layout cut saw cut was performed 9/21/09 -9/22/09. The cut was 1/2" deep. (Source: Richard 9/21/09 -Opening initial cut. lonelli -SGR Civil F.E. 10/16/09) 9/22/09 See Cliff Peters E-Mail 10/16/09 14:52 (PDF (R16 Tendon Detensiong sequence.pdf) in L:\Shared\CR3 Containm'ent\Containment Root Cause Files\Root Detensioning of 2 Tendons Cause\Tendon Surv Info Folder) Exceprt below 9/26/09 No lift-off force measurement were taken, tendon forces were only monitored for overstress when removing the Did they take a lift-off force shirms. (Source: Cliff Peters -SGR Tendon F.E.measurement? (Reports) 10/16/09) | N/A Initial layout cut saw cut was performed 9/21/09 -9/22/09. The cut was 1/2" deep. (Source: Richard 9/21/09 -Opening initial cut. lonelli -SGR Civil F.E. 10/16/09) 9/22/09 See Cliff Peters E-Mail 10/16/09 14:52 (PDF (R16 Tendon Detensiong sequence.pdf) in L:\Shared\CR3 Containm'ent\Containment Root Cause Files\Root Detensioning of 2 Tendons Cause\Tendon Surv Info Folder) Exceprt below 9/26/09 No lift-off force measurement were taken, tendon forces were only monitored for overstress when removing the Did they take a lift-off force shirms. (Source: Cliff Peters -SGR Tendon F.E.measurement? (Reports) 10/16/09) | ||
N/A N/A N/A No abnormalites were noted when detensioning of the Any abnormalities noted during the tendons. All activities went as expected. (Source: Cliff detension? | N/A N/A N/A No abnormalites were noted when detensioning of the Any abnormalities noted during the tendons. All activities went as expected. (Source: Cliff detension? | ||
Revision as of 00:53, 14 October 2018
| ML102920098 | |
| Person / Time | |
|---|---|
| Site: | Crystal River  |
| Issue date: | 12/10/2009 |
| From: | Lake L F NRC/RGN-II/DRS/EB3 |
| To: | Naus D - No Known Affiliation |
| References | |
| FOIA/PA-2010-0116 | |
| Download: ML102920098 (134) | |
Text
Lake, Louis From: Sent: To:
Subject:
Attachments:
Lake, Louis Thursday, December 10, 2009 1:54 PM Dan naus'Request #7_NRC SIT Question#1 Information.docx
,/,=---ETendon Detensiong sequence.pdf; Z23R5 PSC Field and'Quality Control ManualQ .pdf;Containment Opening -Tendon Removal Timeline.xlsx.
,2 Here is the latest response to Question #7 Lou 1 D/
From: To:
Subject:
Date: Peters. Clf Portmann.
Rick FW: Tendon Detensiong sequence Friday, October 16, 2009 2:52:50 PM From: Peters, Cliff Sent: Friday, October 16, 2009 11:44 AM To: Holliday, John
Subject:
Tendon Detensiong sequence Vertical 34V8 -9/26/09 Plasma cut 34V9 -9/26/09 Plasma cut 34V10 -9/27/09 Plasma cut, 34V11 -9/27/09 Plasma cut 34V12 -9/26/09 Ram De-tension 34V13 -9/26/09 Ram De-tension 34V14 -9/27/09 Plasma cut 34V15 -9/27/09 Plasma cut 34V16 -9/27/09 Plasma cut 34V17 -9/28/09 Plasma cut Note: We de-tensioned 34V12 & 34V13 at the same time that the we started at 34V8 & worked counter clockwise to 34V17.Horizontal 42H27 -9/26/09 42 H28 -9/27/09 42H29 -9/28/09 42H30 -9/28/09 42H31 -9/29/09 42H32 -9/29/09 42H33 -9/29/09 42H34 -9/30/09 53H27 -9/27/09 53H28 -9/28/09 53H29 -9/29/09 53H30 -9/29/09 53H31 -9/30/09 53H32 -9/30/09 53H33 -9/30/09 53H34 -10/1/09 53H35 -10/1/09 Note: All horizontal tendons were de-tensioned by plasma cutting starting at the bottom working toward the top.
PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 000006301 6R5 Precision Surveillanceý Corporation 3-460 WatflngStred Ernast ChIcagoINd 46312 Ema~il: Info@psctendon.com Phone..(21ig):397-5826 Fax (219) 397-5867-http://www.psctendon.com CONTROLLED MANUAL NO: SN.10 13-POST TENSIONING SYSTEM FIELDANDQUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE MANUAL FOR PROGRESS ENERGY FLORIDA, INC.CRYSTAL RIVER.NUCLEAR UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT CONTAINMENT BUILDING TENDON. INSTALLATION REVISION REVISION REVISION REVISIONýA AUGUST 29, 2008.JUNE 24, 2009: AUGUST 19, 2009 SEPTEMBER 16, 2009ýQA MANAGER 09/16/09 Date;X, Prelared by Title.PRJECT MANAGER;.E
.09/16/09 Date, Approved by Titlea c~ A~-7 PRESIDENT 09/16/09 Date.Approved by Title-A (UVRACKI r 71)D1 4 Lr'-
PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 FIELD AND:QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE MANUAL ACKNOWLEDGEMENT, OF RECEIPT FORM August 29, 200&Page 1 of I*Revision 0ýRevision*
- 2. 8/19/2009 Revision 3'.:9/1,62009' This page shall be removed, and mailed or faxed to: Precision Surveillance Coeporation Phorie:,'
219-397-5826 Qualift Assurance 219-397-5867 3468,Watling Street East Chicago, IN 46312 The return of this Ackhowledgementform from ContltrolManual
.. ....... __Will indicate acknowledgement-of-receipt for document control purposes.
Failure to return this page or, otherwise provide similar acknowledgementiSHALL beijust cause for terminating the controlled statUs Of thistmanual.
RETLRN OF THIS FORM DOES NOT CONSTITUTE APPROVAL OF THE If this page is stamPed "UNCONTROLLEDMANUAL", it is not: necessary tolreturn.
Date of Submittal:
Date of Receipt: The individual acknowledging
... ..receipt willbe consideredthe Na__e_permanent holder of thismanuaL.
Signature:
For more information, regarding responsibility of the:aftendant of Title: this manual,.refer to the Manual Company Control Policy Statement
__....______....___......
Project Contract: Field and Quality Control Procedure Manual: Issue Date. 08-29-08 Revision 09-16-09 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 2 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 FIELD AND QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE MANUAL INDEX STATUS SHEET August 29,' 2008 Page 1lof2Z Prcisn Surveillance oo oRevision 0.C...ratio.
' Revision 2. 8119/2009 Revision 3.ý9/16/2009
- I I I ORIGINAL ISSUE REVISED STAT"US SECTION PAGES 9 1 REV.DATE.REV.DATE PREFACE_Title. 1 0 0829-08 3' 09-.16 Receipt-"To be returned 1 0 08-29-08 13 09.-16-09 Index Status Shleets 21. 0 08 29-ý08 .3 09 09 Definitions, 4
- 0 08-29-08 Personnel Safety 651 b0 4082908 i PROCEDURES
&Q .0::- Purpose 2 .0 08;29-08 F&Q 2.0 -Scope' .0 ....29M08 F&Q 3.0 -Receiving, Handling ..08-29-08 and Storage-, _ _08-29-08___
Data SheetF&Q 3.0 1 0 08-29-08: Data Sheet F&Q 3.0A 1 0 08-29-08'F&Q 31'-.Equipment:Proof:Testt 4 '0 0829-08: Data Sheet F&Q 3.1 1 0 08-29-08 F&Q 5.0- Tendon InitiallDegreasing 4 0 08-29-08 1 08 09.Data Sheet:F&Q5.0, 1t 0 08-29-08 1. 06-24-09 F&Q 6.0 .Tendon.Detensioning/Removallfor Possible; 8 0 09-16-09.R e u s e : .. ... .. ... .. .. ........ ...... .... ..... .... ...._Data.Sheet F&Q06.0 1 0 09-16-08 Data Sh'eet F&Q 6.0A 11 0 0i9-1.6-08.
Figure 1.0; -TendonWire Puller. 1: 0 09-16-08 F&QO8.0 -Plasma Tendon Detension 5 0 08-29-08..Datasheet F&Q 8:0 1 0 08-29-08 1 06-24-09:F&Q..8.1l
-:RathTendon Detensioh
' 6 0 08-29-08 ............
Data Sheet F&Q '8.1 1 0 08-29-08 1 06-24-09 F&Q 10.,0-Tendon Removal 4 0 .08-29-08 F&QO11., -t en'don Void Cleaning .. 4 0 08-29-08 F&Q-13&0'.-
Tendonb Installation 5 0 08-29-08 1 06-24-09 Data Sheet F&Q 13.0 1 0 08-29-08 Spec. EMW0 1 0 0.8-29-08 103 INDEX.CR3'.SGR.F&Q.REV3ldoc i Page 3 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 FIELD;AND QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE MANUAL INDEX STATUS'SHEET August29,2008 Page 2"of 2;! ~~~~Revision* Precision Surveillanci Corporation Revision2.
811.9/2009
.....Revi~iin3,-8/i6/2009ý B .~ p SECTION Oiginali Issue.Revised Status.Pages:-.Re4.Date ReV.Date F&Q 14.0.-Tendon Buttonheading.
8 0 .08-29-08.
1- 06-24+09: Data Sheet F&Q 14.0 1 0 018-29-08 B.H. MachlOper..
Qual Sht. 1t 0 08-29-08 Býuttonhead Spec. Sheet: 0 08-29-08 F&Q 15.0- Tendon Restressing 8 0 08-29-08 1. 0624-09 Data Sheet F&Q. 15.0 1 " 08-29-08 Data SheetF&Q:15.0 A 1 0 08-29-08 IF&Q 15.1 -Anchorage Inspection 6 0 08-29-08 1 09-16-09 Data .SheetiF&QA15.1 1 .0 .082-08 1 06-24-09 Skletch SheetF&Q 151 :i 0 T 08-29-08 F&Q 15;.2- Bearing Plate COncrete Inspection 3.___08_29_08 Datac SheetF&Q' 1.5.1 11 0. 08-29-08 1. 06-24-09 F&QO 16.0- Replace Grease Cap 4 .0 08-29"08 5 0 08-29-08 Data6sheet F&Q 17.0 1 0 08-29-08.Sketch 8-1 f 0 08-29-08 QualityAssurance_______
Q"A 0.0 Caibratin5 0 08-2 -085 QA 10;41 -Calibration:
Verification 5 0 08-29-08 Gauge Cal. Record Form 1 0 08-29-08 103 INDEX.CR3.SGRrF&Q.REV3.doc Page 4 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 FIELD AND.QUALITY CONTROL: PROCEDURE' MANUAL DEFINITIONS August 29; 2008!
Precision ,SurVEillancE Cbopoation
- ~ ~~~i.....PROGRESS ENERGY FLORIDA, INC.CRYSTAL-RIVER NUCLEAR UNIT 3 STEAM*GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT ,PRECISION SURVEILLANCE CORPORATION FIELD AND QUALTY CONTROL PRQCEDURE DEFINITIONS LEVEL II Q;C., 4-7FApr*ed by'Title PROJECT MANAGER, P.E.Title(PRESIDENT Title 08/29/W08 Date 0&29/08: Date 0829/08 Date 3 DEF_%QjTSMOCr ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-1DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 FIELD AND QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE MANUAL DEFINITIONS August 29, 2008 Page 2 of 4 Revision 0 ACTIVE CORROSION:
Corrosion on a component that exhibits metal loss that has occurred since fabrication or construction, and/or exhibits pitting visible to the naked eye. Active corrosion usually is a reddish/rust color.ANCHORAGE (Stressinq Washer): The round machined components at the end of each end of the tendon through which tendon wires are passed.BEARING PLATE (Baseplate, Trumplate):
The steel plate at the end of the tendon, embedded in the concrete.
The tendon is passed through the hole in the plate and the anchorhead bears against the plate or shim which in turn transfers the load to the concrete.BROKEN WIRE: A wire within a tendon assembly that is broken and not capable of accepting prestressed load. Wires that excessively protrude from the anchorage components are suspected to be broken.BUTTONHEAD:
The end of the tendon wire that was mechanically deformed during construction, which seats on each anchorage.
CORROSION PROTECTION MEDIUM (Grease, Casing Filler): Grease injected into tendon duct and anchorage cans for corrosion protection.
Also referred to as grease or sheathing filler grease.EFFECTIVE WIRE: Tendon wire capable of maintaining required post tensioned force.ELONGATION:
The distance a tendon/wire stretches while under stress.FEELER GAUGE METHOD: The method used to determine lift off during a test that utilizes the placement of feeler gauges within the anchorage components while the tendon is under jack/ram load.FIELD END: The end of the tendon on which buttonheads are formed after the tendon is installed.
The field end usually does not have a bushing.FREE WATER: Any quantity of water collected from a tendon grease can, anchorage components, shim gaps, or tendon duct.GREASE CAP: Steel container bolted to the bearing plate or anchorhead.
A grease can encases the anchorage assembly to provide permanent corrosion protection.
GUARANTEED MINIMUM ULTIMATE TENSILE STRENGTH (GUTS): The tensile strength of the tendon assembly based upon the tensile strength of the wire used in construction and the quantity of effective wires. The minimum Guaranteed Ultimate Tensile Strength of 7 mm (0.27559")
diameter wire is 240,000 pounds per square inch or 14,316 pounds.104 DEF.CR3.SGR.F&Q ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 6 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 FIELD AND QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE MANUAL DEFINITIONS August 29, 2008 Page 3 of 4 Revision 0 JACK (Ram): A cylindrical, hydraulic device used to stress the tendon. Also referred to as a "Ram".JACK CHAIR: That device attached to the front of the ram and bears against the bearing plate, which provides the lift height for the tendon as it is being stressed.LIFT OFF FORCE: The actual force or pressure required to lift the anchor head off the tendon anchorage assembly shim stack.LOCK OFF FORCE: The final seating force of a tendon after tensioning during construction or retensioning thereafter.
MINIMUM DESIGN FORCE (kips): The minimum acceptable average prestress force for a tendon or group of tendons to maintain the design basis of the containment structure.
For Crystal River Unit 3 the force levels for this average prestress condition are 1215 kips for the dome tendon group, 1149 kips for the vertical tendon group, and 1252 kips for the hoop tendon group.MISSING WIRE: A wire that is identified as missing from the tendon.MONITORING OF FORCE: That series of operations that determine the force or prestress remaining in the tendon.NET DUCT VOLUME: The volume within a tendon duct that is capable of being filled with corrosion protection medium. This is the gross duct volume minus the volume taken by the tendon wires and components.
OVERSTRESS FORCE: The maximum force that can be applied to a tendon during lift off testing and retensioning.
This force is 80% of the tendon's ultimate tensile strength.For wire specification ASTM A421, 80% of the minimum Guaranteed Ultimate Tensile Strength of the wire is 11,452 pounds for each 7 mm diameter wire.POST TENSIONING:
A method of prestressing concrete in which the tendons are tensioned after the concrete has cured.PREDICTED FORCE: The precalculated force (in kips) based upon the measurement of the prestressing forces during installation minus the losses in prestressing forces that were predicted to have occurred since that time because of material and structural characteristics.
This is the calculated minimum force that should be required to achieve lift off. This value is the acceptance criteria for measuring pre stress forces. The as found value should be equal to or exceed this value.PRETENSIONING FORCE: The force achieved during retensioning where the slack and mechanical clearances have been removed.104 DEF.CR3.SGR.F&Q ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 7 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 FIELD AND QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE MANUAL DEFINITIONS August 29, 2008 Page 4 of 4 Revision 0 PROTRUDING OR UNSEATED WIRE: A wire within a tendon assembly that is extending beyond a tendon anchorage after stressing and is not seated against the anchorage.
The wire must be evaluated.
PUMP: A mechanical device used to pump hydraulic fluid into the jack and apply the force required to stress the tendon.RAM: Synonym for Jack. (See Jack)SHEATHING (Conduit, Duct): The thin-walled tubular steel used for creating a void in the concrete through which the tendon is passed. (Also referred to as : duct, conduit.)SHIM STACK: A series of steel shims installed between the anchor head and bearing plate so that the desired prestress force is obtained.SHOP END: The end of a tendon on which the buttonheads are formed prior to installation.
These buttonheads are formed in a shop environment and not in the field.STRESSING:
Connecting the ram to the tendon and pulling until a predetermined force and elongation is achieved.STRESSING ADAPTOR (Coupler):
That threaded device attached to the pull-rod of the ram, which couples with the anchorhead to be stressed.
This may be for internal or external threaded anchorheads.
TENDON: A separate continuous multiwire tensioned element anchored at both ends to an end anchorage assembly.
An assembly of prestressing steel and anchorage components which imparts prestressing forces to concrete.TENDON END ANCHORAGE ASSEMBLY:
That portion of the tendon which extends beyond the bearing plate while in a stressed condition which consists of the bearing plate, shim stack, anchor head and wire.TENDON TYPE: A tendon type is defined by its geometry and position in the containment structure; e.g., horizontal (hoop), vertical, and dome.TENDON LOCATION NUMBER: The identity of a tendon with regard to it's location in the structure.
WIRE: 7 mm diameter wire manufactured to ASTM A421.104 DEF.CR3.SGR.F&Q ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 8 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 FIELD AND QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE MANUAL PERSONNEL SAFETY August 29, 2008 Page I of 5..... Revision,( ...Predsion Surveimance Corporation is 0 i "'PROGRESS ENERGY FLORIDA, INC.CRYSTAL RIVER NUCLEAR .UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT PRECISION SURVEILLANCE CORPORATION FIELD AND QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE PERSONNEL SAFETY Pr~epared' by A proved b ApproveciDy LEVEL II Q'.C.Title: PROJECT 'MANAGER, P.E Title ,PRESIDENT Title 08/29/08 Date 08129/08 Date 08&29/08 Date ,SafM y. 3SGUTH-q.oc ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5
1.0 PURPOSE
1.1 The purpose of this document is to create awareness for those safety considerations that must be observed by those personnel working around or directly involved in Post Tensioning System operations.
2.0 GENERAL
2.1 All personnel directly involved with the Post-Tensioning System operations SHALL be made aware of the magnitude of the working forces and safety requirements for the various operations.
3.0 SAFETY
3.1 WIRE 3.1.1 The wire used for fabricating the tendons has a minimum breaking strength of 240,000 pounds per square inch. This means that each 7mm diameter wire is capable of withstanding a minimum breaking load of 14,316 pounds per wire.Multiply this by the number of wires in a tendon and you are dealing with forces in excess of 2 million pounds for a 163 wire tendon.CAUTION: Never connect a welding ground, perform welding on, or strike an arc near a stressed tendon.CAUTION: Never apply an open flame to the button heads, the wires or anchorages of a stressed tendon. (Unless the tendon end is being Plasma Cut)[i 6 CAUTION: Never strike the button heads, the wires or the anchorheads of a stressed tendon with a hammer or any other metal object. I 3.1.2 The above actions could cause a button head or wire to fail. During tendon tensile testing, broken wires or button heads have been observed to penetrate hard lumber in excess or 4 inches in thickness, about the equivalent of a .32 caliber bullet.105 Safety.CR3SGR.F&Q Page 10 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 FIELD AND QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE MANUAL PERSONNEL SAFETY August 29, 2008 Page 3 of 5 Revision 0 3.2 STRESSING OPERATIONS During de-tensioning or stressing operations the following cautions SHALL be observed.3.2.1 CAUTION: Never exceed the overstress force or pressure -80% of tendon GUTS for a 163 wire tendon (or 11.452 kips per effective wire).CAUTION: DO NOT stand behind the jack when it is under load.IF, CATIN Keep fingers ou fany pinch areas.* CAUTION: Be alert during shim placement and removal.3.3 3.3.1 STRESSING ADAPTOR (COUPLER)Prior to applying ANY FORCE to the tendon, the stressing adaptor, coupler, must be fully engaged with the anchorage to be stressed or de-tensioned.
S CAUTION: Ensure the stressing adaptor (coupler) is fully engaged with the S anchorage before applying any load, regardless of how small that load might be.ATTACHMENT Z23R5 105 Safety.CR3SGR.F&Q Page 11 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 FIELD AND QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE MANUAL PERSONNEL SAFETY August 29, 2008 Page 4 of 5 Revision 0 3.4 GREASING OPERATIONS
3.4.1 During
greasing operations the grease may be pumped under pressure and may have temperatures in excess of 150°F and injury could occur through carelessness.
It is therefore essential to avoid direct contact with the hot grease and to make sure all connections are secure. Exercise caution when climbing tendon buttress and gallery ladders. The potential for slippery surfaces created by grease on shoes exists. Ladder rung, etc. shall be wiped clean if coated in grease.3.4.2 During heating of grease be aware that belt heaters are hot and could cause injury if touched. It is also essential to ensure that no flammable materials are allowed to touch belt heaters when in operation.
3.4.3 Belt heaters draw large amounts of current, ensure that power supply and any extension cords used are suitable for the power requirements.
3,4.4 CAUTION: During greasing, be aware that the grease is HOT and may be pumped under pressure.3,5 CONSTRUCTION SAFETY CAUTION: DO NOT stand under loads while stationary or during hoisting.* CAUTION: DO NOT permit others to stand under loads.* CAUTION: DO NOT throw or drop object from the scaffold.3.5.1 As in other heavy construction, care should be exercised while working from scaffolds, platforms, ladders, high or restricted access locations.
Respect for the safety and well being of the other trades and personnel in the area must be observed, especially during hoisting operations.
3.5.2 All CR03 Accident Prevention Procedures SHALL be rigidly adhered to, to the total satisfaction of the site safety department.
105 Safety.CR3SGR.F&Q ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 12 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 FIELD AND QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE MANUAL PERSONNEL SAFETY August 29, 2008 Page 5 of 5 Revision 0 3.5.3 3.5.4 3.5.5 Some work may be near plant equipment required for safe shutdown and/or may cause shutdown if plant equipment is damaged. Use special care therefore when suspending or moving detensioning rams or other heavy surveillance equipment.
If required notify the site safety organization to obtain air samples in the tendon gallery prior to entry into the gallery. Enter gallery only upon site safety approval.If there are any doubts or questions concerning a point of operation or safety, refer to the Construction Supervisor before starting that operation or proceeding any further. Refer to the Quality Control personnel any questions about quality before starting operations or proceeding any further.105 Safety.CR3SGR.F&Q Page 13 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE, F&Q 1.01 PURPOSE August 29, 2008 J Page 1 of 2 Precision Surveillance Corporation Revision r"i PROGRESS ENERGY FLORIDA, INC.CRYSTAL RIVER NUCLEAR UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT PRECISION SURVEILLANCE CORPORATION FIELD AND QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE PURPOSE/... repared by Approved by LEVEL II Q.C.Title .PROJECTMANAGER, P.E Title PRESIDENT 08/29/08'Date, 08/29/08 Date 08/29/08 Date, ........Title Am ee r-b v .. .J I I ATTACHMENT Z23R5 79aF&eQU.Co79R PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 1.0 PURPOSE August 29, 2008 Page 2 of 2 Revision 0 1.0 PURPOSE 1.1 The purpose of this Field and Quality Control Manual is to provide those procedures that will be necessary to perform the required vertical and horizontal Post Tensioning System Tendon work during the Steam Generator Replacement Project at Crystal River Unit 3.1.2 These procedures shall be used for the required Field Operations and Inspections of selected Vertical and Horizontal Tendons of CR03 as shown in PSC Procedure F&Q 2.0 or as determined by owner approved Work Package.1.3 In addition, each procedure provides as necessary, the reporting responsibilities for notification of unacceptable conditions that may have been detected as a result of the Field Operations or Inspections.
1.4 This Field and Quality Control Manual has been developed in accordance with owner requirements.
1.5. The instructions provided in this Field and Quality Control Manual contain instructions on construction methods and good practices and quality inspection requirements to perform work on post tensioned tendons. The Quality Control Documentation (QCD)instructions are quality inspection points, hold points and/or documentation points required to control critical activities.
Work shall not progress through these points without a release from the Inspector or Field Engineer as outlined in the QCD. Data Sheets are provided within each F&Q document where QCD activities require written authorization or collection of critical data. At no time will these QCD activities be deviated from with out prior authorization by owner.1.6 The methods and practices other than QCD's contain construction related activities which may vary depending upon field conditions.
In the event that one of these methods or practices is required to be performed out of sequence or in a different manner, variations require prior written authorization by owner.106 F&Q1.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 15 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5
-PSC.PROCEDURE F&Q 2.0 71 zSCOPE August 29, 2008.. ... ,Page 1 of 3~Re~vision 0 Precision SurvEilancE Corporation P o'I PROGRESS ENERGY FLORIDA, INC.CRYSTAL RIVER NUCLEAR UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT PRECISION SURVEILLANCE.
CORPORATION FIELD AND QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE SCOPE Apfvd by -" 111eLt LEVEL II Q.C..Title;.08/29/08 Date-I 4 i I-~ I PROJECT MANAGER, P E.08/29/08 Date Title PRESIDENT 08&29/08.Date Title ATTACHMENT Z23R5 01 2 0 S3c.
PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 2.0 SCOPE August 29, 2008 Page 2 of 3 Revision 0 1.0 GENERAL: 1.1 A construction opening is required in the containment wall for the Crystal River Unit 3 (CR03) Steam Generator Replacement Project. In order to accomplish this task a total of 65 tendons will have to be removed or fully de-tensioned as determined by the owner.The services to be provided are applicable to Crystal River Unit 3.1.2 Generally, the scope of the work involves: 1.2.1 Plasma cut de-tension and removal of selected Vertical Tendons.1.2.2 Plasma cut de-tension and removal of selected Horizontal Tendons.1.2.3 After completion of all generator moving activities fully ram de-tension selected Vertical and Horizontal Tendons.1.2.4 Installation of new Vertical and Horizontal Tendons for those removed.1.2.5 Once released by Owner re-stress all replaced new Vertical and Horizontal Tendons and the Vertical and Horizontal Tendons fully de-tensioned.
1.2.6 Install
replacement tendon grease.2.0 2.1 2.2 2.3 SCOPE: There are 10 Vertical Tendons and 17 Horizontal Tendons to be removed and replaced with new tendons.There are 20 Vertical Tendons and 18 Horizontal Tendons to be fully de-tensioned.
Removal Tendons vertical Horizontal Horizontal Tendon No. Tendon No. Tendon No.34V8 42H27 53H27 34V9 42H28 53H28 34V10 42H29 53H29 34VII 42H30 53H30 34V12 421-31 531-31 34V13 42-3 531-32 34V14 421-33 531-33 34V15 421-34 53H34 34V16 53H35 34V17 107 F&Q2.0.CR3.SGR Page 17 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 2.0 SCOPE August 29, 2008 Page 3 of 3 Revision 0 2.4 Detension Tendons Vertical Vertical Tendon No. Tendon No.45V22 34V18 45V23 34V19 45V24 34V20 34V1 34V21 34V2 34V22 34V3 34V23 34V4 34V24 34V5 23V1 34V6 23V2 34V7 23V3 Horizontal Horizontal Tendon No. Tendon No.42H22 42H23 53H23 42H24 53H24 421125 531125 42H26 53H26 42H35 42H36 53H36 42H37 53H37 42H38 53H38 42H39 53H39__________________
~I ________107 F&Q2.0.CR3.SGR Page 18 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 P
S. PROCEDURE
F&Q 3.0 RECEIVING, HANDLING ANDSTORAGE August 29 ,2008, Page 1 of5 Revision 0.Precision Surveillance Corporation PROGRESS ENERGY;FLORIDA, INC.CRYSTAL RIVER NUCLEAR UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT PRECISION SURVEILLANCE CORPORATION FIELD AND QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE RECEIVING, HANDLING AND STORAGE LEVEL /I Q.C.08,208 Date' Frrepared by Apprkived by ---A~pprovepD Title PROJECT MANAGER, P.E.Title PRESIDENT Title 08&29/08 Date 08&29/08 Date ATTACHMENT Z23R5 08 rl qwo loc PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 3.0 RECEIVING, HANDLING AND STORAGE August 29, 2008 Page 2 of 5 Revision 0 1.0 PURPOSE 1.1 This procedure will establish the requirements for the receiving, storage and handling of materials and quality control inspections/data recording for the vertical and horizontal tendon work during the Steam Generator Replacement Project at Crystal River unit 3.2.0 SCOPE 2.1 Equipment and material shall be received by owner, unloaded by owner and stored at an area at the jobsite as designated.
Material must be released by owner prior to shipment and receipt inspected by owner.2.2 The materials shall be received, stored and handled in accordance with ANSI N45.2.2. All instrumentation shall be classified Level B. Sheathing filler material, replacement tendon shipping containers, removed tendons and anchor heads and shims shall be Level C. All other materials and equipment shall be Level D. Owner will establish and maintain appropriate storage areas and levels while onsite.3.0 RESPONSIBILITY
3.1 Owner
Field Construction Personnel shall be responsible for the physical activities associated with this procedure.
3.2 Owner
Quality Control Personnel to perform all inspections and data recording.
4.0 QUALIFICATIONS
4.1 Owner
Field Construction Personnel shall be fit by skill, training and/or experience to perform these duties.4.2 Owner Quality Control Personnel shall be qualified to a minimum of Level II capability in accordance with the requirements of ANSI N45.2.6.5.0 EQUIPMENT 5.1 Cranes, forklifts as needed.5.2 Miscellaneous shackles, slings, etc.108 F&03.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 20 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 3.0 RECEIVING, HANDLING AND STORAGE August 29, 2008 Page 3 of 5 Revision 0 6.0 PRECAUTIONS
6.1 Respect
for the safety and well-being of the other trades and personnel in the area must be observed, especially during hoisting operations.
CAUTION DO NOT STAND UNDER LOADS WHILE STATIONARY OR DURING HOISTING.
DO NOT PERMIT OTHERS TO STAND UNDER LOADS.7.0 QUALITY CONTROL DOCUMENTATION AND HOLD POINTS 7.1 All Quality Control Documentation (QCD) points noted in this procedure are HOLD POINTS. The work shall not progress past or through a QCD without a verbal release from the Inspector.
I CAUTION: Never connect a welding gasroserund, petednrform welding on, or strike an arc near 8.0 PREREQUISITES 8.1 None.9.0 PROCEDURE 9.1 RECEIVING 9.1.1 QCD -Notification
-Unload material using appropriate equipment, slings, chains, etc. for the type of material received.9.2 STORAGE AND HANDLING GREASE (SHEATHING FILLER)9.2.1 QCD -Notification
-Grease (sheathing filler) when received in bulk tanker trucks shall be offloaded into onsite storage tank provided by PSC. During offloading two one quart samples of the grease shall be obtained by the Owner Inspector identified and turned over for testing if needed.9.2.1.1 The temperature in the storage tank can be maintained ucp to 250'F while product is being actively used, and dropped down to 150 F or heat turned off when product will not be used at Owner Supervision's determination.
Product in the tank must be above the coils when the heat is turned off so the product can be easily reheated, otherwise new hot material may have to be added to get the system activated to heat up. Temperature of product should not exceed 250°F during storage.108 F&Q3.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 21 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 9.2.1.2 Grease from the storage tank may be transferred to 55 gal. drums or other containers for possible hand pumping and pouring of grease into some of the tendon void ends. If this is done containers should be clean (free of dirt, debris, water and any other possible source on contamination) and be protected from the elements after filling to prevent contamination by chlorides, sulfides, nitrates, and water.9.2.2 If drums of grease are received they shall be stored on dunnage in a well drained area and be covered with plastic or tarps to protect them from the environment.
9.3 STORAGE
AND HANDLING INSTRUMENTATION 9.3.1 All instrumentation except hydraulic rams when not in use shall be stored in tool trailers or indoor office space to protect from environmental and possible accidental damage.9.3.1.1 The hydraulic rams when not in use may be stored on dunnage and placed to prevent accidental damage.9.4 STORAGE AND HANDLING TENDONS, ANCHOR HEADS AND SHIMS 9.4.1 Tendons and anchorage hardware when removed from the containment shall be stored at the jobsite until scrapped or shipped offsite in accordance with the requirements of Owners applicable procedures.
9.4.1.1 Minimum storage for new material at the jobsite is to be in a well drained area with the items placed on pallets, racks or in boxes or on dunnage and covered to provide protection from the weather and possible contamination including exposure to direct sunlight.9.4.1.2 All material will be handled using appropriate equipment, slings, chains, etc. to prevent damage or contamination.
10.0 DOCUMENTATION 10.1 The items requiring documentation in this procedure shall be documented by the Owner Quality Control Inspector on Data Sheet F&Q 3.0 or, Data Sheet F&Q 3.OA attached to this procedure or Owner Receipt/Storage Inspection Forms.11.0 QUALITY CONTROL 11.1 For materials received, a preliminary visual inspection or examination shall be performed prior to unloading or placing into storage to determine if any damage occurred during shipping.
Observations for unusual conditions shall include: 11.1.1 Fire -Charred paper, wood or paint indicating exposure to fire or high temperature.
108 F&Q3.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 22 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 3.0 RECEIVING, HANDLING AND STORAGE August 29, 2008 Page 5 of 5 Revision 0 11.1.2 Excessive Exposure -Weather-beaten, frayed, rusted, or stained containers indicating prolonged exposure during transit.11.1.3 Environmental Damage -Water or oil marks, damp conditions, dirty areas, or salt film (indicating exposure to sea water or winter road salt chemicals).
11.1.4 Tie Down Failure -Shifted, broken, loose or twisted shipping ties, and worn material under ties, indicating improper blocking and tie down during shipment.11.1.5 Rough Handling -Splintered, torn, or crushed containers indicating improper handling.11.2 Any deficiencies found as a result of the inspections above will be immediately recorded on Receipt/Storage Inspection Forms. At the jobsite it will not be necessary to open any containers unless shipping damage is evident.11,2.1 Receiving Inspections will be documented by the Inspector on Receipt/Storage Inspection Forms.11.3 Once a tendon or anchorage hardware storage container is opened the visible areas of the tendon or anchorage hardware will be inspected for damage and corrosion condition per attached Specification EW1 01 Evaluative Criteria and results documented on Data Sheet F&Q 3.OA.11.3.1 Anchor heads, bushing and shims will be checked for obvious damage and any deficiencies found as a result of inspection will be immediately corrected or appropriate corrective action proposed.11.4 After storage inspection, bare metal areas of tendons if in evidence are to be coated with corrosion protection grease (1601 Amber or 2090P-4 or Owner approved equivalent).
11.5 Results of inspections are to be documented on Receipt/Storage Inspection Forms.12.0 NOTIFICATION 12.1 Work shall not proceed beyond a QCD point, until Quality Control Inspector is notified.12.2 Owner is to be notified of any reject conditions.
13.0 ATTACHMENTS 13.1 Data Sheet F&Q 3.0 13.2 Data Sheet F&Q 3.OA 13.3 Specification EW101 Evaluative Criteria 108 F&Q3.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 23 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 3.0 RECEIVING, HANDLING AND STORAGE DATA SHEET F&Q 3.0 August 29, 2008 Page 1 of 1 Revision 0 RECEIVING INSPECTION DOCUMENTATION PROJECT: CRYSTAL RIVER UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT DATE OF RECEIVING INSPECTION:
MATERIAL RECEIVED CONDITION ON RECEIPT TENDON IDENTIFICATION:
ACCEPT [HOLD [REJECT_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ II I. _ _I I t I I I i i i ANCHORAGE HARDWARE: IF MATERIAL IS FOUND DAMAGED OR REQUIRES RECONDITIONING, STATE THE PROBLEM BELOW AND CORRECTIVE ACTION PERFORMED.
Q.C. INSPECTOR SIGNOFF: LEVEL: DATE: Q.C. REVIEW: LEVEL: DATE: 108 F&Q3.0.CR3.SGR Page 24 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 r PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 3.0 RECEIVING, HANDLING AND STORAGE DATA SHEET F&Q 3.OA August 29, 2008 Page 1 of 1 Revision 0)STORAGE INSPECTION DOCUMENTATION PROJECT: CRYSTAL RIVER UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT DATE OF STORAGE INSPECTION:
MATERIAL INSPECTED CONDITION TENDON IDENTIFICATION:
ACCEPT ]HOLD REJECT.1 .1 1 1- 1 1+ I- I+ + I+ + 4-*l. *1-4 4 4 4 1-ANCHORAGE HARDWARE: ANCHORAGE HARDWARE:
________ ++t 4 t t I** I.IF MATERIAL IS FOUND DAMAGED OR REQUIRES RECONDITIONING, STATE THE PROBLEM BELOW AND CORRECTIVE ACTION PERFORMED.
Q.C. INSPECTOR SIGNOFF: Q.C. REVIEW: LEVEL: DATE: LEVEL: DATE: 108 F&Q3.0.CR3.SGR Page 25 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Ql 3.1 EQUIPMENT PROOF TEST A -August 29, 2008'Page 1 of.4 Precision Surveillance Corporation, Revision PROGRESS ENERGY FLORIDA, INC.CRYSTAL RIVER NUCLEAR UNIT 3, STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT PRECISION SURVEILLANCE CORPORATION FIELD AND QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE EQUIPMENT PROOF TEST LEVEL II Q, C.Title Aporoved by PROJECT MANAGER, P.E.08/29/08 Date 08/29/08 Date 08/29/08 Date Title PRESIDENT Title ATTACHMENT Z23R5 09 FN1i,3M6ac PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 lam PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 3.1 EQUIPMENT PROOF TEST August 29, 2008 Page 2 of 4 Revision 0 11.0 PURPOSE 1.1 This procedure will establish the requirements for the proof testing of tensioning equipment and quality control inspections/data recording for the vertical and horizontal tendon work during the Steam Generator Replacement Project for Crystal River Unit 3. The proof-test shall demonstrate that the equipment functions safely under the most severe anticipated field conditions, and under maximum possible load, eccentricity, and misalignment.
2.0 SCOPE
2;.1 Each set of tensioning equipment shall be proof tested and after proof testing shall be inspected prior to delivery to the jobsite.2'.2 Owner should be notified 14 days prior to the test so that they have the option to witness the test.3:.0 RESPONSIBILITY 3".1 Precision Surveillance Corporation Shop Personnel shall be responsible for the physical activities associated with this procedure.
3.2 Precision
Surveillance Corporation, Quality Control or Engineering Personnel to perform all inspections and data recording.
4.0 QUALIFICATIONS
4.1 Precision
Surveillance Corporation Shop Personnel shall be fit by skill, training and/or experience to perform these duties.4.2 Precision Surveillance Corporation Quality Control Personnel shall be qualified to a minimum Level II capability in accordance with the requirements of ANSI N45.2.6.4.3 Precision Surveillance Corporation Engineering Personnel shall have a four year degree from an accredited institution.
5.0 EQUIPMENT
5.1 Ram Calibration Stand 5.2 Hydraulic Pump 5.3 Hydraulic Ram with jack chair, pullrod with nut, and rod adaptor.5.4 Hydraulic Pressure Gauge.5.5 Miscellaneous hoses and connections.
109 F&Q3.1.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 27 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5
-PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 3.1 EQUIPMENT PROOF TEST August 29, 2008 Page 3 of 4 Revision 0 6.0 PRECAUTIONS
6.1 Respect
for the safety and well being of other personnel in the area must be observed.6.2 Prior to applying any force to the tensioning equipment assure that all load bearing threaded connections are fully engaged.6.3 During proof testing the following cautions shall be observed.CAUTION DO NOT STAND BEHIND THE RAM WHEN IT IS UNDER LOAD KEEP FINGERS OUT OF ANY PINCH AREAS 7.0 QUALITY CONTROL DOCUMENTATION AND HOLD POINTS 7.1 All Quality Control Documentation (QCD) points noted in this procedure are HOLD POINTS. The work shall not progress past or through a QCD without a verbal release from the Inspector or Engineer.8.0 PREREQUISITES
8.1 Owner
should have been notified 14 days prior to the test so that they have the option to witness the test.8,2 Prior to performing this proof-test the tensioning equipment will have been calibrated in accordance with PSC Procedure QA 12.8.G-W.9.0 PROCEDURE 9.1 QCD-HOLD POINT- Set up the ram assembly so that the ram is out of alignment with the test stand by 3/16". (The test may also be performed by butting two ram assemblies together and obtaining the 3/16" misalignment in this way two ram assemblies are tested at the same time.)9.1.1 This eccentric position of the ram is the maximum that can occur in the field when the ram is positioned on the tendon bearing plate.9.2 QCD-HOLD POINT- The ram will be pressurized to a force of 1979KIPS and held at that force for approximately 5 seconds.9.2.1 This 1979 KIPS is 106 percent of the maximum working load of 1867 KIPS fora 163 wire tendon.9.3 QCD-HOLD POINT- While at maximum pressure, from a safe vantage point, inspect ram for hydraulic fluid leaks.109 F&Q3.1.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 28 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 3.1 EQUIPMENT PROOF TEST August 29, 2008 Page 4 of 4 Revision 0 9.4 QCD-HOLD POINT- After testing the ram shall be removed from the test stand or from the other ram and all components visually inspected for damage or defects.10.0 DOCUMENTATION 10.1 The items requiring documentation in this procedure shall be documented by the PSC Quality Control Inspector or Engineer on Data Sheet F&Q 3.1 attached to this procedure.
11.0 QUALITY CONTROL 11.1 Document date of proof test.11.2 Document acceptance of 3/16" eccentric alignment.
11.3 Document acceptance of 1979 KIPS force being held for 5 seconds.11.4 Document no hydraulic fluid leaks at pressure.11.5 Document the identity number of the ram, stressing rod, pull rod, pull rod nut and jack chair as applicable being proof tested.11.6 Document the acceptance of visual examinations after proof test.12.0 NOTIFICATION 12.1 PSC Quality Control Inspector or Engineer must be notified prior to working through a QCD-HOLD POINT.13.0 ATTACHMENTS 13.1 Data Sheet F&Q 3.1 109 F&Q3.1.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 29 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 3.1 EQUIPMENT PROOF TEST DATA SHEET F&Q 3.1 August 29, 2008 Page 1 of 1 Revision 0 TENSIONING EQUIPMENT PROOF TEST DOCUMENTATION PROJECT: CRYSTAL RIVER UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT DATE OF PROOF TEST: (9.1) 3/16" ECCENTRIC ALIGNMENT:
D-D-(9.2) 1979 KIPS HELD FOR 5 SECONDS: ACCEPTABLE ACCEPTABLE ACCEPTABLE (9.3) NO OBSERVABLE HYDRAULIC FLUID LEAKS:D RESULTS OF VISUAL INSPECTION RAM IDENTITY NO.STRESSING ROD IDENTITY NO.PULL ROD IDENTITY NO.I-I D D D-ACCEPTABLE ACCEPTABLE ACCEPTABLE ACCEPTABLE ACCEPTABLE PULL ROD NUT IDENTIY NO. ______JACK CHAIR IDENTITY NO.QC INSP.or ENGINEER SIGNOFF LEVEL DATE QC REVIEW LEVEL DATE 109 F&Q3.1.CR3.SGR Page 30 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 5.0 TENDON INITIAL DEGREASING AND CAP REMOVAL August 29, 2008 Page 1 of 4Revision 0 Precision Surveillance Corporation Revision 1I8/19/09 Surv~~~~illaneRvso PROGRESS ENERGY FLORIDA, INC..CRYSTAL RIVER NUCLEAR UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT PRECISION SURVEILLANCE CORPORATION:
FIELD AND QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE TENDON INITIAL, DEGREASING AND CAP REMOVAL Prepared by QA MANAGER Title 08/19/09 Date PROJECT MANAGER, P.E.Title 08/19/09 Date Aplroved by/ -: -'Oe C PRESIDENT 0F&19)90 Date I a5 Title 110 F&Q5.0.CR3.SGR~doc ATTACWAENT Z23R5 Page 31 of 130 PCHG-EIESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 5.0 TENDON INITIAL DEGREASING AND CAP REMOVAL August 29, 2008 Page 2 of 4 Revision 0 Revision 1, 8/19/09 1.0 PURPOSE 1.1 This procedure will establish the requirements for the initial degreasing of tendons and quality control inspections/data recording during grease cap removal at Crystal River Unit 3 for the vertical and horizontal tendon work during the Steam Generator Replacement Project.2.0 SCOPE 2.1 The tendons to be initially degreased to the extent possible before tendon work begins are those vertical tendons to be removed, and vertical tendons to be de-tensioned but not removed as specified in PSC Procedure F&Q 2.0 or Owner Work Package. However, only tendons being detensioned and NOT removed, both vertical and horizontal, shall have grease quantity capture recorded for evaluation against replaced quantities.
3.0 RESPONSIBILITY
3.1 Owner
Field Construction Personnel shall be responsible for the physical activities associated with this procedure.
4.0 QUALIFICATIONS
4.1 Owner
Field Construction Personnel shall be fit by skill, training and/or experience to perform these duties.5.0 EQUIPMENT 5.1 Miscellaneous Tools, wrenches, ratchets, sockets, shackles, come-alongs, etc.5.2 Plastic bags, plastic sheeting (Visqueen), rags, buckets or drums for waste grease.5.3 Device to depress end cap check valve.5,.4 A source of dry air (if required).
5.5 Air hose and fittings (if required).
6.0 PRECAUTIONS
6.1 As in other heavy construction, care should be exercised while working from scaffolds, platforms, ladders, high or restricted access locations.
Respect for the safety and well-being of the other trades and personnel in the area must be observed, especially during hoisting operations.
6.2 A tendon grease cap weighs in excess of 100 pounds and may contain about 100 pounds of grease. Be prepared to support this weight when the grease cap is unbolted and removed.110 F&Q5.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 32 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 5.0 TENDON INITIAL DEGREASING AND CAP REMOVAL August 29, 2008 Page 3 of 4 Revision 0 Revision 1, 8/19/09 6.3 The sheathing filler (grease) may be in liquid, gel or solid form. Tendons in the area of steam or feed penetrations in operating plants, may contain hot grease and some caution should be exercised.
6.4 Spilled
grease from hoses and voids could be a slipping safety hazard, during all operations it should be cleaned up and placed in waste drums.CAUTION NEVER STRIKE THE BUTTONHEADS, THE WIRES, OR THE ANCHORAGES OF A STRESSED TENDON WITH A HAMMER OR ANY OTHER OBJECT UNLESS AUTHORIZED.
HAVE SUFFICIENT QUANTITIES OR SIZES OF CONTAINERS ON HAND TO CATCH THE GREASE, AS IT MAY FALL FROM THE TENDON VOID, ANCHORAGE OR GREASE CAP.7.0 QUALITY CONTROL DOCUMENTATION AND HOLD POINTS 7.1 None.8.0 PREREQUISITES
8.1 Assure
this tendon is scheduled to have its grease removed.9.0 PROCEDURE 9.1 INITIAL VERTICAL TENDON DEGREASING 9.1.1 In the tendon gallery locate the grease cap of the tendon to be degreased, place visqueen on the floor and up the walls to desired height and secure with tape.9.1.2 Place an empty 55 gallon drum under the cap.9.1.3 Remove the plug from the grease cap and attach device to depress end cap check valve. Have the plug from the top grease cap removed to allow the tendon to gravity drain. At the field superintendent's option for those tendons being removed the grease cap in the gallery may be removed to assist draining.9.1.4 Note for those tendons not to be removed and replaced care should be taken to prevent rain or contamination from entering the cap while the plug is removed.9.1.5 Full drums are replaced with another empty drum until the tendon is drained.9.1.6 If it is determined that enough of the grease has not been removed by gravity draining an air hose may be attached to the top grease cap inlet and air pressure (not to exceed 100 psig) may be used to further degrease the tendon void. Be sure that adequate communication is provided at each end of the tendon so that each crew will know what actions are taking place.9.1.7 Replace the grease cap plugs on both ends.of the tendon after the tendon is degreased and identify on each grease cap that the tendon has been degreased.
110 F&Q5.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 33 of 130 PCHG-DIESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 5.0 TENDON INITIAL DEGREASING AND CAP REMOVAL August 29, 2008 Page 4 of 4 Revision 0 Revision 1, 8/19/09 9.1.8 On tendons to be removed bottom anchorages can be covered with a bag for protection instead of replacing the cap.9.1.9 Remove waste grease drums for disposal offsite in accordance with the requirements of Owners applicable procedures and clean up any spilled grease.10.0 REMOVAL OF GREASE CAP (VERTICAL OR HOOP)10.1 Position platforms, if required, at the end of the tendon to have the cap removed.1 0.2 Place a container and/or a protective cover under the tendon grease cap to protect adjacent areas from dripping grease.10.3 Remove the bulk filler plug from the tendon end cap and depress the check valve to allow any excess pressure and/or bulk filler grease to escape. Reinstall plug after depressurization.
10.4 Remove the three (3) nuts and washers holding the end cap to the bearing plate Ai ensuring that the end cap is fully supported as the nuts are being removed.10.5 Carefully, remove the grease cap to prevent any foreign matter from dropping into the grease in that cap. Remove the three 3/4" x 4-1/2" studs.10.6 Clean and collect the grease from the grease cap.10.7 For detensioned and not removed tendons only, determine the amount of grease that may have been lost during removal of the grease cap, plus the amount of grease removed from the anchorage during cleaning and record on Data Sheet F&Q 5.0.11.0 DOCUMENTATION 11.1 The items requiring documentation in this procedure shall be documented by the assigned field construction person of the working crew on Data Sheet F&Q 5.0 attached to this procedure or the documentation provided in the Owner Work Package.12.0 QUALITY CONTROL 12.1 None.13.0 NOTIFICATION 13.1 Owner Field Supervision to be notified if any problems are encountered during the degreasing operations.
14.0 ATTACHMENTS 14.1 Data Sheet F&Q 5.0.110 F&Q5.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 34 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 5.0 TENDON INITIAL DEGREASING AND CAP REMOVAL DATA SHEET F&Q 5.0 August 29, 2008 Page 1 of I Revision 0 Revision 1 6/24/2009 GREASE REMOVAL DOCUMENTATION PROJECT: CRYSTAL RIVER UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT TENDON NO.: END IDENTIFICATION:
QUANTITY REMOVED: GAL.END IDENTIFICATION:
QUANTITY REMOVED: GAL.DATE: AI SUPERINTENDENT (OR) CIVIL FIELD ENGINEER: 110 F&Q5.0.CR3.SGR Page 35 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-11ESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSO'PROCEDURE F&Q 6.0.A' ~~~TENDONk DETENISIONINGIREMOVAL, FO 0OSBL ES'September16,,2009
'Pagel 101f8 Revision0 Precisioný Surveillance Corporation PROGRESS; ENERGY FLORIDA, INC.CRYSTAL RIVER NUCLEAR UNIT3 STEAM GEN ERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT PRECISION.
SURVEILLANCE.
CORPORATION1 FIELD AND. QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE, TENDON DETENSIONINGIREMOVAL FOR, POSSIBLE REUSE QAA MANAGERTitl .PROJECT MANAGER, P.E.Datell.Date.Approved by TitleI Approved by PRESIDENT'
'Title: 1Date ATTACHMENT Z23R5 I OatF&Q6B.oCR3:SGR.doc Page 36 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 6.0 TENDON DETENSIONINGIREMOVAL FOR POSSIBLE REUSE September 16, 2009 Page 2 of 8 Revision 0 1.0 PURPOSE 1.1 This procedure will establish the requirements for hydraulic ram de-tensioning and removal of tendons for possible reuse at Crystal River Unit 3 during the Steam Generator Replacement Project.2.0 SCOPE 2.1 The vertical tendons to be de-tensioned by hydraulic ram and removed shall be as specified in Owner Work Package. Vertical tendons shall be de-tensioned from the top end as specified in the Owner Work Package.2.2 Prior to de-tensioning a tendon a full visual inspection shall be performed on each tendon end and documented per PSC Procedure F&Q 15.1 and F&Q 15.2 or on Owner Work Package documentation.
2.3 The de-tensioning sequence shall be as specified on the Owner Work Package.3.0 RESPONSIBILITY
3.1 Owner
Field Construction Personnel shall be responsible for the physical activities and recording of documentation associated with this procedure.
4.0 QUALIFICATIONS
4.1 Owner
Construction Personnel shall be fit by skill, training and experience to perform these duties and PSC tendon training program.5.0 EQUIPMENT 5.1 Hydraulic ram (calibrated) and pump with appropriate hoses and fittings.5.2 Hydraulic pressure gauge (calibrated).
5.3 Miscellaneous
Tools, wrenches, ratchets, sockets, shackles, come-alongs, etc.5.4 Plastic bags, plastic sheeting (Visqueen), rags, buckets or drums for waste grease.6.0 PRECAUTIONS 6.1 As in other heavy construction, care should be exercised while working from scaffolds, platforms, ladders, high or restricted access locations.
Respect for the safety and well-being of the other trades and personnel in the area must be observed, especially during hoisting operations.
1 lOa F&Q6.0.CR3.SGR.doc ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 37 of 130 PCHG-DJESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 6.0 TENDON DETENSIONINGIREMOVAL FOR POSSIBLE REUSE September 16, 2009 Page 3 of 8 Revision 0 CAUTION DO NOT STAND UNDER LOADS WHILE STATIONARY OR DURING HOISTING.DO NOT PERMIT OTHERS TO STAND UNDER LOADS.DO NOT THROW OR DROP OBJECTS.6.2 The wire used for the tendons has a minimum breaking strength of 240,000 pounds per square inch. This means that each 7mm diameter wire is capable of withstanding a minimum breaking load of 14,317 pounds. Multiply this by 163 wires in a tendon and you are dealing with forces in excess of two million pounds per tendon.CAUTION (When using rams or on a tendon not being removed.)NEVER CONNECT A WELDING GROUND, PERFORM WELDING ON, OR STRIKE AN ARC NEAR A STRESSED TENDON.NEVER APPLY AN OPEN FLAME TO THE BUTTONHEADS, THE WIRES OR ANCHORAGES OF A STRESSED TENDON.NEVER STRIKE THE BUTTONHEADS, THE WIRES OR THE ANCHORAGES OF A STRESSED TENDON WITH A HAMMER OR ANY OTHER METAL OBJECT.6.3 Prior to applying ANY FORCE to the tendon, the stressing coupler must be fully engaged with the anchorage to be de-tensioned.
Also check that the locking bolts on stressing rod (top part of two piece stressing rod) and coupler are present and fastened.CAUTION BE SURE THE STRESSING ROD IS FULLY ENGAGED WITH THE ANCHORAGE BEFORE APPLYING ANY LOAD, REGARDLESS OF HOW SMALL THAT LOAD MIGHT BE.11 Oa F&Q6.O.CR3.SGR.doc ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 38 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 6.0 TENDON DETENSIONINGIREMOVAL FOR POSSIBLE REUSE September 16, 2009 Page 4 of 8 Revision 0 6.4 During de-tensioning operations the following cautions shall be observed.CAUTION NEVER EXCEED THE OVERSTRESS FORCE OR PRESSURE -80% (1867 kips for a 163 wire tendon) or 11.46 kips FOR THE AMOUNT OF EFFECTIVE WIRES IN A TENDON.DO NOT STAND BEHIND THE JACK WHEN IT IS UNDER LOAD.KEEP HANDS AND FINGERS OUT OF ANY PINCH AREAS.BE ALERT DURING SHIM PLACEMENT AND REMOVAL.7.0 QUALITY CONTROL DOCUMENTATION AND HOLD POINTS 7.1 HOLD POINT -Prior to de-tensioning a tendon the tendon owner inspector is to be notified to perform visual inspections and document lAW PSC Procedure F&Q 15.1 and 15.2.8.0 PREREQUISITES
8.1 Prior
to removing tendon grease will be drained.8.2 Perform visual inspections lAW PSC Procedure F&Q 15.1 and F&Q 15.2.8.3 Record on Data Sheet F&Q 6.0 or Owner Work Package documentation the information required for tendon number, tendon end and date of de-tensioning.
9.0 PROCEDURE
9.1 If not previously done, remove the grease cap or end protection from the end being de-tensioned.
9.2 ANCHORAGE
CLEANUP 9.2.1 Grease shall be removed from the tendon end using clean non-metallic devices.Bristle brushes and rags with suitable quantities of Viscosity Oil, Viscor Industrial No. 16A solvent or Owner approved solvent to dilute and wash away the grease may also be required.
This cleanup must be sufficient to permit engagement of the anchorage threads with the stressing rod threads.11 Oa F&06.0.CR3.SGR.doc ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 39 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 Ir PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 6.0 TENDON DETENSIONINGIREMOVAL FOR POSSIBLE REUSE September 16, 2009 Page 5 of 8 Revision 0 I 9.3 TENDON DE-TENSIONING 9.3.1 HOLD POINT -Prior to de-tensioning a tendon a full visual inspection shall be performed on each tendon end and documented per PSC Procedure F&Q 15.1 and F&Q 15.2 or on Owner Work Package documentation.
9.3.1.1 De-tensioning of vertical tendons shall be performed on the top end as specified in Owner Work Package.9.3.1.2 Align the ram stressing rod with the anchorage and the jack chair with the bearing plate. Ensure that the ram is in alignment within 1/8 inch. Record on Data Sheet F&Q 6.0 or Owner Work Package documentation the ram and gauge identification.
9.3.1.2.1 The stressing rod and coupler is now screwed onto the anchorage. (Rotate rod counter clockwise several revolutions to align threads, then clockwise to attach).CAUTION VERIFY RAM WILL NOT LOAD SUPPORT RIGGING WHEN PRESSURIZING RAM.9'.3.1.3 Before de-tensioning be sure opposite end of tendon is clear and not being worked on. Pressurize the ram until the shims under the anchorage become loose and can be removed.9.3.1.3.1 NOTE: A tendon shall never be stressed beyond 80% of the Minimum Guaranteed Ultimate Tensile Strength (GUTS) of the effective wires in that tendon. A 163 wire tendon shall not exceed a force of 1867 kips. For a tendon with missing wires, the maximum tensile force shall be reduced accordingly by 11.46 kips/wire.
9.3.1.4 Remove all shims from between the anchorage and bearing plate. Reduce the ram pressure until the load is reduced to zero.9.3.1.5 Set the anchorhead down on one 3" pair of shims.9.3.1.6 The ram shall be uncoupled from the anchorage.
9.4 TENDON
END CUTTING 9.4.1 On the top end bolt the pulling plate to the anchor head.9.4.2 If lower anchorage is not loose couple pulling plate to coiler or crane, lift anchor head to allow removal of shims then lower tendon into void.11 Oa F&Q6.0.CR3.SGR.doc ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 40 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 6.0 TENDON DETENSIONINGIREMOVAL FOR POSSIBLE REUSE September 16, 2009 Page 6 of 8 Revision 0 9.4.3 With all shims removed in the gallery and adequate tendon length exposed push gallery anchor head up to bearing plate exposing approximately 2 feet of wire.9.4.4 Cut off buttonheads with hand grinder right behind the buttonheads ensuring a clean square cut.9.4.5 Remove anchor head.9.5 TENDON LENGTH VERIFICATION 9.5.1 Lift tendon with coiler or crane and place on 3" pair of shims.9.5.2 Remove pulling plate.9,5.3 Locate any outside wire and pry up to allow attachment of tendon wire puller (figure 1.0).9,5.4 Pull the wire completely through the tendon duct.9Z5.4.1 After pulling, the entire length of the tendon wire shall be visually inspected for pitting, corrosion, or other signs of deterioration and evaluated in accordance with Specification EW101 in PSC Procedure F&Q 13.0. Solvent cleaning may be performed to facilitate cleaning before inspection.
9.5.4.1.1 Document the Category of Corrosion rating on Data Sheet 6.1, for every 10 feet of length.9.5.4.1.2 If the Category of Corrosion has progressed beyond Condition "C" as defined in Specification EW101, Progress Energy Engineering shall be notified for disposition.
9.5.4.2 After the tendon wire has been pulled through, it shall be measured for length.9.5.4.2.1 Document the total length of wire on Data Sheet 6.1.9.5.4.3 After the tendon wire has been pulled, it may be cleaned of excess grease and coiled into coil form of approximately five-foot diameter.
Secure the coil from unwinding.
9.6 TENDON
REMOVAL 9.6.1 Re-attach pulling plate on anchor head.9.6.2 For vertical tendon attach 5/16 inch cable only to cut end to facilitate cleaning at a latter date. Alternatively, a cable can be dropped down the void for cleaning after tendon removal at Owner Field Construction Personnel discretion.
11Oa F&Q6.0.CR3.SGR.doc ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 41 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 6.0 TENDON DETENSIONINGIREMOVAL FOR POSSIBLE REUSE September 16, 2009 Page 7 of 8 Revision 0 9.6.3 Expand the coiler hub and attach the cable from the field coiler to the tendon end anchor head plate, bolt and apply a light tension on the cable with the coiler.9.6.4 Coil the tendon placing a 3/4" band approximately every 5' to ensure wires remain in a manageable bundle.9.6.5 Coil the tendon on the coiler, using extra care as the anchor head enters the coiler. Place two bands on the tendon anchor head after the first revolution.
After, band the tendon coils in the coiler for every new loop of the tendon as it is coiled (stagger the placement of the banding).
The closer to the end of the tendon the more banding of the coils are needed in the coiler.9,6.6 Carefully coil the tendon to ensure no crimped or bent wires.9,6.7 Field Engineer to inspect tendon as it is removed for corrosion, water or other deleterious conditions.
9.6.8 Reverse
the operation of the coiler and retract the hub to loosen the pulling cable and detach the pulling cable from the tendon end.9.6.9 Hoist the tendon out of the uncoiler, wrap in plastic and lower it to the ground for storage.9.6.10 If the tendon voids are to be cleaned at this time refer to PSC Procedure F&Q 11.0, if not protect the void end.9.6.11 Since these tendon ends will have further work performed on them at a later date, the following methods of tendon end protection shall be used. The tendon end may be covered with a plastic bag or sheeting and taped to provide protection from the elements, or the grease cap may be replaced using the old gaskets.9.6.12 Shims removed from a tendon shall be kept in matched pairs and protected from the elements by covering with plastic or placing in a temporary storage container until sent to storage.1,0.0 DOCUMENTATION 10.1 The items requiring documentation in this procedure shall be documented by the Superintendent or Field Engineer on Data Sheet F&Q 6.0 and F&Q 6.1 attached to this procedure or Work Package documentation.
11.0 QUALITY CONTROL 11.1 None.12.0 NOTIFICATION 12.1 Owner Site Shift Superintendent shall be notified of any problems encountered.
11 Oa F&Q6.0.CR3.SGR.doc ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 42 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 13.0 A'I-FACHMENTS 13.1 Data Sheet F&Q 6.0.13.2 Data Sheet F&Q 6.0A.13.3 Figure 1.0 -Tendon Wire Puller PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 6.0 TENDON DETENSIONINGIREMOVAL FOR POSSIBLE REUSE September 16, 2009 Page 8 of 8 Revision 0 13.0 ATTACHMENTS 13.1 Data Sheet F&Q 6.0.13.2 Data Sheet F&Q 6.OA.13.3 Figure 1.0 -Tendon Wire Puller 11 Oa F&Q6.0.CR3.SGR.doc Page 43 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 6.0 TENDON DETENSIONING/REMOVAL FOR POSSIBLE REUSE DATA SHEET F&Q 6.0 September 16, 2009 Page 1 of 1 Revision 0 RAM TENDON DETENSIONING DOCUMENTATION PROJECT: CRYSTAL RIVER UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT TENDON NO.: TENDON END DATE OF DETENSIONING:
ANCHORAGE ID/HEAT CODE: NUMBER OF EFFECTIVE BUTTONHEADS:
RAM ID GAUGE ID De-tensioning Sequence Verification:
SUPERINTENDENT (OR) CIVIL FIELD ENGINEER: 11Oa F&Q6.0.CR3.SGR.doc Page 44 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 II.PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 6.0 TENDON DETENSIONING/REMOVAL FOR POSSIBLE REUSE DATA SHEET F&Q 6.OA September 16, 2009 Page 1 of 1 Revision 0 11 Project: CRYSTAL RIVER UNIT 3 -SGR Tendon No.: Tendon End: Removal Date: Inspection Date: WIRE REMOVAL INSPECTION CORROSION INSPECTION Q, LENGTH INTERVALS (8.5.4.1)
Document the Corrosion Category for each 10' of wire in the increments below. Use Categories described in EW101.(8.5.4.2)
For Corrosion Levels D and E notification required.
Req'd: E] NO E] YES (8.5.4.3.1)
Document the total length of the wire on the diagram below. Completed:
[ NO [I YES-Buttonhead End 0' 10' 20' 30'30' 40' 50' 60'60' 70' 80' 90'90' 100' 110' 120'120' 130' 140' 150'150' 160' 170' 180'180' 190' 200' 210'Cut End HA COMMENTS CIVIL FIELD ENGINEER: DATE: 11 Oa F&Q6.0.CR3.SGR.doc Page 45 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-1DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 6.0 TENDON DETENSIONING/REMOVAL FOR POSSIBLE REUSE Figure 1.0 September 16, 2009 Page 1 of 1 Revision 0 Fiaure 1.0 -Tendon Wire Puller Figure 1.0 is a represented sample of a wire puller and is not a quality controlled device.The actual wire puller may vary somewhat from this configuration.
11 a F&Q6.0.CR3.SGR.doc Page 46 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 8.0 PLASMA CUTTING TENDON DETENSIONING August 29. 2008 Page I of 5 Revision' P.Precision Surveillance Corporation PROGRESS ENERGY FLORIDA, INC.CRYSTAL RIVER NUCLEAR.UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT PRECISION SURVEILLANCE CORPORATION FIELD AND QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE PLASMA. CUTTING TENDON DETENSIONING LEVEL i1 Q. C.08/29/08 Date-Prepared by Approved by Approved by Title PROJECT MANAGER, P. E 0&829/08 Date Titlez PRESIDENT 08/29/08 Date Title I ATTACHMENT Z23R5 11 F8~~ ~ATTACHMENT Z23R5 410C PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 8.0 PLASMA CUTTING TENDON DETENSIONING August 29, 2008 Page 2 of 5 Revision 0 1.0 PURPOSE 1.1 This procedure will establish the requirements for plasma cutting de-tensioning of tendons at Crystal River Unit 3 for the vertical and horizontal tendon work during the Steam Generator Replacement Project.2.0 SCOPE 2.1 The tendons to be de-tensioned by plasma cutting shall be as specified in PSC Procedure F&Q 2.0 or Owner Work Package.2.2 The de-tensioning sequence shall be as specified in Owner Work Package.3.0 RESPONSIBILITY
3.1 Owner
Field Construction Personnel shall be responsible for the physical activities and recording of documentation associated with this procedure.
4.0 QUALIFICATIONS
4.1 Owner
Field Construction Personnel shall be fit by skill, training and/or experience to perform these duties.5.0 EQUIPMENT 5.1 Plasma cutting equipment.
5.2 Shim, anchor head and button head catcher.5.3 Miscellaneous Tools, wrenches, ratchets, sockets, shackles, come-alongs, etc.5.4 Plastic bags, plastic sheeting (Visqueen), rags, buckets or drums for waste grease.6.0 PRECAUTIONS 6.1 As in other heavy construction, care should be exercised while working from scaffolds, platforms, ladders, high or restricted access locations.
Respect for the safety and well-being of the other trades and personnel in the area must be observed, especially during hoisting operations.
6.2 During
plasma cutting operations, care should be taken to wear prescribed protective equipment such as proper eye protection, gloves, and to avoid burns from the plasma cutting and electrical shock.6.3 Grease is flammable, during plasma cutting operations all Fire Watch restrictions and precautions are to be followed.111 F&Q8.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 48 of 130 PCHG-DESG-ENGINEERING CHANGE'0000063016R5
-PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 8.0 PLASMA CUTTING TENDON DETENSIONING August 29, 2008 Page 3 of 5 Revision 0 6.4 During plasma cutting operations, at the end of the tendon being cut a shim and button head catcher is to be in place as directed by the Owner Site Shift Superintendent to catch any projectile button heads.6.5 On the opposite end of a tendon end that is being plasma cut care should be taken when the grease cap is removed as it could contain loose shims which could fall when the cap is removed.CAUTION DO NOT STAND UNDER LOADS WHILE STATIONARY OR DURING HOISTING.DO NOT PERMIT OTHERS TO STAND UNDER LOADS.DO NOT THROW OR DROP OBJECTS.DURING PLASMA CUTTING WEAR PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT, AVOID BURNS AND ELECTRICAL SHOCK.6.6 The wire used for the tendons has a minimum breaking strength of 240,000 pounds per square inch. This means that each 7mm diameter wire is capable of withstanding a minimum breaking load of 14,317 pounds. Multiply this by 163 wires in a tendon and you are dealing with forces in excess of two million pounds per tendon.CAUTION (When plasma cutting on a tendon to be removed and scrapped)NEVER CONNECT A WELDING GROUND, PERFORM WELDING ON, OR STRIKE AN ARC NEAR A STRESSED TENDON WHICH IS NOT BEING SCRAPPED.NEVER APPLY AN OPEN FLAME TO THE BUTTONHEADS, THE WIRES OR ANCHORAGES OF A STRESSED TENDON EXCEPT FOR THE END OF THE TENDONS THAT ARE TO BE PLASMA CUT AND SCRAPPED.NEVER STRIKE THE BUTTONHEADS, THE WIRES OR THE ANCHORAGES OF A STRESSED TENDON WITH A HAMMER OR ANY OTHER METAL OBJECT.6.7 The above actions could cause a button head or wire to fail. During tendon tensile testing, broken wires or button heads have been observed to penetrate hard lumber in excess of 4 inches in thickness, about the equivalent of a .32 caliber bullet.7.0 QUALITY CONTROL DOCUMENTATION AND HOLD POINTS 7.1 There are no Quality Control Documentation (QCD) points or HOLD POINTS in this procedure.
111 F&Q8.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 49 of 130 PCHG.DESG-....
.......GENGINEERING CHANGE " 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 8.0 PLASMA CUTTING TENDON DETENSIONING August 29, 2008 Page 4 of 5 Revision 0 8.0 PREREQUISITES
8.1 Prior
to removing a grease cap/tendon end protection assure that the proper tendon is being worked on.8.2 Prior to de-tensioning vertical tendons that are to be removed from the void, grease is to have been drained and or blown from the tendon.8.3 On the opposite end of the tendon to be plasma cut the grease cap is to be removed.The grease cleaned out of the cap and from around the anchorage and shims. A keeper plate is installed to the anchor head to hold the button heads in place during plasma cutting. The grease cap is replaced and tightened down. Care should be taken when this grease cap is removed after plasma cutting as it could contain loose shims which could fall when the cap is removed.9.0 PROCEDURE 9.1 If not previously done, remove the grease cap or end protection from the end being de-tensioned.
9.2 ANCHORAGE
CLEANUP 9.2.1 Grease shall be removed from the tendon end. Bristle brushes and rags with suitable quantities of Viscosity Oil, Viscor Industrial No. 16A solvent or Owner approved equivalent to dilute and wash away the grease may also be required.This cleanup must be sufficient to permit plasma cutting of button heads as verified by Superintendent.
9.3 TENDON
DE-TENSIONING
9.3.1 During
plasma cutting the grease cap at the other end not being cut is to remain on. The button heads of the tendon are to be plasma cut one at a time, if possible, until all the button heads are cut.9.4 TENDON SHIM PROTECTION
9.4.1 Shims
removed from a tendon shall be kept in matched pairs and protected from the elements by covering with plastic or placing in a temporary storage container until sent to storage.10.0 DOCUMENTATION 10.1 The items requiring documentation in this procedure shall be documented by the assigned field construction person of the working crew on Data Sheet F&Q 8.0 attached to this procedure or as required by Owner Work Package.111 F&Q8.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 50 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 8.0 PLASMA CUTTING TENDON DETENSIONING August 29, 2008 Page 5 of 5 Revision 0 11.0 11.1 12.0 12.1 13.0 13.1 QUALITY CONTROL There is no quality control inspection or documentation required by this procedure.
NOTIFICATION Owner Shift Superintendent shall be notified if there are any problems encountered with the plasma cutting operations.
ATTACHMENTS Data Sheet F&Q 8.0.ATTACHMENT Z23R5 111 F&Q8.0.CR3.SGR Page 51 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 8.0 PLASMA CUTTING TENDON DETENSIONING DATA SHEET F&Q 8.0 August 29, 2008 Page 1 of 1 Revision 0 Revision 1. 6/24/2009 PLASMA CUTTING TENDON DETENSIONING DOCUMENTATION PROJECT: CRYSTAL RIVER UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT TENDON NO.: DATE OF DETENSIONING:
De-tensioning Sequence Verification:
SUPERINTENDENT (OR) CIVIL FIELD ENGINEER: 111 F&Q8.0.CR3.SGR Page 52 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDUREAF&s 8.1 RAM TENDON DETENSIONING August 29,'2008 i lPage I of 6* ,Precision Survilac ,Coporation
- L ,..PROGRESS ENERGY FLORIDA, INC.CRYSTAL RIVER NUCLEAR UNIT 3ýSTEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT PRECISION SURVEILLANCE CORPORATION FIELD AND QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE RAM TENDON DETENSIONING Prepared by Apprced by--Appwve~dby LEVEL It Q.C.Title&PROJECT MANAGER, P.E.Title PRESIDENT Title 08&29/08 Date.08129108 Date;08129/08 Date ATTACHMENT Z23R5 12 FQN&%J c PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 8.1 RAM TENDON DETENSIONING August 29, 2008 Page 2 of 6 Revision 0 1.0 PURPOSE 1.1 This procedure will establish the requirements for hydraulic ram de-tensioning of tendons and de-tensioning documentation at Crystal River Unit 3 for tendon work during the Steam Generator Replacement Project.2.0 SCOPE 2.1 The tendons to be de-tensioned by hydraulic ram shall be as specified in Owner Work Package. Tendons can be de-tensioned from both ends or can be de-tensioned from one end as specified in the Owner Work Package.2.2 Prior to de-tensioning a tendon the anchor head, shims, bearing plate and button heads are to be visually inspected and documented per PSC Procedure F&Q 15.1 or on Owner Work Package documentation.
2.3 The de-tensioning sequence shall be as specified on the Owner Work Package.3.0 RESPONSIBILITY
3.1 Owner
Field Construction Personnel shall be responsible for the physical activities and recording of documentation associated with this procedure.
4.0 QUALIFICATIONS
4.1 Owner
Construction Personnel shall be fit by skill, training and experience to perform these duties and PSC tendon training program.5.0 EQUIPMENT 5.1 Hydraulic ram (calibrated) and pump with appropriate hoses and fittings.5.2 Hydraulic pressure gauge (calibrated).
5.3 Miscellaneous
Tools, wrenches, ratchets, sockets, shackles, come-alongs, etc.5.4 Plastic bags, plastic sheeting (Visqueen), rags, buckets or drums for waste grease.6.0 PRECAUTIONS 6.1 As in other heavy construction, care should be exercised while working from scaffolds, platforms, ladders, high or restricted access locations.
Respect for the safety and well-being of the other trades and personnel in the area must be observed, especially during hoisting operations.
112 F&Q8.1.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 54 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 8.1 RAM TENDON DETENSIONING August 29, 2008 Page 3 of 6 Revision 0 CAUTION DO NOT STAND UNDER LOADS WHILE STATIONARY OR DURING HOISTING.DO NOT PERMIT OTHERS TO STAND UNDER LOADS.DO NOT THROW OR DROP OBJECTS.6.2 The wire used for the tendons has a minimum breaking strength of 240,000 pounds per square inch. This means that each 7mm diameter wire is capable of withstanding a minimum breaking load of 14,317 pounds. Multiply this by 163 wires in a tendon and you are dealing with forces in excess of two million pounds per tendon.CAUTION (When using rams or on a tendon not being removed.)NEVER CONNECT A WELDING GROUND, PERFORM WELDING ON, OR STRIKE AN ARC NEAR A STRESSED TENDON.NEVER APPLY AN OPEN FLAME TO THE BUTTONHEADS, THE WIRES OR ANCHORAGES OF A STRESSED TENDON.NEVER STRIKE THE BUTTONHEADS, THE WIRES OR THE ANCHORAGES OF A STRESSED TENDON WITH A HAMMER OR ANY OTHER METAL OBJECT.6.3 Prior to applying ANY FORCE to the tendon, the stressing coupler must be fully engaged with the anchorage to be de-tensioned.
Also check that the locking bolts on stressing rod (top part of two piece stressing rod) and coupler are present and fastened.CAUTION BE SURE THE STRESSING ROD IS FULLY ENGAGED WITH THE ANCHORAGE BEFORE APPLYING ANY LOAD, REGARDLESS OF HOW SMALL THAT LOAD MIGHT BE.112 F&Q8.1.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 55 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5
6.4 During
de-tensioning operations the following cautions shall be observed.Wi CAUTION NEVER EXCEED THE OVERSTRESS FORCE OR PRESSURE -80% (1867 kips for a 163 wire tendon) or 11.46 kips FOR THE AMOUNT OF EFFECTIVE WIRES IN A TENDON.DO NOT STAND BEHIND THE JACK WHEN IT IS UNDER LOAD.KEEP HANDS AND FINGERS OUT OF ANY PINCH AREAS.BE ALERT DURING SHIM PLACEMENT AND REMOVAL.7.0 QUALITY CONTROL DOCUMENTATION AND HOLD POINTS 7.1 HOLD POINT -Prior to de-tensioning a tendon Owner Inspector to be notified to perform a visual inspection and documentation of the anchor head, shims, bearing plate and button heads per PSC Procedure F&Q 15.1.8.0 PREREQUISITES
8.1 Prior
to removing a grease cap/tendon end protection or placing the jack on a tendon assure that proper tendon is being worked on. Record on Data Sheet F&Q 8.1 or Owner Work Package documentation the information required for tendon number, tendon end and date of de-tensioning.
8.2 The tendon anchorage end should be visually inspected per PSC Procedure F&Q 15.1 prior to de-tensioning.
9.0 PROCEDURE
9.1 If not previously done, remove the grease cap or end protection from the end being de-tensioned.
9.2 ANCHORAGE
CLEANUP 9.2.1 Grease shall be removed from the tendon end using clean non-metallic devices.Bristle brushes and rags with suitable quantities of Viscosity Oil, Viscor Industrial No. 16A solvent or Owner approved solvent to dilute and wash away the grease may also be required.
This cleanup must be sufficient to permit engagement of the anchorage threads with the stressing rod threads. Record on Data Sheet F&Q 8.1 the anchorage heat codes and amount of effective wires/button heads on tendon end.112 F&Q8.1.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 56 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 8.1 RAM TENDON DETENSIONING August 29, 2008 Page 5 of 6 Revision 0 9.3 TENDON DE-TENSIONING 9.3.1 HOLD POINT -Prior to de-tensioning a tendon Owner Inspector to be notified to perform a visual inspection and documentation of the anchor head, and for vertical tendons the bottom end plates, shims, bearing plate and button heads per PSC Procedure F&Q 15.1.9.3.1.1 De-tensioning of tendons can be performed on both ends of the tendon in a simultaneous and controlled manner or on one tendon end for a vertical tendon as specified in Owner Work Package.9.3.1.2 Align the ram stressing rod with the anchorage and the jack chair with the bearing plate. Ensure that the ram is in alignment within 1/8 inch. Record on Data Sheet F&Q 8.1 or Owner Work Package documentation the ram and gauge identification.
9.3.1.2.1 The stressing rod and coupler is now screwed onto the anchorage. (Rotate rod counter clockwise several revolutions to align threads, then clockwise to attach).CAUTION VERIFY RAM WILL NOT LOAD SUPPORT RIGGING WHEN PRESSURIZING RAM.9.3.1.3 Before de-tensioning be sure opposite end of tendon is not being worked on. If opposite end of tendon is being worked on, coordinate with the opposite crew and continue.
Pressurize the ram until the shims under the anchorage become loose and can be removed.9.3.1.3.1 NOTE: A tendon shall never be stressed beyond 80% of the Minimum Guaranteed Ultimate Tensile Strength (GUTS) of the effective wires in that tendon. A 163 wire tendon shall not exceed a force of 1867 kips. For a tendon with missing wires, the maximum tensile force shall be reduced accordingly by 11.46 kips/wire.
9.3.1.4 Remove all shims from between the anchorage and bearing plate. Reduce the ram pressure until the load is reduced to zero. The ram shall be uncoupled from the anchorage.
9.4 TENDON
END PROTECTION
9.4.1 Since
these tendon ends will have further work performed on them at a later date, the following methods- of tendon end protection shall be used. The tendon end may be covered with a plastic bag or sheeting and taped to provide protection from the elements, or the grease cap may be replaced using the old gaskets.112 F&Q8.1 .CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 57 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 8.1 RAM TENDON DETENSIONING August 29, 2008 Page 6 of 6 Revision 0 9i4.2 Shims removed from a tendon shall be kept in matched pairs and protected from the elements by covering with plastic or placing in a temporary storage container until sent to storage.10.0 DOCUMENTATION 10.1 The items requiring documentation in this procedure shall be documented by the assigned field construction person of the working crew on Data Sheet F&Q 8.1 attached to this procedure or Work Package documentation.
11.0 QUALITY CONTROL 11.1 There is no quality control inspection or documentation required by this procedure.
12.0 NOTIFICATION 12.1 Owner Site Shift Superintendent shall be notified of any problems encountered.
13.0 ATTACHMENTS 13.1 Data Sheet F&Q 8.1.112 F&Q8.1.CR3.SGR Page 58 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 8.1 RAM TENDON DETENSIONING DATA SHEET F&Q 8.1 August 29, 2008 Page 1 of 1 Revision 0 Revision 1. 6/24/2009 RAM TENDON DETENSIONING DOCUMENTATION PROJECT: CRYSTAL RIVER UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT TENDON NO.: TENDON END AtI DATE OF DETENSIONING:
ANCHORAGE ID/HEAT CODE: NUMBER OF EFFECTIVE BUTTONHEADS:
RAM ID GAUGE ID De-tensioning Sequence Verification:
/ SUPERINTENDENT (OR) CIVIL FIELD ENGINEER: 112 F&Q8.1.CR3.SGR Page 59 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 Precision Surveillance Corporation PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 10.0 TENDON REMOVAL AUgust 29%,2008 Page 1 of 4 Revision P.II 11 PROGRESS ENERGY: FLORIDA, INC.CRYSTAL RIVER NUCLEAR UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT PRECISION SURVEILLANCE CORPORATION FIELD AND QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE TENDON REMOVAL ApprOved by Z LEVEL II Q. C.08129/08 Date Title PROJECT MANAGER, P. E 08/29/08 Date: Title PRESIDENT 08/29/08 Date-Title I ATTACHMENT Z23R5 3T&%A(W.&fF
- jVC PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 10.0 TENDON REMOVAL August 29, 2008 Page 2 of 4 Revision 0 1.0 PURPOSE 1.1 This procedure will establish the requirements for the removal of tendons from tendon voids at Crystal River Unit 3 for the vertical and horizontal tendon work during the Steam Generator Replacement Project.2.0 SCOPE 2.1 The tendons to be removed from the tendon voids shall be as specified in the Owner Work Package. Vertical Tendons shall be removed from the top, horizontal tendons shall be removed from the buttress as per the Owner Work Package.3.0 RESPONSIBILITY
3.1 Owner
Field Construction Personnel shall be responsible for the physical activities associated with this procedure.
4.0 QUALIFICATIONS
4.1 Owner
Field Construction Personnel shall be fit by skill, training and/or experience to perform these duties.5.0 EQUIPMENT 5.1 Tendon Field Coiler.5.2 Cleaning waffle, splice chucks and cables.5.3 Miscellaneous Tools, wrenches, ratchets, sockets, shackles, come-alongs, banders and banding materials, etc.5.4 Plastic bags, plastic sheeting (Visqueen), rags, buckets or drums for waste grease.6.0 PRECAUTIONS 6.1 As in other heavy construction, care should be exercised while working from scaffolds, platforms, ladders, high or restricted access locations.
Respect for the safety and well-being of the other trades and personnel in the area must be observed, especially during hoisting operations.
The area in the tendon gallery where a tendon is being removed from the void is to be roped off and personnel are to be kept away from that area during tendon removal.CAUTION: DO NOT STAND UNDER LOADS WHILE STATIONARY OR DURING HOISTING.DO NOT PERMIT OTHERS TO STAND UNDER LOADS.DO NOT THROW OR DROP OBJECTS.STAY AWAY FROM THE AREA IN THE TENDON GALLERY WHILE A TENDON IS BEING REMOVED 113 F&Q10.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 61 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 6.2 Use care when coiling the tendon, it tends to be quite springy and can cause injury if not properly restrained.
6.3 Waste
grease from the voids could be a slipping safety hazard, during all operations it should be cleaned up and placed in waste drums.7.0 QUALITY CONTROL DOCUMENTATION AND HOLD POINTS 7.1 There are no Quality Control Documentation (QCD) points or HOLD POINTS in this procedure.
8.0 PREREQUISITES
8.1 Prior
to implementing this procedure the field anchor head cut off operations on the tendon must have been performed as per PSC Procedure F&Q 8.0. If shims have not been removed from under a anchor head they are to be removed, kept in matched pairs and protected from the elements by covering with plastic or placing in a temporary storage container until sent to storage.9.0 PROCEDURE 9.1 TENDON REMOVAL 9.1.1 Remove tendon end protection from each end of the tendon.9.1.2 On the cut end of the horizontal tendon attach a minimum 5/16 inch cable with a void cleaning waffle to one of the cut wires using a wire/cable chuck. This cable will be pulled into the tendon void as the tendon is removed and may be left in the void for later use or removed. The cleaning waffle will remove all excess grease from the void.9.1.3 The trumplet will have excess grease removed after tendon removal with manual degreasing devices.9.1.4 For vertical tendon attach 5/16 inch cable only to cut end to facilitate cleaning at a latter date. If used, secure cable to top bearing plate. Alternatively, a cable can be dropped down the void for cleaning after tendon removal at Owner Field Construction Personnel discretion.
9.1.5 Expand
the coiler hub and attach the cable from the field coiler to the tendon end anchor head plate, bolt and apply a light tension on the cable with the coiler.9.1.6 Coil the tendon on the coiler, using extra care as the anchor head enters the coiler. Place two bands on the tendon anchor head after the first revolution.
After, band the tendon coils in the coiler for every new loop of the tendon as it is coiled (stagger the placement of the banding).
The closer to the end of the tendon the more banding of the coils are needed in the coiler.113 F&Q10.O0R3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 62 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 10.0 TENDON REMOVAL August 29, 2008 Page 4 of 4 Revision 0 9.1.7 Detach the waffle cleaner or 5/16 inch cable, if present, from the wire at the cut end of the tendon and secure the cable.9.1.8 Reverse the operation of the coiler and retract the hub to loosen the pulling cable and detach the pulling cable from the tendon end.9.1.9 Hoist the tendon out of the uncoiler, wrap in plastic and lower it to the ground for storage and subsequent scraping.9.1.10 If the tendon voids are to be cleaned at this time refer to PSC Procedure F&Q 11.0, if not protect the void end as per Section 9.2 of this Procedure.
9.2 VOID END PROTECTION
9.2.1 After
the tendon is removed from the void, the tendon void end may be covered with plywood or by attaching a temporary bearing plate cover to the bearing plate, or the grease cap may be replaced using the old gaskets to provide the voids protection from the elements.10.0 DOCUMENTATION 10.1 There is no documentation required by this procedure.
11.0 QUALITY CONTROL 11.1 There is no quality control inspection or documentation required by this procedure.
12.0 NOTIFICATION 12.1 Owner Site Shift Superintendent or Field Engineer shall be notified if any areas of rust, water coating, damage or other types of deterioration are found on tendon wires.13.0 ATTACHMENTS 13.1 None.113 F&Q10.0.CR3.SGR Page 63 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&QV 11.0 TENDON VOID CLEANING August 29,2008 Page 1 of 4 Revision P-1 Precision Surveillance COrporation
!PROGRESS ENERGY FLORIDA, INC.CRYSTAL RIVER NUCLEAR UNIT 3 STEAMGENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT PRECISION SURVEILLANCE ,CORPORATION FIELD! AND QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE TENDON VOID CLEANING Prepared by-AI~pivedl by -Approved Ly LEVEL II IQ C.Title 08/29/08 Date PROJECT MANAGER, P.E.0/29/8e Date Title PRESIDENT 08129/08 Date Title V ATTACHMENT Z23R5 14 F&Cp6§EpB4-%$q3g-ý
1.0 PURPOS
ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5
1.0 PURPOSE
1.1 This procedure will establish the requirements for the cleaning of tendon voids at Crystal River Unit 3 for the vertical and horizontal tendon work during the Steam Generator Replacement Project.2.0 SCOPE 2.1 The tendon voids to be cleaned of excess grease are for those tendons that have been removed and are to be replaced as specified in the Owner Work Package.3.0 RESPONSIBILITY
3.1 Owner
Field Construction Personnel shall be responsible for the physical activities associated with this procedure.
4.0 QUALIFICATIONS
4.1 Owner
Field Construction Personnel shall be fit by skill, training and/or experience to perform these duties.5.0 EQUIPMENT 5.1 Lengths of 5/16" minimum cable.5.2 Cleaning Waffles: A void cleaning device with attachment eyes on each end to accommodate the 5/16" minimum cable.5.3 Walkie-Talkies:
Or field phones for communications from one end of the void to the other.5.4 Plastic bags, plastic sheeting (Visqueen), rags, buckets or drums for waste grease.6.0 PRECAUTIONS 6.1 As in other heavy construction, care should be exercised while working from scaffolds, platforms, ladders, high or restricted access locations.
Respect for the safety and well-being of the other trades and personnel in the area must be observed, especially during hoisting operations.
CAUTION DO NOT STAND UNDER LOADS WHILE STATIONARY OR DURING HOISTING.DO NOT PERMIT OTHERS TO STAND UNDER LOADS.DO NOT THROW OR DROP OBJECTS.114 F&Q11.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 65 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5
6.2 Waste
grease from the voids could be a slipping safety hazard, during all operations
6.2 Waste
grease from the voids could be a slipping safety hazard, during all operations it should be cleaned up and placed in waste drums.7.0 QUALITY CONTROL DOCUMENTATION AND HOLD POINTS 7.1 There are no Quality Control Documentation (QCD) points or HOLD POINTS in this procedure.
8.0 PREREQUISITES
8.1 Prior
to implementing this procedure the Tendon must have been removed from the void as per PSC Procedure F&Q 10.0.8.2 Adequate communication must be maintained between both ends of the tendon void.9.0 PROCEDURE 9.1 Remove tendon end protection from each end of the tendon sheath.9.2 At the top end of the vertical tendon sheath or one end of the horizontal tendon sheath attach one end of a cleaning waffle to the 5/16" minimum cable that was left in the void from tendon removal. All connections between the cables and the cleaning waffle shall be made in a streamline fashion so that it does not pose a snagging hazard to the sheathing material.9.3 Pull the 5/16" minimum cable into the void until another 5/16" minimum cable can be attached to the other end of the cleaning waffle. At this point there should be two 5/16" minimum cables attached to the cleaning waffle.9.4 From the bottom end of the vertical tendon sheath or the other end of the horizontal tendon sheath pull the 5/16" minimum cable until the cleaning waffle is reached and disconnected and the remaining cable is removed from the sheath, clean up excess grease removed. Manually clean trumpet area of excess grease.9.5 CAUTION: If the cleaning waffle becomes blocked in the void during cleaning of tendon voids and are not able to be pulled back by hand with the 5/16" minimum cable the Owner Site Shift Superintendent shall be notified for determination of additional action.9.6 Once the cleaning is completed the tendon void ends will be protected by applying a temporary cover or grease cap attached to the bearing plate.114 F&Q11.O0CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 66 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 11.0 TENDON VOID CLEANING August 29, 2008 Page 4 of 4 Revision 0 10.0 DOCUMENTATION 10.1 There is no documentation required by this procedure.
11.0 QUALITY CONTROL 11.1 There is no quality control inspection or documentation required by this procedure.
12.0 NOTIFICATION 12.1 Owner Site Shift Superintendent shall be notified when there is any blockage in the tendon void preventing the cleaning waffle from being pulled through the sheathing.
13.0 ATTACHMENTS 13.1 None 114 F&Q11.0.CR3.SGR Page 67 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&13.0 W I TENDON INSTALLATION I August 29, 2008 Page 1 of 5 Revision 0 Precision Surveillance Corporation Revision 1,6/24/09 I., : PROGRESS ENERGY FLORIDA, INC.CRYSTAL RIVER NUCLEAR UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT PRECISION SURVEILLANCE CORPORATION FIELD AND QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE TENDON INSTALLATION Prepared by Approved by, " Ap- rv~u oy ..QA MANAGER Title 06/24/09 Date PROJECT MANAGER, PIE.Title 06/24109 Date PRESIDENT' 06/24109 Date Title 115 F&Q13.0CR3.SGT doc: Page 68 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 13.0 TENDON INSTALLATION August 29, 2008 Page 2 of 5 Revision 0 Revision 1, 6/24/09 1.0 PURPOSE 1.1 This procedure will establish the requirements for the installation of tendons and quality control inspections/data recording at Crystal River Unit 3 for the vertical and horizontal tendon work during the Steam Generator Replacement Project.2.0 SCOPE 2.1 The tendons to be installed are those removed from the tendon voids as specified in the Owner Work Package. Vertical Tendons shall be installed from the top, horizontal tendons shall be installed from the buttress as per the Owner Work Package 3.0 RESPONSIBILITY
3.1 Owner
Field Construction Personnel shall be responsible for the physical activities associated with this procedure.
3.2 Owner
Quality Control Personnel to perform all inspections and data recording.
4.0 QUALIFICATIONS
4.1 Owner
Field Construction Personnel shall be fit by skill, training and/or experience to perform these duties.4.2 Owner Quality Control Personnel shall be qualified to a minimum of Level II capability in accordance with the requirements of ANSI N45.2.6.5.0 EQUIPMENT 5.1 Tendon Field Coiler, tendon puller (tugger).5.2 Miscellaneous Tools, wrenches, ratchets, sockets, shackles, come-alongs, etc.5.3 Plastic bags, plastic sheeting (Visqueen), rags, buckets or drums for waste grease.5.4 Walkie-Talkies:
Or field phones for communications from one end of the void to the other.6.0 PRECAUTIONS 6.1 As in other heavy construction, care should be exercised while working from scaffolds, platforms, ladders, high or restricted access locations.
Respect for the safety and well-being of the other trades and personnel in the area must be observed, especially during hoisting operations.
ATTACHMENT Z23R5 115 F&Q13.0.CR3.SGT Page 69 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 13.0 TENDON INSTALLATION August 29, 2008 Page 3 of 5 Revision 0 Revision 1, 6/24/09 CAUTION DO NOT STAND UNDER LOADS WHILE STATIONARY OR DURING HOISTING.DO NOT PERMIT OTHERS TO STAND UNDER LOADS.DO NOT THROW OR DROP OBJECTS.6.2 Use care when uncoiling the tendon and installing it in the void. The tendon has considerable spring force and must be prevented from uncoiling violently.
6.3 If tendon becomes stuck do not exceed a pulling force of 35,000 lbs. on the tendon tugger.7.0 QUALITY CONTROL DOCUMENTATION AND HOLD POINTS 7.1 All Quality Control Documentation (QCD) points noted in this procedure are HOLD POINTS.8.0 PREREQUISITES
8.1 Tendon
void cleaning has been performed per PSC Procedure F&Q 11.0.8.2 Verify sheathing is installed and braced to accept loads imposed during installation.
8.3 Verify
correct tendon has been selected for installation into the selected tendon void.9.0 PROCEDURE 9.1 If the pulling device, which is used to control the twists in the tendon and to assist with tendon insertion was not applied during storage, it will now be attached using the following steps: 9.1.1 Approximately the first three to four feet of the free end of the tendon will be solvent cleaned with Viscosity Oil, Viscor Industrial No. 16A solvent or Owner approved equivalent to remove the grease compound.
This will allow placement of the grip assist material and placement of the Kellum's Grip.9.1.2 About three to four feet of the tendon will be wrapped with a grip assisting material such as strips of rubber and tape, that will enhance the gripping properties of the Kellum's Grip. A nose cone will be added over the taped end, with a Kellum's Grip placed over the nose cone and grip assist material, and secured with tape, wire, or bands. This encasement shall be installed in a streamline fashion with no sharp edges, abrupt changes in geometry, etc.9.1.3 Attach the pull back eyebolt to the shop anchor head if required.115 F&Q13.0.CR3.SGT ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 70 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 13.0 TENDON INSTALLATION August 29, 2008 Page 4 of 5 Revision 0 Revision 1, 6/24/09 9.2 Hoist the tendon with one sling and place it in the uncoiler.9.2.1 With the tendon in the uncoiler, align the free end of the tendon with the exit/feed opening of the uncoiler.
The uncoiler will provide the control for uncoiling and placing the tendon into the tendon void.9.2.2 The pull back eyebolt is secured to the spindle of the uncoiler.
This will keep the shop anchor head securely out of the way during uncoiling.
9.2.3 Expand
the coiler hub and install the tendon retention braces.9.2.4 At any time prior to pulling in the tendon a tendon puller, also called a "tugger" may be attached to the bearing plate at the pulling end of the tendon void or a puller cable may be positioned at this end. Tendon feed-in guide rolls may be attached to the bearing plate at the feed-in end of the tendon void.9.2.5 A length of 1/4 inch wire or trailer cable will be placed in the void to use as a"messenger" through the sheath and hook up the tendon puller cable. Pull back the cable with the wire or cable and once out at the feed-in end, hook up the cable to the tendon.9.2.6 The outer bands holding the tendon in a coil shape can now be cut. Do not cut all coil holding bands. Do not cut the bands holding the wires in a bundle. Coil bands are cut to free up the coil as the tendon is being pulled into the void.9.2.7 Gradually rotate the uncoiler while placing the tendon into the void with the tendon puller cable.9.2.7.1 Regulate the speed of the uncoiler while maintaining communications with the placing crews at each end of the tendon void, so that the bands holding the wire in a bundle can be cut and removed just before entering the tendon void. The remaining coil holding bands will be cut as the tendon is being placed.9.2.8 If the tendon is to be button headed at a later time, be certain the protective cap or plate over the shop anchor head is still in position.
At this time, place the tendon such that the free wire end is protruding approximately 3 to 4 feet beyond the face of the bearing plate. The threaded bolt/eye bolt inserted onto the shop anchor head is used to guide the shop anchor head into the trumpet.9.2.9 The grip assisting material and kellum's grip and nose cone may be removed at this time or later before button heading.9.2.10 If button heading is not to be performed at this time, the following methods of tendon end protection may be used on the ends at the discretion of the Owner Site Superintendent.
The tendon end may be covered with a plastic bag or sheeting and taped to provide protection from the elements, or the grease cap may be replaced using the old gasket.115 F&Q13.0.CR3.SGT ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 71 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 13.0 TENDON INSTALLATION August 29, 2008)Page 5 of 5 Revision 0 Revision 1, 6/24/09 10.0 DOCUMENTATION 10.1 The items requiring documentation in this procedure shall be documented by the Owner Quality Control Inspector on Data Sheet F&Q 13.0 attached to this procedure or on documentation provided in Work Packages.11.0 QUALITY CONTROL 11.1 QCD -Inspector to document on Data Sheet F&Q 13.0 the information required for tendon number and date of installation.
11.2 QCD -During tendon installation, as it is being pulled into the void, the Inspector shall inspect the visible portion of the tendon wires for corrosion condition observing the requirements of attached Specification EWI 01 -Evaluative Criteria and document the wire condition rating.11.3 Any other damage or adverse conditions noted by the Inspector are to be noted in the comments area of Data Sheet F&Q 13.0 or on documentation provided in Owner Work Packages.12.0 ATTACHMENTS 12.1 Data Sheet F&Q 13.0 12.2 Specification EW101 -Evaluative Criteria 115 F&Q13.0.CR3.SGT Page 72 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 13.0 TENDON INSTALLATION DATA SHEET F&Q 13.0 August 29, 2008 Page 1 of I Revision 0)>TENDON INSTALLATION DOCUMENTATION PROJECT: CRYSTAL RIVER UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT TENDON LOCATION NO.: TENDON IDENTIFICATION NO. (FROM TAG)WIRE CORROSION CONDITION: (CIRCLE ONE)A or B or C or D or E COMMENTS: QC INSP. SIGNOFF LEVEL DATE QC REVIEW LEVEL DATE 115 F&Q13.0.CR3.SGT Page 73 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-1DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 13.0 TENDON INSTALLATION SPECIFICATION EW101 -EVALUATION CRITERIA August 29, 2008 Page 1 of 1 Revision 0 SPECIFICATION EW101 -EVALUATIVE CRITERIA The following criteria shall be used for evaluation during visual inspection of tendon wire. Wire in Condition Rating A, B or C is considered acceptable.
Owner shall be notified of any evaluation classified as either "D" or "E". Sandpaper cleaning, as noted below, is only a means of evaluating the true condition of the wire and will be done only at the discretion and approval of the Quality Control Inspector.
- 1. A = EXCELLENT CONDITION Bright, uniformly colored wire; no foreign matter, visible rust or pitting. No cleaning for inspection is required.
Two heavy passes with 100 grit sandpaper to bright metal.2. B = GOOD CONDITION Partial loss of color; little foreign matter and a small quantity of light rust may be present; no pitting. The oxide coat will be more discemable when viewed parallel to the length of the wire.Rag wipe cleaning may be required for inspection.
Five heavy passes with 100 grit sandpaper to bright metal. NOTE: ANY FOREIGN MATTER OR LIGHT RUST FOUND IS TO BE REMOVED.3. C = FAIR CONDITION Major loss of color; some foreign matter and a large quantity of light rust may be present; no pitting. Rag cleaning or steel wool may be required for inspection.
Ten heavy passes with 100 grit sandpaper to bright metal. NOTE: ANY FOREIGN MATTER OR LIGHT RUST FOUND IS TO BE REMOVED.4. D = UNUSABLE CONDITION Almost total loss of color; much foreign matter and small quantities of heavy rust in the form of red oxide dust; no pitting. Rag wiping, steel wool and sandpaper cleaning will be required for inspection.
Twenty heavy passes with 100 grit sandpaper to bright metal.5. E = REJECTED CONDITION Area of hard, crusty, scaly red oxide, when cleaned show definite signs of pitting. Pits are defined as indentations of a depth of 1/64" or deeper and a minimum of 1/32" in diameter.
Anytime pitting is in evidence, the material shall be graded as rejected.
Thirty or more passes with 100 grit sandpaper to bright metal.115 F&Q13.0.CR3.SGT ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 74 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 c PSC.PROCEDURE F&Q 14.0 TENDON BUTTONHEADING AUgust 29, 2008"Page lof8 Revision O Precision Surveillance Corporation Revision 1,.6/24/09 PROGRESS ENERGY FLORIDA, INC.CRYSTAL RIVER NUCLEAR UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT PRECISION SURVEILLANCE CORPORATION FIELD AND QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE TENDON FIELD ANCHOR HEAD AND BUTTONHEADING APPLICATION p QA MANAGER 06/24/09 Date Prepared by ZApproved by-Appi u~ed-6y-Title, PROJECT MANAGER, P.E.06/24/09 Date Title PRESIDENT 06i24/09 Date Title.I ATTACHMENT Z23R5 116 F&$4.0 SL~
PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 14.0 TENDON BUTTONHEADING August 29, 2008 Page 2 of 8 Revision 0 Revision 1, 6/24/09 1.0 PURPOSE 1.1 This procedure will establish the requirements for the application of field anchor heads to tendons and field buttonheading of the tendons along with quality control inspections/data recording at Crystal River Unit 3 for the vertical and horizontal tendon work during the Steam Generator Replacement Project.2.0 SCOPE 2.1 The tendons to have the field anchor head and buttonheads applied shall be for those tendons removed as specified in the Work Package. Vertical Tendons shall have the button heads and anchor head applied to the bottom (tendon gallery) end of the tendon wires. Horizontal tendons shall have the button heads and field anchor head applied at the buttress as per the Work Package.3.0 RESPONSIBILITY
3.1 Owner
Field Construction Personnel shall be responsible for the physical activities associated with this procedure.
3.2 Owner
Quality Control Personnel to perform all inspections and data recording.
4.0 QUALIFICATIONS
4.1 Owner
Field Construction Personnel shall be fit by skill, training and/or experience to perform these duties.4.2 Owner Quality Control Personnel shall be qualified to a minimum of Level II capability in accordance with the requirements of ANSI N45.2.6.5.0 EQUIPMENT 5.1 B-End Device.5.2 Tendon Field Button header.5.3 Button head GO, No-Go Gauge, Feeler Gauges, Optical Comparator, Eccentricity Gauge.5.4 Miscellaneous Tools, wrenches, ratchets, sockets, shackles, come-alongs, etc.5.5 Plastic bags, plastic sheeting (Visqueen), rags, buckets or drums for waste grease.116 F&Q14.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 76 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 14.0 TENDON BUTTONHEADING August 29, 2008 Page 3 of 8 Revision 0 Revision 1, 6/24/09 6.0 PRECAUTIONS 6.1 As in other heavy construction, care should be exercised while working from scaffolds, platforms, ladders high or restricted access locations.
Respect for the safety and well-being of the other trades and personnel in the area must be observed, especially during hoisting operations.
CAUTION DO NOT STAND UNDER LOADS WHILE STATIONARY OR DURING HOISTING.DO NOT PERMIT OTHERS TO STAND UNDER LOADS.DO NOT THROW OR DROP OBJECTS.7.0 QUALITY CONTROL DOCUMENTATION AND HOLD POINTS 7.1 All Quality Control Documentation (QCD) points noted in this procedure are HOLD L" POINTS.8.0 PREREQUISITES 8.1 The tendon will have been installed in the void.9.0 PROCEDURE 9.1 APPLYING ANCHORHEAD
9.1.1 Prepare
the field end by removing any protective coverings or pulling devices.9.1.2 Make sure the end of the tendon protrudes beyond the bearing plate about 3-4 feet.9.1.3 If needed, clean the individual wires with #16A Solvent or Owner approved equivalent about 18 inches from the end.9.1.4 Position the anchor head into the tendon button heading frame or holder making sure the buttonhead bearing side of the anchor head faces away from the bearing plate.9.1.5 With the anchor head properly placed in the holder, run it back toward the bearing plate until the wire ends would extend about 2 inches into the anchor head.116 F&Q14.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 77 of 130 PCHG-DESG EENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5
9.1.6 Place
each wire into the anchor head by slightly bowing it and allowing it to snap into the wire hole. Place the bottom wires of the tendon into the lower quadrant holes of the anchor head, keeping the wires as parallel as possible to prevent wire crossing.
Do not miss holes while placing the wires, as it will be very difficult to place a missed wire in the center wire holes when all the surrounding holes are filled.9.1.6.1 If a hole is missed, it may be necessary to remove some placed wires to allow placement of the missed wires.9.1.7 After all the wires are placed, push the anchor head back towards the bearing plate to allow free wire length for buttonheading operations.
The tendon is now ready to be buttonheaded.
9.2 BUTTONHEADING
MACHINE and OPERATOR QUALIFICATION
9.2.1 Prior
to forming any buttonheads on a tendon, the buttonhead machine and operator will be tested for the ability to form acceptable buttonheads, observing the requirements of this procedure.
9.2.2 As a minimum, the machine shall be qualified whenever another machine is substituted; whenever the machine has had mechanical repairs or parts replacement that would influence the forming of the buttonhead; or whenever the machine is determined to be responsible for forming unacceptable buttonheads.
9.2.3 Each machine or operator qualification shall be by forming buttonheads on each end of three sample wires about 12 inches in length.9.2.4 QCD Notification
-The buttonheads shall be inspected for acceptability observing the requirements of PSC Buttonhead Specification BHCR3, seen attached to this Procedure.
The buttonhead diameter shall be checked with a Go No-Go Gauge or micrometer, with visual inspection for splits and eccentricity.
If the visually inspected buttonheads appear to exceed the acceptance criteria, they shall be mechanically checked with the appropriate gauge for the suspect deficiency.
9.2.5 If all the buttonheads are acceptable, that machine and operator is therefore qualified for the forming of buttonheads.
9.2.6 Machines
that do not form acceptable buttonheads, excluding problems with the wire, shall not be used in the forming of buttonheads until that machine is repaired and qualified or replaced by a qualified machine. Operators that do not form acceptable buttonheads shall not form buttonheads in production until qualified.
9.2.7 The qualification of each machine and operator tested shall be documented on the Buttonheading Machine Qualification Sheet by the QC Inspector.
116 F&Q14.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 78 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 I ir PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 14.0 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 14.0 TENDON BUTTONHEADING August 29, 2008 Page 5 of 8 Revision 0 Revision 1, 6/24/09 I 9.3 FIELD BUTTONHEADING 9.3.1 Be sure the wire ends are clean and dry. Remove any built-up corrosion protection material from approximately the first 12 inches of the wire.9.3.2 Set up the buttonheader and pump for access to the tendon to be buttonheaded.
Generally, if the buttonheader is suspended from an overhead support and at the level of the tendon end, it can be swung back and forth with relative ease.9.3.3 Buttonhead each wire in the tendon by sliding the wire into the buttonheader.
Push the buttonheader against the wire until the wire is seated all the way into the header against the heading die. Be sure the wire is centered in the jaws of the header. Actuate the header and form a buttonhead on each wire.9.3.3.1 During the course of the button heading operations the production person forming the button heads shall make the following checks: 9.3.3.1.1 100% of the buttonheads should be visually checked for splits and eccentricity.
9.3.3.1.1.1 9.3.3.1.2 9.3.3.1.2.1 Buttonheads that appear to have large splits, or appear to be eccentric will be tagged with a piece of tape wrapping for further evaluation by the QC Inspector at a later time. If a total of 4 button heads are tagged for large splits or eccentric heads, the buttonheading operation on the tendon will stop and the Owner Site Superintendent, QC Inspector, and Field Engineer is to be notified.As work progresses a random sampling 10% diameter check of the buttonheads shall be performed, using the Go No-Go Gauge.If a buttonhead is found unacceptable it will be tagged with a piece of tape wrapping for further evaluation by the QC Inspector at a later time.The production person forming the buttonheads should check the next 5 buttonheads formed using the Go No-Go Gauge and if 2 of them are unacceptable, the buttonheading operation on the tendon will stop and the Owner Site Superintendent and QC Inspector is to be notified.Based on the above inspections:
For three or less rejectable buttonheads, the tendon will be considered acceptable for stressing operations.
For number of rejectable buttonheads greater than three rejected button heads shall be cut off and re-buttonheaded.
If four or more buttonheads are rejected after re-buttonheading in step 9.3.3.2.2, all 163 buttonheads shall be cut off and re-buttonheaded.
9.3.3.2 9.3.3.2.1 9.3.3.2.2 9.3.3.2.3 116 F&Q14.0.CR3.SGR Page 79 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 14.0 TENDON BUTTONHEADING August 29, 2008 Page 6 of 8 Revision 0 Revision 1, 6/24/09 9.3.3.2.4 When less than all 163 wires are to be cut, each wire shall not be shortened by more than 3/4", measured from the outer end of the button head, unless approved by Responsible Engineer.9.3.3.2.5 Individual buttonhead wires may be cut off more than once if the total shortening, relative to the length of the majority of wires, is not more than 3/4".9.4 QCD-Notification-REGREASING THE SHOP HEAD 9.4.1 After the buttonheading and the QC Inspector's buttonhead inspection is completed smear on or brush on a light coating of grease onto the wires so the wires are greased inside the anchor head holes. Retract the field applied anchor head away from the bearing plate seating as many of the buttonheads as possible.9.14.1.1 Smear on or brush a light coating of grease onto the button heads, wires and anchorage.
9.4.2 If re-stressing of the tendon is not to be performed at this time, the following methods of tendon end protection must be used on the ends at the discretion of the Owner Site Superintendent.
The tendon end must be covered with a plastic bag or sheeting and taped to provide protection from the elements, or the grease cap may be replaced using the old gaskets.10.0 DOCUMENTATION 10.1 The items requiring documentation in this procedure shall be documented by the Owner Quality Control Inspector on Data Sheet F&Q 14.0 attached to this procedure or documentation provided in the Work Package.11.0 QUALITY CONTROL 11.1 Inspector to document on Data Sheet F&Q 14.0 or documentation provided in the Work Package the information required for tendon number, field anchor head identification and date of buttonheading.
11.2 The Inspector will check buttonheads formed during Buttonheading Machine and Operator Qualification and document on Buttonheading Machine Qualification Sheet or documentation provided in the Work Package.11.3 After buttonheading is complete and before the field anchor head is pulled back the following buttonhead inspection are to be performed by the Inspector and documented on Data Sheet F&Q 14.0 or documentation provided in the Work Package.11.3.1 100% of the buttonheads shall be visually checked for splits and eccentricity.
116 F&Q14.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 80 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 14.0 TENDON BUTTONHEADING August 29, 2008 Page 7 of 8 Revision 0 Revision 1, 6/24/09 11.3.1.1 Buttonheads that appear to be at or near the limiting criteria for splits and/or eccentricity, will be further evaluated for acceptability by using the appropriate mechanical gauging device.11.3.2 A random sampling 10% check of the buttonheads should be performed, using the Go No-Go Gauge.11.3.2.1 If a buttonhead is found unacceptable, all adjacent buttonheads, those surrounding the unacceptable head, will be checked. This secondary check will not be counted as part of the 10% check. If no additional unacceptable heads are found, that tendon will be accepted.
If one or more additional heads are found to be unacceptable, 100% of the buttonheads on that tendon will be checked.11.3.2.2 Buttonheads that do not pass the Go portion of the Go No-Go Gauge and where splits are in evidence, may be further evaluated by visually examining or physically measuring the split to verify that it does not exceed the acceptance criteria of BHCR3. If the split is within the parameters of BHCR3, then the button head will be measured with a micrometer or caliper at a point perpendicular to the split. This measurement will not exceed 0.475 of an inch.11.3.2.2.1 The geometric function of an acceptable size split on a button head, near or at the 0.475 of an inch limit, will have a tendency to elongate the button head, so that it might not pass through the Go portion of the Go No-Go Gauge.11.3.2.3 Double buttonheads are acceptable provided they pass the Go No-Go Gauge for size conformity and visual check for splits and eccentricity.
All double headed buttonheads should be checked as noted above and will not be counted as part of the normal 10% check.11.3.3 A minimum of 5 buttonheads shall be checked for eccentricity with the appropriate mechanical device to the acceptance criteria stated in BHCR3. Buttonheads outside the acceptable tolerance shall be marked as rejectable with tape and evaluated per Section 12.3.11.3.4 Whenever a "secondary check" or 100% check for buttonhead size has been performed it will be noted as "secondary check" or "100% check" in the comments area of Data Sheet F&Q 14.0.12.0 NOTIFICATION 12.1 Owner Site Superintendent and QC Inspector to be notified if splits or unacceptable sized buttonheads are encountered as defined in sections 9.3.3.1.1.1 and 9.3.3.1.2.1.
116 F&Q14.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 81 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 14.0 TENDON BUTTONHEADING August 29, 2008 Page 8 of 8 Revision 0 Revision 1, 6/24/09 12.2 Owner to be notified for disposition if 4 or more buttonheads on a tendon are found to be reject during QC Inspector's buttonhead inspection.
13.0 ATTACHMENTS 13.1 Data Sheet F&Q 14.0.13.2 Buttonheading Machine/Operator Qualification Sheet.13.3 Button head Specification BHCR3.116 F&Q14.0.CR3.SGR Page 82 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 14.0 TENDON BUTTONHEADING DATA SHEET F&Q 14.0 August 29, 2008 Page 1 of 1 Revision 0 TENDON BUTTON HEADING DOCUMENTATION PROJECT: CRYSTAL RIVER UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT TENDON NO.: FIELD HEAD (END PLATE) ID: DATE OF BUTTON HEADING: BUTTON HEADING MACHINE NO.: MACHINE OPERATOR QUALIFIED?:
INSPECTIONS ACCEPTABLE REJECTABLE (CHECK)GO, NO-GO (OK)SPLITS (OK)ECCENTRICITY (OK)TOTAL UNACCEPTABLE HEADS QC GAUGES USED: GO, NO-GO Recal. Date ECCENTRICITY Recal. Date FEELER GAUGE OR OPTICAL COMPARATOR COMMENTS Recal. Date QC INSP. SIGNOFF QC REVIEW LEVEL LEVEL DATE DATE 116 F&Q14.0.CR3.SGR Page 83 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 14.0 TENDON BUTTONHEADING B.H. MACH/OPER.
QUAL SHT.August 29, 2008 Page 1 of 1 Revision 0 Precision Surveillance Corporation BUTTON HEADING MACHINE/OPERATOR QUALIFICATION SHEET PROJECT: CRYSTAL RIVER UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT BUTTON HEADING MACHINE ID: DATE: SHIFT: OPERATOR: INSPECTOR:
INSPECTION CHECKS: Indicated in-tolerance dimension by check mark.Wire #1 1. Head diameter: 2. Head height: 3. Head eccentricity:
- 4. Split/Crack criteria: Remarks of general appearance check (Visual): Wire #2 Wire #3 116 F&Q14.0.CR3.SGR Page 84 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 r PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 14.0 TENDON BUTTONHEADING BUTTONHEAD SPECIFICATION BHCR3 August 29, 2008 Page 1 of 2 Revision 0 BUTTON HEAD SPECIFICATION BHCR3 The following describes the characteristics and acceptance criteria that have been established for Buttonheads.
This procedure is based on Inryco Button head Specification BH102.1 .INTRODUCTION:
The ultimate strength of wires with upset button heads, as used for the Post Tensioning method, depends on the following factors:-Hardness of the anchor head-Dimensions of borehole in the anchor head-Button head dimensions
-Button head eccentricity For button heads on stress relieved wire corresponding to ASTM A421 Type BA, to 0.2756 inch diameter, to develop the ultimate strength of wire, the following standards must be met: 2. Dimensions of Wire Hole For the most effective performance of the button head, the bore through the base material must be .286" to .300". The corners at the button head bearing surface will be broken to .015" chamfer + .010", -.005".3. Button head Dimensions
4.1. Diameter
0.410 inch minimum to 0.450 inch maximum 4. Button head Defects 5.1. Fissures in Button heads 5.1.1. Splits are defined as fissures with their larger dimension oriented within +/- 500 to the wire axis. Split width is the dimension perpendicular to larger dimension.
- a. Maximum split width allowed for any one split: 0.060 inches.b. A button head may have several splits, maximum 4 per buttonhead.
- c. Button heads with splits which bisect the button head shall be rejected.d. Splits shall not intersect.
116 F&Q14.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 85 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 14.0 TENDON BUTTONHEADING BUTTONHEAD SPECIFICATION BHCR3 August 29, 2008 Page 2 of 2 Revision 0 5. Eccentricity of Button heads Button head eccentricity is defined as a lack of alignment between the axis of the button head with the axis of the wire.Maximum allowable eccentricity:
0.010 inches.116 F&Q14.0.CR3.SGR Page 86 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 15.0 TENDON RESTRESSING August 29, 2008.....i. .. r. .Page 1 of 8 R Revision 0 Survelac Corporation Revision 1, 6/24/09 PROGRESS ENERGY FLORIDA, INC.CRYSTAL: RIVER NUCLEAR UNIT 3 STEAM. GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT PRECISION SURVEILLANCE CORPORATION FIELD AND QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE TENDON RESTRESSING Prepared by Ap rved by -Appr~oved by QA MANAGER Title 06/24/09 Date PROJECT MANAGER, P.E.06/24/09 Date Title PRESIDENT 06/24/09 Date Title, I 117 F&Q15.0.CR3.SGR~doc Page 87 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 15.0 TENDON RESTRESSING August 29, 2008 Page 2 of 8 Revision 0 Revision 1, 6/24/09 1.0 PURPOSE 1.1 This procedure will establish the requirements for the re-stressing of tendons and quality control inspections/data recording at Crystal River Unit 3 for the vertical and horizontal tendon work during the Steam Generator Replacement Project.2.0 SCOPE 2.1 The tendons to be re-stressed are those new tendons installed to replace those removed from the tendon voids and those de-tensioned but not removed as specified in the Work Package. Vertical tendon stressing shall be performed from the top of the containment.
Horizontal tendon stressing shall be performed from both ends.2.2 The re-stressing sequence shall be as specified in Work Package.3.0 RESPONSIBILITY
3.1 Owner
Field Construction Personnel shall be responsible for the physical activities associated with this procedure.
3.2 Owner
Quality Control Personnel to perform all inspections and data recording.
4.0 QUALIFICATIONS
4.1 Owner
Field Construction Personnel shall be fit by skill, training and/or experience to perform these duties.4.2 Owner Quality Control Personnel shall be qualified to a minimum of Level II capability in accordance with the requirements of ANSI N45.2.6.5.0 EQUIPMENT 5.1 Hydraulic ram (calibrated) and pump with appropriate hoses and fittings.5.2 Hydraulic pressure gauge (calibrated).
5.3 0.030" feeler gauges or shim stock.5.4 Miscellaneous Tools, wrenches, ratchets, sockets, shackles, come-alongs, etc.5.5 Plastic bags, plastic sheeting (Visqueen), rags, buckets or drums for waste grease.117 F&Q15.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 88 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 15.0 TENDON RESTRESSING August 29, 2008 Page 3 of 8 Revision 0 Revision 1, 6/24/09 6.0 PRECAUTIONS 6.1 As in other heavy construction, care should be exercised while working from scaffolds, platforms, ladders, high or restricted access locations.
Respect for the safety and well-being of the other trades and personnel in the area must be observed, especially during hoisting operations.
CAUTION DO NOT STAND UNDER LOADS WHILE STATIONARY OR DURING HOISTING.DO NOT PERMIT OTHERS TO STAND UNDER LOADS.DO NOT THROW OR DROP OBJECTS.6.2 The wire used for the tendons has a minimum breaking strength of 240,000 pounds per square inch. This means that each 7mm diameter wire is capable of withstanding a minimum breaking load of 14,317 pounds. Multiply this by 163 wires in a tendon and you are dealing with forces in excess of two million pounds per tendon.CAUTION NEVER CONNECT A WELDING GROUND, PERFORM WELDING ON, OR STRIKE AN ARC NEAR A STRESSED TENDON.NEVER APPLY AN OPEN FLAME TO THE BUTTONHEADS, THE WIRES OR ANCHORAGES OF A STRESSED TENDON.NEVER STRIKE THE BUTTONHEADS, THE WIRES OR THE ANCHORAGES OF A STRESSED TENDON WITH A HAMMER OR ANY OTHER METAL OBJECT.6.3 Prior to applying ANY FORCE to the tendon, the stressing rod and coupler must be fully engaged with the anchorage.
CAUTION BE SURE THE STRESSING ROD IS FULLY ENGAGED WITH THE ANCHORAGE BEFORE APPLYING ANY LOAD, REGARDLESS OF HOW SMALL THAT LOAD MIGHT BE.117 F&Q15.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 89 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 15.0 TENDON RESTRESSING August 29, 2008 Page 4 of 8 Revision 0 Revision 1, 6/24/09 6.4 During stressing operations the following cautions shall be observed.CAUTION NEVER EXCEED THE OVERSTRESS FORCE OR PRESSURE -80% (1867 kips for a 163 wire tendon) or 11.46 kips FOR THE AMOUNT OF EFFECTIVE WIRES IN A TENDON.DO NOT STAND BEHIND THE JACK WHEN IT IS UNDER LOAD.KEEP FINGERS OUT OF ANY PINCH AREAS.7.0 QUALITY CONTROL DOCUMENTATION AND HOLD POINTS 7.1 All Quality Control Documentation (QCD) points noted in this procedure are HOLD POINTS.8.0 PREREQUISITES 8.1 For tendons with 162, 161 or 160 effective wires, the force as shown on Work Package shall be prorated as follows: 8.1.1 Number of EFFECTIVE WIRES divided by 163 STANDARD times Pre-Tensioning Force (PTF) equals Prorated Pre-Tensioning Force 8.1.2 Number of EFFECTIVE WIRES divided by 163 STANDARD times Overstress Force (OSF) equals Prorated Overstress Force 8.1.3 Number of EFFECTIVE WIRES divided by 163 STANDARD times Lock-Off Force equals Prorated Lock-Off Force.9.0 PROCEDURE 9.1 Remove tendon end protection.
9.2 QCD -Notification
-Grease shall be removed from the tendon end using clean non-metallic devices. Bristle brushes and rags with suitable quantities of Viscosity Oil, Viscor Industrial No. 16A solvent or Owner approved equivalent to dilute and wash away the grease may also be required.
This cleanup must be sufficient to permit engagement of the anchorage threads with the stressing rod threads.9.3 Align the jack coupler with the anchorage and the jack chair with the bearing plate.9.4 The coupler is pressed against the anchorage and is now screwed onto the anchorage. (Rotate coupler or rod counter clockwise several revolutions to align threads, then clockwise to attach).117 F&Q15.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 90 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 15.0 TENDON RESTRESSING August 29, 2008 Page 5 of 8 Revision 0 Revision 1, 6/24/09 9.5 Approximately equalize the anchor head distance from the bearing plate on both ends of a horizontal tendon, adjust anchor head location if necessary.
9.6 NOTE: Vertical tendons are only stressed from one end, from the top of the containment.
9.7 QCD -HOLD POINT -Rams shall be pressurized to a Pre-tensioning Force (PTF), that force necessary to bring the tendon into a lightly stressed condition to remove slack and seat the button heads. This force establishes the base for Elongation Measurement.
This force shall be shown on Work Package to remove slack from the tendon. Record pressure and elongation. (NOTE: The elongation can be measured with the bearing plate and anchor head as a reference point. The methodology to be used is to select a reference based on field conditions.)
9.7.1 Verify
that the equipment and tendon are stable. Verify that anchor heads are parallel to the base plates to within +/- 1/8 inches and that all button heads are seated properly.
For this and following steps the stressing crews shall be in continuous contact during the performance of the work.9.7.2 Ram pressures shall be maintained within 1,000 psi of each other. At final lock-off values the ends of double end stressed tendons should be adjusted if needed to be so that gap between bearing plate and anchor head at each end be within 1 inch of each other.9.8 QCD -HOLD POINT -Rams shall be pressurized to the Overstress Force (OSF)shown on Owner Work Package unless a prorated Overstress Force is required by section 8.1, hold for 1 minute verifying that all load induced movements have ceased, record pressure and elongation.
9.8.1 If it is necessary to go beyond the maximum travel of the ram, fill the space between the bearing plate and anchor head with shims, transfer load to shims, lower piston to bottom of travel, screw jack rod nut down tight against piston, then continue to stress.9.9 Compare measured elongation to the target value listed in the Owner Work Package.If the measured value deviates from the target value by more than +10% the tendon can be de-stressed and restressed starting from zero pressure follow the instructions in Steps 9.7 and 9.8 as applicable.
9.9.1 If measured elongation deviates from the target value by more than 10%, reduce jacking force to zero and repeat instructions in Sections 9.7 and 9.8 above.However, do not re-stress the tendon more than twice following the initial trial unless directed to do so by Owner Engineering.
If elongation within the plus or minus 10% acceptance range is not achieved after three trials, notify Owner Engineering.
117 F&Q15.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 91 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 15.0 TENDON RESTRESSING August 29, 2008 Page 6 of 8 Revision 0 Revision 1, 6/24/09 9.10 Shim Placement:
9.10.1 At any point prior to or during stressing, the field crew will prepare shim stacks of uniform thickness, so that when the shims are placed, there will not be more than a 1/16 inch height differential between the total of each shim stack. The largest shim should be against the bearing plate with the next largest shim thickness against the anchor head bearing face, unless approved otherwise by Owner Engineering.
9.11 Reduce pressure on the ram to a few hundred psi above lock-off (seating) point.9.11.1 The shims will be placed between the bearing plate and anchor head in matched diametrically opposite pairs. The shim gap will be filled to the nearest 1/8" increment.
While the shims are being placed, the gap between shims shall be minimized and in no case shall exceed a space of 1/4 inch for the first shims in direct contact with the anchor head and 1/2 inch for the remaining shims in the stack.9.11.1.1 Shims are to be installed in tight alignment so as not to interfere with installation of the grease caps.9.11.2 Insert a feeler gauge or shim stock of 0.030 inches in thickness into each shim stack at two points located approximately 180 degrees apart and approximately centered.9.11.3 De-pressurize the ram to set the anchor head onto the shims. It shall not be necessary to return to zero gauge pressure but at least 2000 psi below anticipated liftoff on the gauge with a minimum of 1500psig.9.11.4 No portion of the bearing surface of the anchor head shall overhang the shim stack.9.12 QCD -HOLD POINT -To assure that the correct forces have been applied to the tendon, lift-off stress measurement will now be performed.
NOTE: This may be performed independently of the other end.9.12.1 Gradually pressurize the ram while pulling the feeler gauges. The point at which the second feeler gauge becomes loose is the lift-off stress.9.12.2 Repeat Sections 9.11.3 through 9.12.1 until 3 consecutive lift-offs have been taken. These lift-offs shall be within 40 kips of each other. If this is not achieved the feeler gauges may be repositioned and the-lift-offs repeated until 3 consecutive results fall within the range criteria.117 F&Q15.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 92 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 15.0 TENDON RESTRESSING August 29, 2008 Page 7 of 8 Revision 0 Revision 1, 6/24/09 9.12.3 If the average of the three lift-offs are within the minus (-)0% and plus (+)4% range of the final calculated values provided in Owner Work Package, the tendon re-stressing is now complete.
Readings falling outside the range shall be adjusted by adding or removing shims. If, after adjustment trying the minimum available shim sizes, readings still fall outside the acceptable range it shall be reported to Owner.9.12.4 The ram force shall be reduced to zero. The ram shall be uncoupled from the anchorage.
9.13 At this time perform detailed visual inspection of as left anchorage per PSC Procedure F&Q 15.1. If inspection is not to be performed at this time anchorage shall be smeared with a light coating of grease and protected.
9.13.1 If final installation of the grease cap is to be performed refer to PSC Procedure F&Q 16.0.9.13.2 The following methods of tendon end protection may be used at the discretion of the Owner Site Superintendent.
The tendon end may be covered with a plastic bag or sheeting and taped to provide protection from the elements, or the grease cap may be replaced using the old gaskets.10.0 DOCUMENTATION 10.1 The items requiring documentation in this procedure shall be documented by the Owner Quality Control Inspector on Data Sheet F&Q 15.0 or Data Sheet F&Q 15.OA (both attached to this procedure) or Owner Work Package Documentation.
After the tendon has been re-stressed the amount of seated button heads, are to be inspected and recorded on data sheet F&Q 15.0.11.0 QUALITY CONTROL 11.1 Inspector to document on Data Sheet F&Q 15.0 or Owner Work Package Documentation the information required for tendon number, tendon end and date of stressing.
11.2 Document the ram and gauge identification.
11.3 Note: The following are instructions for PSC F&Q 15.0 Data Sheet Documentation.
1.1.4 Document
on Line 1 of Data Sheet F&Q 15.0 the calculated pressure.
Document on Line 1.1 the actual pressure and elongation at PTF.11.5 Document on Line 2 of Data Sheet F&Q 15.0 the calculated pressure.
Document on Line 2.1 the actual pressure and elongation at OSF.11.6 Document on Line 3 of Data Sheet F&Q 15.0 the calculated elongation.
Document on Line 3.1 the actual measured elongation (Line 2.1 minus Line 1.1).117 F&Q 15.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 93 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 11.7 The Total measured elongation for the tendon shall be within plus or minus 10% of calculated values.11.8 Document on Line 4 of Data Sheet F&Q 15.0 the calculated lift-off.11.9 Document on Data Sheet F&Q 15.OA the pressure for the second shim stock to become loose for each Lift-Off and average the readings as required on the Data Sheet.11.10 Transfer the Averaged Lift-Off reading from Data Sheet F&Q 15.OA to Line 4.1 of Data Sheet F&Q 15.0.11.11 The lift-offs shall be within the minus (-)0 and plus (+)4 percentage ranges of the final calculated values provided.11.12 Document on Line 5 of Data Sheet F&Q 15.0 the actual shims installed.
11.13 Document on Line 6 the number of seated button heads after stressing.
11.14 Document on Line 7 of Data Sheet F&Q 15.0 the anchor head identification.
Z 12.0 NOTIFICATION 12.1 Owner is to be notified if elongation is not within the plus or minus 10% after three attempts at elongation or if the lock-offs are not within the minus (-)0 and plus (+)4 percentage ranges, of the values provided.13.0 ATTACHMENTS 13.1 Data Sheet F&Q 15.0 13.2 Data Sheet F&Q 15.OA 117 F&Q15.0.CR3.SGR Page 94 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 15.0 TENDON RESTRESSING DATA SHEET F&Q 15.0 August 29, 2008 Page 1 of I Revision 0 TENDON STRESSING DOCUMENTATION PROJECT: CRYSTAL RIVER UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT TENDON NO.: CIRCLE ONE: Removed & Replaced Tendon or Restress Only Tendon CIRCLE ONE: Single End Stress Tendon or Double End Stress Tendon# EFFECTIVE WIRES: DO NOT EXCEED: 80% OF GUTS: KIPS STRESSING SEQUENCE VERIFIED: TENDON END: TENDON END: RAM NO.: RAM NO.: RAM AREA: K RAM AREA: KID GAUGE NO.: GAUGE NO.: KIPS PSI ELONGATION KIPS PSI ELONGATION
1.0 CALCULATED
(PTF)1.1 ACTUAL (PTF)2.0 CALCULATED (OSF) I... '2.1. ACTUAL (OSF)3.0 CALCULATED ELONGATION OVER (PTF)3.1. ACTUAL MEASURED ELONGATION (2.1 MINUS 1.1), (+-1% f Iaculated elonain 3.2. TOTAL TENDON ELONGATION..
.,, .: 4.0 CALCULATED LIFT-OFF 4.1. ACTUAL LIFT-OFF (-,+% of calculated lift-off)ACTUAL LIFT-OFF In kips (1/2 sum of Individual forces)5.0 ACTUAL SHIMSlINSTALLED 6. # seated Buttonheads after stressing:
- 7. ANCHOR HEAD ID ANCHOR HEAD ID PSI m (KIPS -K) X 1000 KIPS = RAM AREA X PSI + K RAM AREA 1000 COMMENTS: QC INSP. SIGNOFF: LEVEL: DATE: QC REVIEW: LEVEL: DATE: 117 F&Q15.0.CR3.SGR Page 95 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 15.0 TENDON LOCK-OFF DATA SHEET F&Q 15.OA August 29, 2008 Page 1 of 1 Revision 0 TENDON STRESSING DOCUMENTATION TENDON LOCK-OFF STRESS MEASUREMENT DOCUMENTATION PROJECT: CRYSTAL RIVER UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT TENDON NO.: TENDC RAM NO.: GAUGE NO.: RAM AREA: K =)N END: MEASUREMENT
Force (kips)[Ave of Measurements 1,2,3]2 nd.Gauge 1 2 3 I. I.-PSI/ KIPS PSI = (KIPS -K) X 1000 RAM AREA KIPS = RAM AREA X PSI + K 1000 COMMENTS QC INSP. SIGNOFF QC REVIEW LEVEL DATE LEVEL DATE 117 F&Q15..0CR3.SGR Page 96 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 Precision Surveillance-CorporatiOnh PSC PROCEDURE ANCHORAGE INSPECTION ,August29,2008 Page 1 of 6 Revision 0 Revisiqn 1., 09/1I6/09 PROGRESS ENERGY.FLORIDA, INC., CRYSTAL RIVER: NUCLEAR UNIT 3 STEAM GENERTTOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT PRECISION SURVEILLANCE CORPORATION FIELD AND QUALITY"CONTROL PROCEDURE ANCHORAGE INSPECTION OF STRESSED TENDON Prepared by Approved by,>'LEVEL II Q.C.Title 09/16109 Date PROJECT MANAGER,,'P.E.'
09/16109 Date Title c~PRESIDENT'09/16/9 Date Approved by, Title 118 F&Q15.1.CR3.SGR.REV 1.doo Page 97 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-D)ESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 15.1 ANCHORAGE INSPECTION August 29, 2008 Page 2 of 6 Revision 0 Revision 1. 09/16/09 1.0 PURPOSE 1.1 This procedure will establish the requirements for a detailed visual inspection of the anchor head, shims, bearing plate and wire button heads on each end of a tendon at Crystal River Unit 3 for the vertical and horizontal tendon work during the Steam Generator Replacement Project.1.2 Inspection shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of 2001 Edition and 2003 Addenda of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,Section XI, Subsection IWL.1.3 A detailed visual inspection is to be performed prior to de-tensioning for those tendons to be de-tensioned but not removed as specified in the Work Package.1.4 Also a detailed visual inspection is to be performed on those re-stressed new tendons installed to replace those removed from the tendon voids and those de-tensioned but not removed as specified in the Work Package.2.0 RESPONSIBILITY
2.1 Owner
Quality Control Personnel to perform all inspections and data recording.
3.0 QUALIFICATIONS
3.1 The inspector performing this inspection is to be qualified as a Level II per PSC Procedure or as qualified by Progress Energy.4.0 EQUIPMENT 4.1 Magnifying Glass with suitable illumination.
4.2 Optical
Comparator with 0.005 inch (min.) Measuring Reticle.4.3 Steel Ruler.4.4 Light Meter.5.0 QUALITY CONTROL 5.1 All Quality Control Documentation (QCD) points noted in this procedure are Hold Points. The work shall not progress past or through a QCD without a verbal release from the Inspector.
The required information or evaluative data shall be documented on Data Sheet F&Q 15.1 or Work Package Documentation.
118 F&Q15.1.CR3.SGR.REV 1.doc ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 98 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 15.1 ANCHORAGE INSPECTION August 29, 2008 Page 3 of 6 Revision 0 Revision 1. 09/16/09 6.0 PRECAUTIONS
6.1 CAUTION
-NEVER STRIKE THE BUTTON HEADS, THE WIRES OR THE ANCHOR HEAD OF A STRESSED TENDON WITH A HAMMER.OR ANY OTHER METAL OBJECT.6.2 CAUTION -IF AT ANY TIME A CRACKED OR BROKEN ANCHOR HEAD IS DETECTED AS A RESULT OF INSPECTION, ALL WORK SHALL STOP. ALL PERSONNEL SHALL BE MOVED AWAY FROM THAT AREA AND THE OWNER CONSTRUCTION SUPERVISOR SHALL BE NOTIFIED.
THE WORK AND/OR INSPECTIONS SHALL CONTINUE ONLY AFTER A SAFETY EVALUATION HAS BEEN MADE AND ONLY AT THE DIRECTION AND CONTROL OF THE OWNER CONSTRUCTION SUPERVISOR.
7.0 PREREQUISITES
7.1 The tendon will be in a stressed condition.
7.2 The anchor head, shims, bearing plate and wire button heads are to be cleaned to permit inspection.
8.0 ANCHORAGE
INSPECTION 8.1 The tendon anchorage, including the anchor head, bearing plate, stressing shims and button heads of all selected tendons shall be visually inspected for signs of corrosion, cracks, missing wires, broken/damaged or protruding wires and malformed button heads.8.2 These inspections are to be performed with light conditions supplemented by auxiliary light sources if needed to attain a minimum illumination level of 50 foot-candles (fc) as verified by a light meter provided by owner. The light meter ID with its calibration due date and a description of any auxiliary lighting used is to be documented on Data Sheet F&Q 15.1 or Work Package Documentation.
8.3 CORROSION
INSPECTION
8.3.1 BUTTON
HEADS 8.3.1.1 The Category of Corrosion that could be seen on Button heads or Tendon Wire will be described in PSC Specification EW101 of PSC Procedure F&Q 13.0. As the tendon is still in a stressed condition, there will not be much area to review for Category of Corrosion, therefore only the exposed, visible portions of the button heads shall be evaluated.
8.3.1.1.1 QCD- Document the Category of Corrosion of the Button heads on Data Sheet F&Q 15.1 or Work Package Documentation.
118 F&Q15.1.CR3.SGR.REV 1.doc ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 99 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 15.1 ANCHORAGE INSPECTION August 29, 2008 Page 4 of 6 Revision 0 Revision 1. 09/16/09 8.3.2 ANCHOR HEAD, SHIMS, BEARING PLATE 8.3.2.1 The Category of Corrosion that could be seen on Anchor Head, Shims, or Bearing Plates will be described in PSC Specification EW101 of PSC Procedure F&Q 13.0. As the tendon is still in a stressed condition, the areas to be reviewed will be somewhat limited, therefore only the exposed, visible portions of the anchor head, shims and bearing plate shall be evaluated.
8.3.2.1.1 QCD- Document the Category of Corrosion of each item on Data Sheet F&Q 15.1 or Work Package Documentation.
8.3.3 CRACKS
8.3.3.1 The Anchor Head, Shims and Bearing Plates shall be visually inspected for signs of Cracks.8.3.3.1.1 QCD- If there are no signs of Cracks present, "None" shall be entered into the "Cracks" area of Data Sheet F&Q 15.1 or Work Package Documentation for each item as it occurs.8.3.3.1.2 QCD- If signs of Cracks are present in any item, regardless of size, the crack shall be sketched on Sketch Sheet F&Q 15.1 or Work Package Documentation and identified with a Sketch Number, which shall be entered into the "Cracks" area of Data Sheet F&Q 15.1 or Work Package Documentation.
8.3.4 BUTTON
HEAD PHYSICAL INSPECTION 8.3.4.1 While the tendon is in a Stressed Condition, it shall be necessary to inspect the button heads/wires for those button heads/wires that may be missing, damaged or protruding/unseated.
The button heads shall be inspected for obvious gross deficiencies as part of the Off-size Button head Inspection.
8.3.4.2 All conditions for button heads and wires, whether missing or defective, shall be documented.
8.3.4.3 Wire and button heads shall be inspected for the following information and documented by the appropriate code on Data Sheet F&Q 15.1 or Work Package Documentation.
The circle represents the button head location on the anchor head. To correctly orient the button head on the anchorage, it shall be necessary to accurately locate the anchorage Heat or Code Number on the Anchorage Sketch with respect to the hole pattern alignment, on Data Sheet F&Q 15.1 or Work Package Documentation.
118 F&Q15.1.CR3.SGR.REV 1.doc ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 100 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 15.1 ANCHORAGE INSPECTION August 29, 2008 Page 5 of 6 Revision 0 Revision 1. 09/16/09 8.3.4.3.1 I= Off-size button head 8.3.4.3.1.1 Malformed button heads shall be documented as Off-size button heads, with no other distinguishing Category Codes.8.3.4.3.2 Q Protruding/Unseated Wire/Button head.8.3.4.3.2.1 Place an arrow pointing at the protruding button head, with the distance of protrusion above the other button heads at the tail end and in such a location so as not to obscure information.
8.3.4.3.3 0= Broken/Missing Wire/Button head 8.3.4.3.3.1 This code shall be used to identify occurrences for this inspection.
See section 8.3.4.3.5 for Code if wire is removed.8.3.4.3.4 0= Previously Identified As Missing; whether a result of a previous inspection or as a result of the installation.
8.3.4.3.5 0_= A discontinuous wire that was removed during this inspection and previously identified as Broken/Missing.
8.3.4.4 QCD- Document the Button head Inspection on the Sketch shown on Data Sheet F&Q 15.1 or Work Package Documentation in accordance with the Button head Code shown of Data Sheet F&Q 15.1 or Work Package Documentation.
8.3.4.5 QCD- Document the Anchor Head ID and Heat Number Code Identification Number for each anchorage component on Data Sheet F&Q 15.1 or Work Package Documentation.
8.3.4.6 IF any missing, broken and/or damaged wires are detected, THEN check the installation records, i.e., the button heading records, stressing records or reports, to determine if the missing, broken, and/or damaged wires were previously noted.9.0 NOTIFICATION
9.1 Owner
should be formally notified when each one or more of the following conditions are detected as a result of the inspection of a tendon. Notification should be by a nonconformance report or a formal letter.118 F&Q15.1.CR3.SGR.REV 1.doc ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 101 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 15.1 ANCHORAGE INSPECTION August 29, 2008 Page 6 of 6 Revision 0 Revision 1. 09/16/09 9.1.1 CATEGORY OF CORROSION D, or E -when detected for Button heads or Wires, Owner should be notified.9.1.2 CATEGORY OF CORROSION D, or E -when detected for Anchor Heads, Shims, i or Bearing plates, Owner should be notified.9.1.3 CRACKS -no matter how small, when detected for Anchor Heads, Shims and/or Bearing Plates, Owner should be notified.9.1.4 OFFSIZE BUTTON HEADS -when detected for Button heads, document on Data Sheet F&Q 15.1A or 15.1B as applicable or Work Package Documentation.
9.1.5 PROTRUDING
WIRES -when detected for Button head/Wires the quantity and length of protrusion of each Button head shall be reported and Owner should be notified.9.1.6 MISSING OR BROKEN WIRES/BUTTON HEADS -when detected and not previously documented, Owner should be notified.10.0 DOCUMENTATION 10.1 The items in this procedure requiring documentation shall be documented on Data Sheet F&Q 15.1 or Work Package Documentation.
10.2 The Data Sheet references the applicable section number of the procedure for each QCD point.10.3 Sketch Sheet F&Q 15.1 or Work Package Documentation accompanies this procedure and shall be filled in for the required information if applicable.
11.0 ATTACHMENTS 11.1 DATA SHEET F&Q 15.1 11.2 SKETCH SHEET F&Q 15.1 118 F&Q15.1.CR3.SGR.REV 1.doc ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 102 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 Project: CRYSTAL RIVER UNIT 3 -SGR M&TE: ITEM: ID: DUE: Tendon No.: Tendon End: ITEM: ID: DUE: ITEM: ID: DUE: ANCHORAGE INSPECTION CRITERIA El As-Found F] Post Re-Tensioning Q.C. Signoff C-ORRflRIOlN A (-RA-K IN-PF--TION (8.3.1.1.1)
Buttonheads Level: (1) (8.3.3.1.1)
Cracks [I Yes (2) E] No (8.3.2.1.1)
Anchorhead Level: (1) (8.3.3.1.1)
Cracks [I Yes(2) El No (8.3.2.1.1)
Shims Level: (1) (8.3.3.1.1)
Cracks [I Yes (2) El No (8.3.2.1.1)
Bearing Plate Level: (1) (8.3.3.1.1)
Cracks El Yes (2) El No'(1)_ Corrosion Levels of "D" and "E" required an NCR.(2)- Compose a sketch of the cracks on Sketch Sheet 8.0 and initiate an NCR.8.3.4.4 -BUTTONHEAD INSPECTION Offsize (Malformed)
Protruding/unseated w wire/buttonheads.
0 Broken/missing wire/buttonheads.
- Previously identified as missing :-----------------------------
00000000000
['1 Discontinuous-removed 00000000000
000000000000 0000000000000
00000000000000 0000000000000 (8.3.4.5)Anchorhead 00000000000000 I.D. _ _ __0000000000000 Located on Sketch: El Yes El No 000000000000 (8.3.4.5)
Heat Code0 0 0 0 0 0 Located on Sketch: 0lYes [IlNo 0 0 0 0 0 0 000000000...si.e Buttonhead....Tota ( :~~_ B -in hea _T,~~,s----
Missing Buttonheads:
[] Yes E] No; Quantity: Protruding BH: Missing BH: Total # of Effective Buttonheads Seated: Overall Results E] Acceptable El Un-Acceptable Total (Protruding+Missing):
Owner Notified NCR#: QC Reviewed: Level: Date: 118 F&Q15.1.CR3.SGR.REV 1.doc Page 103 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 15.1 ANCHORAGE INSPECTION SKETCH SHEET F&Q 15.1 August 29, 2008 Page 1 of 1 Revision 0 PROJECT: CRYSTAL RIVER UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT TENDON NO.: TENDON END/BUTTRESS No: Sketch each crack as it appears in the Anchorage, Shims or Bearing Plate. Identify each item by name; apply the heat code identification if available and locate that identification on the sketch. Use as many Sketch Sheets as necessary being sure to list the page number below and to apply a Sketch Number to each item with cracks.Inspected By: Date: Reviewed By: Date: 118 F&Q15.1.CR3.SGR.REV 1.doc Page 104 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 15.2 BEARING PLATE CONCRETE INSPECTION August 29, 2008 Page 1 of 3 Precision Surveillance Corporation Revision 0'PROGRESS.
ENERGY FLORIDA, INC.CRYSTAL RIVER, NUCLEAR UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT PRECISION SURVEILLANCE CORPORATION FIELDAND QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE BEARING PLATE, CONCRETE INSPECTION LEVEL II Q'.C Title 08/29/08 Date Prepared by Approved byj.7 t-Approvea by *PROJECT MANAGER, RE Title PRESIDENT Title 08129/08 Date 08/29/08 Date ATTACHMENT Z23R5 19 F&PjW&RIý1, PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 15.2 BEARING PLATE CONCRETE INSPECTION August 29, 2008 Page 2 of 3 Revision 0 1.0 PURPOSE 1.1 This procedure will establish the requirements for a detailed visual inspection of the concrete around/adjoining each end of a tendon prior to detensioning and after re-stressing the tendon at Crystal River Unit 3 for the vertical and horizontal tendon work during the Steam Generator Replacement Project.1.2 Inspection shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of 2001 Edition and 2003 Addenda of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section Xl, Subsection IWL.1.3 The tendons to have a detailed visual inspection performed on them are those new tendons installed to replace those removed from the tendon voids and those de-tensioned but not removed as specified in the Work Package.2.0 RESPONSIBILITY
2.1 Owner
Quality Control Personnel to perform all inspections and data recording.
3.0 QUALIFICATIONS
3.1 The inspector performing this inspection is to be qualified as a Level II per PSC Procedure or as approved by the Owner's IWL Responsible Engineer, or by an IWL Responsible Engineer accepted by the Owner.4.0 EQUIPMENT 4.1 Optical Comparator with 0.005 inch (min.) Measuring Reticle.4.2 Feeler Gauges.4.3 Steel Ruler.4.4 Light Meter.5.0 QUALITY CONTROL 5.1 There are no hold points for this operation.
Quality Control Inspectors shall perform the inspections that are described in this procedure and document those results on Data Sheet F&Q 15.2 or Work Package Documentation.
6.0 PREREQUISITES
6.1 The tendon will be in a stressed condition.
6.2 The Grease Cap may or may not have been installed.
6.3 The tendon may or may not have been re-greased.
119 F&Q15.2.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 106 of 130 PCHG-1DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 15.2 BEARING PLATE CONCRETE INSPECTION August 29, 2008 Page 3 of 3 Revision 0 7.0 CONCRETE INSPECTION 7.1 The concrete adjoining the bearing plate (within 2 feet of the edge of the bearing plate, unless 2 feet is not accomplished due to bearing plate location) of each selected tendon shall be inspected for cracks or any other abnormal material behavior.7.2 This inspection is to be performed with light conditions supplemented by auxiliary light sources if needed to attain a minimum illumination level of 50 foot-candles (fc)as verified by a light meter. The light meter ID with its calibration due date and a description of any auxiliary lighting used is to be documented on Data Sheet F&Q 15.2 or Work Package Documentation.
7.2.1 QCD- Any crack that is 0.010" in width or wider shall be documented on Data Sheet F&Q 15.2 or Work Package Documentation.
7.2.1.1 The full length and width of each crack shall be documented as well as sketching the crack pattern.8.0 NOTIFICATION
-UNACCEPTABLE CONDITIONS
8.1 Owner
should be notified when any crack width or gaps greater than 0.010" in width are detected.9.0 DOCUMENTATION 9.1 Data Sheet F&Q 15.2 or Work Package Documentation shall be used for documenting the requirements of this inspection.
10.0 ATTACHMENTS 10.1 Data Sheet F&Q 15.2.119 F&Q15.2.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 107 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 15.2 BEARING PLATE CONCRETE INSPECTION DATA SHEET F&Q 15.2 August 29, 2008 Page 1 of 1 Revision 0 Revision 1. 6/24/2009 PROJECT: CRYSTAL RIVER UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT TENDON NO.: 0 As-Found E] Post Re-Tensioning TENDON END: BEARING PLATE I.D. NO.: The bearing plate shall be oriented as shown below. Place the location of the bearing plate identification on the sketch below. Sketch all visible concrete cracks and/or other abnormal indications."or Horizontal Tendon his edge is up.:or Vertical Tendon this is toward"eactor or center of containment For above inspection:
Light Conditions 50fc or greater? circle one: YES or Light Meter ID: Date due calibration:
Auxiliary Light Source used? Describe: Q.C. Signoff _ Level NO Date--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Q.C. Review Level Date 119 F&Q15.2.CR3.SGR Page 108 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 4 Precision Surveillance Corporation PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 16.0 GREASE CAP REPLACEMENT August 29, 2008, Page 1 of4 Revision 0 PROGRESS ENERGY FLORIDA, INC..CRYSTAL RIVER NUCLEAR UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT PRECISION SURVEILLANCE.
CORPORATION FIELD AND QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE GREASE CAP REPLACEMENT
":ýf , I -- Prepared by App ved by LEVEL II Q.C.Title PROJECT MANAGER, P.E.Title PRESIDENT Title 08/29/08 Date 08&29/08 Date 08&29/08 Date ATTACHMENT Z23R5 20 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 16.0 GREASE CAP REPLACEMENT August 29, 2008 Page 2 of 4 Revision 0 1.0 PURPOSE 1.1 This procedure will establish the requirements for the final placement of grease caps after all other work has been completed (except re-greasing) for the vertical and horizontal tendon work during the Steam Generator Replacement Project at Crystal River Unit 3.2.0 SCOPE 2.1 This procedure applies to those new tendons installed to replace those removed from the tendon voids and those de-tensioned but not removed as specified in the Work Package. This procedure may also be used for any other tendon as needed by Owner.3.0 RESPONSIBILITY
3.1 Owner
Field Construction Personnel shall be responsible for the physical activities and recording of documentation associated with this procedure.
4.0 QUALIFICATIONS
4.1 Owner
Field Construction Personnel shall be fit by skill, training and/or experience to perform these duties.5.0 EQUIPMENT 5.1 Miscellaneous Tools, wrenches, ratchets, sockets, etc.6.0 PRECAUTIONS 6.1 As in other heavy construction, care should be exercised while working from scaffolds, platforms, ladders, high or restricted access locations.
Respect for the safety and well-being of the other trades and personnel in the area must be observed, especially during hoisting operations.
6.2 Be prepared to support the weight of the grease cap.7.0 QUALITY CONTROL DOCUMENTATION AND HOLD POINTS 7.1 There are no Quality Control Documentation (QCD) points or HOLD POINTS in this procedure.
8.0 PREREQUISITES
8.1 All other work has been completed on this tendon with the exception of Grease Replacement.
120 F&Q16.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 110 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 16.0 GREASE CAP REPLACEMENT August 29, 2008 Page 3 of 4 Revision 0 9.0 GREASE CAP REPLACEMENT 9.1 Only minor cleaning and brushing may be necessary to prepare the bearing plate and grease cap for remounting to the bearing plate.9.2 Inspect and prepare bearing plate surface by cleaning with rags and solvent. If detrimental foreign matter such as mill scale, rust, and dirt is detected on the gasket bearing surface of the plate, and power tool cleaning is required, then: 9.2.1 Make suitable provisions to protect the tendon wires and anchor head threads from accidental rubbing, cutting, or scratching by coming into contact with the power tool's rotating wire brushes and/or abrasive disks. Sheet metal shrouds around the tendon and end anchorage may be necessary.
9.2.1.1 Take precautions to keep dirt and other foreign material out of the tendon, and from the inside of the trumpet and conduit.9.2.2 Power tools should remove loose mill scale, loose rust, loose or flaking paint, etc.Surfaces must be clean and smooth but not necessarily burnished after using power tools.9.2.2.1 Remove sharp edges, and smooth down remaining mill scale to a "feather-edge".9.3 At the discretion of the Owner's Representative fill scratches, nicks, and other sharp depressions in the gasket bearing surface with nonmetallic epoxy, such as "Belzona" epoxy. Use of epoxy shall be according to manufacture's application instructions.
9.3.1 Smooth
out epoxy to prevent grease leakage under the gasket.9.4 Remove all dust and loose matter from the vicinity of the tendon and entrance to the trumpet.9.5 Clean any foreign material from the three threaded bearing plate grease can mounting holes.9.6 Smear, swab or brush a coating of grease over all the exposed portions of the anchor head, bearing plate, shims, buttonheads and wires.9.7 A 3/4" thread chaser or tap may be required to clear the threads of the bearing plate's grease cap mounting holes so that the mounting studs can be sufficiently tightened to bottom in the threaded holes.9.8 Thread the three 3/4" studs in the three mounting holes of the bearing plate.9.9 Clean and dry the flange and gasket sealing surface of the grease cap.120 F&Q16.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 111 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 16.0 GREASE CAP REPLACEMENT August 29, 2008 Page 4 of 4 Revision 0 9.10 With the grease cap on end, apply adhesive to the grease cap gasket flange groove, in such quantity so as to hold the gasket in position.
Place the gasket onto the groove and allow it to dry for a few minutes. Pliobond or a similar industrial adhesive shall be used for gluing. Water soluble adhesives shall not be used.9.10.1 New gaskets shall be used in the final placement of the grease cap. Old or used gaskets may be used during temporary placement of the grease caps.9.11 Lift the grease cap and slide it onto the three mounting studs. For Hoop tendons the grease cap shall be placed so that the bushing (inlet, outlet) is oriented in its highest altitude or toward the top of the containment.
9.12 Be sure the gasket is in the groove of the flange and is seated against the bearing plate. Install the three washers and the three nuts to the mounting studs.9.13 Tighten each nut with a wrench, equalizing the load on each nut as well as possible.Tighten each nut in a gradual and even manner to allow the gasket to deform evenly until compressed and snug tight.9.14 If new studs, nuts, and washers are used, or grease caps and/or bearing plates are scratched, then the exposed surfaces shall be touched up with Carbo Zinc 11 ( or approved equal) per the manufacture's application instructions.
9.15 The replacement is now complete and regreasing can be performed observing the requirements of PSC Procedure F&Q 17.0.10.0 DOCUMENTATION 10.1 None required.11.0 ATTACHMENTS 11.1 None ATTACHMENT Z23R5 120 F&Q16.0.CR3.SGR Page 112 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 Precision Surveillance Corporation PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 17.0 GREASE. REPLACEMENT August 29, 2008 Page 1 of 5 Revision 0 PROGRESS ENERGY FLORIDA, INC.CRYSTAL RIVER NUCLEAR UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR.
REPLACEMENT PROJECT PRECISION SURVEILLANCE CORPORATION FIELD AND QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE GREASE REPLACEMENT LEVEL II: Q..C.08/29/08 Date Title PROJECT MANAGER, PRE 08/29/08 Date Title C L<AZ'14 PRESIDENT 08/29/08 Date'Approved by Title ATTACHMENT Z23R5 21 F W US f f a .Hoffjýc PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5
1.0 PURPOSE
1.1 This procedure will establish the requirements for the replacement of grease (sheathing filler) into the voids of tendons after all other work has been completed for the vertical and horizontal tendon work during the Steam Generator Replacement Project at Crystal River Unit 3.2.0 SCOPE 2.1 This procedure applies to those new tendons installed to replace those removed from the tendon voids and those de-tensioned but not removed as specified in the Work Package. This procedure may also be used for any other tendon as needed by Owner.3.0 RESPONSIBILITY
3.1 Owner
Field Construction Personnel shall be responsible for the physical activities associated with this procedure.
3.2 Owner
Quality Control Personnel to perform all inspections and data recording.
4.0 QUALIFICATIONS
4.1 Owner
Field Construction Personnel shall be fit by skill, training and/or experience to perform these duties.4.2 Owner Quality Control Personnel shall be qualified to a minimum of Level II capability in accordance with the requirements of ANSI N45.2.6.5.0 EQUIPMENT 5.1 Grease heating and storage system 5.2 Grease pumping system, miscellaneous grease hoses and fittings.5.3 Y-Devices 5.4 Thermometers
5.5 Miscellaneous
Tools, wrenches, ratchets, sockets, shackles, come-alongs, etc.5.6 Plastic bags, plastic sheeting (Visqueen), rags, buckets or drums for waste grease.ATTACHMENT Z23R5 121 F&Q17.0.CR3.SGR Page 114 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 17.0 GREASE REPLACEMENT August 29, 2008 Page 3 of 5 Revision 0 6.0 PRECAUTIONS 6.1 As in other heavy construction, care should be exercised while working from scaffolds, platforms, ladders, high or restricted access locations.
Respect for the* safety and well-being of the other trades and personnel in the area must be observed, especially during hoisting operations.
When grease is under pressure, personnel will wear face shields, coveralls, and gloves if within 10 (ten) feet of the process.6.2 During Grease Replacement, the grease may be pumped under pressure with an exit temperature of 140°F or higher. It is therefore essential to avoid direct contact with the hot grease and to make sure all connections are secure.CAUTION DURING GREASING THE GREASE IS HOT AND MAY BE PUMPED UNDER PRESSURE.
ALL FITTINGS AND FIXTURES THROUGHOUT THE SYSTEM WILL BE HOT AND COULD CAUSE INJURY.6.3 Spilled grease from hoses and voids could be a slipping safety hazard, during all operations it should be cleaned up and placed in waste drums.6.4 Pumping of grease should be stopped immediately if it is suspected or known that the grease is going somewhere else besides the immediate tendon void.7.0 QUALITY CONTROL DOCUMENTATION AND HOLD POINTS 7.1 All Quality Control Documentation (QCD) points noted in this procedure are Hold Points. The work shall not progress past or through a QCD without a verbal release from the Inspector.
8.0 PREREQUISITES
8.1 All other work has been completed on this tendon and the grease caps have been installed.
9.0 PROCEDURE
9.1 COMPLETE TENDON VOID REFILLING 9.1.1 The pumping pressure for complete tendon void refilling shall not exceed 100 psig at the point of installation for hoop tendons and 150 psig for vertical tendons.9.1.1.1 Notification
-Remove grease cap pipe plug from each end of the tendon and attach to the operating shaft of the Y-device.
The Y-device will be similar as seen in Sketch 8-1.121 F&Q17.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 115 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 17.0 GREASE REPLACEMENT August 29, 2008 Page 4 of 5 Revision 0 9.1.2 Connect the Y-device to the tendon end grease cap filler bushing on each end of the tendon, at outlet end push Y-device plunger in to open internal valve.9.1.2.1 The Y-device at the pumping end (inlet end) to have grease hose attached, the Y-device at the opposite end (outlet end) to have waste line attached.9.1.3 A grease control station shall be set up near the tendons to be filled and a communications network established so that the personnel at the furthest end of the tendon to be filled, will be able to communicate with the crew leader or control station attendant.
9.1.4 CAUTION
Operation of the system pressurizes the grease lines. Assure proper PPE. Re-check Y-plunger has opened the internal valve on the outlet by listening or feeling for air exiting during initial operation.
9.1.5 The grease will be pumped through the void at a temperature of 2200 to 260°F at the point of injection until it exits from the waste line and emerges clean and essentially free of air bubbles.9.1.5.1 QCD -Exit grease verified free of air bubbles onto Data Sheet F&Q 17.0 or Work Package Documentation.
9.1.5.2 QCD -Exit grease temperature (140°F minimum) and M&TE data onto Data Sheet F&Q 17.0 or Work Package Documentation.
9.1.6 Shut valve on the Y-device and when greasing is complete tighten grease cap pipe plug (the plug threads when replaced shall have an Owner approved thread sealant applied) and remove the Y-device.9.1.7 During tendon grease replacement, if the condition develops where there is no grease exiting the Outflow from the Opposite End of a Horizontal Tendon, or the Top End of a Vertical Tendon, Stop Work, notify the Owner for additional direction.
9.1.8 Clean-up any grease spillage and greasing is now complete on this tendon.Vented, spilled or waste grease shall not be reused.9.1.8.1 QCD -The amount of grease pumped into the tendon less any vented, waste or spillage to be recorded by the Inspector onto Data Sheet F&Q 17.0 or Work Package Documentation.
10.0 DOCUMENTATION 10.1 The items requiring documentation in this procedure shall be documented by the Owner Quality Control Inspector on Data Sheet F&Q 17.0 or Work Package Documentation.
121 F&Q17.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 116 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 17.0 GREASE REPLACEMENT August 29, 2008 Page 5 of 5 Revision 0 11.0 QUALITY CONTROL 11.1 Inspector to document on Data Sheet F&Q 17.0 or Work Package Documentation the information required for unit number, tendon number and date of greasing.11.2 Document that the exiting grease is clean and does not have air bubbles greater than 1/4 inch in diameter.11.3 Document the amount of grease pumped into the tendon less any vented, waste or spillage.11.4 Verify and document that no grease are leaking from the caps, that they are leak tight.12.0 NOTIFICATION 12.1 Work shall not proceed beyond a QCD, until Quality Control Inspector is notified.13.0 ATTACHMENTS 13.1 Data Sheet F&Q 17.0 13.2 Sketch 8-1 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 121 F&Q17.0.CR3.SGR Page 117 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 I PSC PROCEDURE F&Q 17.0 GREASE REPLACEMENT Data Sheet F&Q 17.0 August 29, 2008 Page 1 of 1 Revision 0)TENDON GREASE REPLACEMENT DOCUMENTATION PROJECT: CRYSTAL RIVER UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT TENDON NO.: DATE OF GREASING: EXIT GREASE CLEAN AND FREE OF AIR BUBBLES (Check)GREASE TEMPERATURE (At exit/outlet end) OF Thermometer I.D. Recal. Date (140°F minimum)AMOUNT OF GREASE PUMPED INTO TENDON (less waste and spillage):
GAL.CAPS LEAK TIGHT (Check) Pumping End Exit/Outlet End COMMENTS: Q.C. INSPECTOR SIGNOFF: LEVEL: DATE: Q.C. REVIEW: LEVEL: DATE: 121 F&Q17.0.CR3.SGR Page 118 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5
>I--1) u)z-n TYPICAL HOOK-UP FOR FILLING TENDON. VOIDS A -Grease Can Body B-Pipe C rae Can Filler Bushing Device ..Body m E-Male Quick Coupler B 13 C A)F-Operating Shaft& Handle-GSquare Male'Pipe Plug Wrench' m H-Pipe Plug m I-Casing Filler Hose CO z Fe -l Quick Couple r 0)!K- Packing Box L -Packing Box Gland G im- Relief Valve Optional CD CDD Being threaded into position O0 --. (n -'a -n C;o0- ca -- -0CI M PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PS PROCEDURE QA1o .0 CALIBRATION August 29, 2008 Page Ilof5.Revision 0 Precision Surveillance Corporation PROGRESS ENERGY FLORIDA,.
INC.CRYSTAL RIVER NUCLEAR UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT PRECISION SURVEILLANCE CORPORATION QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURE CALIBRATION OF MEASURING AND TEST EQUIPMENT Prepared by Approved by LEVEL il Q.C.08/29108 Date Title PROJECT MANAGER, P.E 08/29/08 Date, Title PRESIDENT 08/29/08 Date Title I ATTACHMENT Z23R5 2 2 Opfa 0 ' 0 iRs ge 6?býc PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE QA 10.0 CALIBRATION August 29, 2008 Page 2 of 5 Revision 0 1.0 PURPOSE 1.1 This procedure will establish the requirements for calibration of the Quality Control Test and Measuring Equipment to be used for inspection, testing and evaluation, during field operation of the Post-Tensioning System Tendons.2.0 CONTROLS 2.1 All calibrated test and measuring equipment shall be controlled for issue by the PSC Quality Control or Quality Assurance Section. The area of issue shall be indicated on the calibration records. The calibration records shall be maintained by the PSC Quality Control or Quality Assurance Section.2.2 PSC Quality Control personnel shall maintain a file or list of in-service devices requiring calibration, and periodically review those records to prevent any lapse in calibration.
2.3 The Quality Assurance Section shall review calibration records during audits of that operation being audited.2.4 All calibrated equipment shall be documented and identified by a label, tag, or log sheet indicating the status of calibration.
The control device shall identify the equipment, the date of calibration, date due for recalibration and the signature or initials of the person performing or verifying the calibration.
2.5 The identification control of the calibrated equipment shall be of such a nature so that the specific traceability of that device will not be lost; usually engraved or marked with a Quality Control code number.2.6 Any calibrated device that has been damaged, adjusted or repaired before the recalibration due date, shall be recalibrated before initial use, to assure the prescribed accuracy.2.7 There is no intent to apply calibration requirements on those devices such as rulers, tapelines, levels, etc. where normal commercial practices provide adequate accuracy, or where there is no need for accuracy.2.8 Procedures shall be provided for the calibration of special testing, measuring, inspection devices or other equipment requiring calibration and shall be controlled by the Quality Assurance Section or included in the Quality Manual for the project.2.9 The Rams which have been used for Monitoring Force, De-tensioning or Re-tensioning operations for the Post-Tensioning System Tendons shall be verified for calibrated status after the completion of the work.122 QA1O.O.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 121 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE QA 10.0 CALIBRATION August 29, 2008 Page 3 of 5 Revision 0 2.10 The documents for the calibration of Rams prior to starting the work and after completing the work shall be transmitted to Progress Energy per the requirements of the contract documents.
2.11 Equipment used to measure tendon force shall be calibrated prior to performing post-tensioning operations and within 3 months following completion of post-tensioning operations.
Accuracy of the calibration shall be within 1.5% of the specified minimum ultimate strength of the tendon. If the calibration results following post-tensioning operations differ by more than the specified accuracy tolerance from the pretest calibrations, the accuracy of the post-tensioning operations shall be evaluated.
3.0 OUT OF CALIBRATION
3.1 Devices
out of calibration shall be processed as non-conformances.
Devices out of calibration that are determined to have an adverse effect on quality shall have copies of that nonconformance report submitted to PSC Executive Management for review, and comments where applicable.
3.1.1 Nonconformance
Reports shall be drafted, submitted and distributed in accordance with the requirements of Progress Energy Procedures.
3.2 Instruments
that are found to be out of calibration shall be re-calibrated and a comparison made of the results of the new calibration and the out-of-calibration variance, if any. If no significant variation exists, the instrument shall be put back into service. In the event that a discrepancy exists, then the Engineering and/or Quality Assurance and Quality Control Sections shall make an evaluation of the discrepancy and the possible effect on the items processed with the out-of-calibration device, with regard to quality, accuracy or reliability.
If it is determined that a serious problem exists, then the Quality Assurance Section shall determine what items checked with the out-of-calibration device shall be rechecked with an effective calibrated device.3.3 Instruments that are found to be in excess of the required accuracy or tolerance band after being returned from Field Service, shall be controlled with Nonconformance Reports as required of Sections 3.1 and 3.2 of this Procedure.
4.0 TOOL AND GAUGE CONTROL 4.1 The calibration standards used to calibrate measuring and test equipment shall be traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) formerly National Bureau of Standards (NBS) and shall be controlled to an accuracy not to exceed a limit of 0.25% of the tolerance of the equipment being calibrated or the smallest used division of that instrument's scale, unless otherwise limited by "State-of-the Art" conditions.
Pressure Gauges used for Post-Tensioning System operations shall be excluded from this requirement and shall be defined for accuracy in separate procedures.
122 QA10.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 122 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE QA 10.0 CALIBRATION August 29, 2008 Page 4 of 5 Revision 0 4.1.1 For example, a micrometer that has a smallest scale reading of 0.001" shall be calibrated with a standard or device that has been calibrated to an accuracy of 0.00025" or less.4.2 All measuring and test equipment used for Quality Control Inspections shall have subdivisions or increments for measurements that are equal to or smaller than the tolerance of the parameter being measured.4.2.1 For example, a part needs to be controlled to a dimension of 9.365" with a tolerance of plus or minus 0.001". It would therefore be acceptable to perform that measurement with a device that is capable of measuring to 0.001" or smaller.4.3 Calibrated Devices may be extended for the stated period of frequency, where that device has been calibrated and placed into storage, rather than into service. The original frequency period stated in Section 5.2, Equipment List, shall always be observed.5.0 EQUIPMENT 5.1 The Equipment List shown in Section 5.2 of this Procedure contains those devices that are required for field operations or are used to calibrate devices that will be used during the field operations.
The required accuracy and frequency of calibration are stated for each device. It should be noted that the accuracy requirement is meant to be the tolerance band to which the device is being calibrated and not the original accuracy or the accuracy between calibration frequencies.
5.1.1 The term "DISS" in the Accuracy Column is defined as "Division of that Instrument's Smallest Scale".5.1.2 Where an asterisk ""* follows the accuracy dimension, this is meant to be that the dimension shown shall be verified with a Micrometer that reads to 0.0001".5.1.3 The procedures that are used to calibrate the various types of equipment, gauges or instruments used during the field operations, will accompany this procedure in the Field Quality Control Manual. These procedures provide information relative to the calibration of each device and may be used for purposes of calibrating these devices in the field, should that become necessary.
122 QA10.0.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 123 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE QA 10.0 CALIBRATION August 29, 2008 Page 5 of 5 Revision 0 5.2 EQUIPMENT LIST DEVICE FREQUENCY ACCURACY Load Cell (3000 Kips) 5 Years + .1% Entire System Load Cell (Approx. 50 Kips) 8 Years + .1% Entire System Rams/Jacks Beginning
& End Calculated to within (Stressing, Testing, etc. (B & E) of Project + 0.01" for Ram Area Dead Weight Tester 5 Years +0.10%Heise Digital Gauge 3 Years + 0.10%Pressure Gauge-Master (1/4%) B & E of Project + 30 psi Pressure Gauge-Stressing (1/4%) B & E of Project +/- 30 psi of Heise Pressure Gauges (1/2%) 1 Year + 55 psi of Heise (Not used for Stressing)
Micrometer 6 months + 1 DISS Micrometer-Checking
+ 0.0001" Bar Standard Thickness (Feeler) Gau2e Under 0.005" 6 months + 0.0005"*0.005" and Over 6 months + 0.0010" (* Verified with a 0.0001" micrometer)
Steel Ruler 1 Year + 0.0100" Steel Tapeline 1 Year + 1/16"/100' of lgth.Thermometer 1 Year + 1 DISS Optical Comparator (0.005") 1 Year + 0.0010" Dial Indicator 1 Year + 1 DISS 6.0 DOCUMENTATION 6.1.1 The various types of documents generated for calibration and/or status of calibrations will be described in the General Procedures for Calibration or contained within that procedure for a particular device. Others may be added as the need arises. Quality Control personnel shall prepare or assist in the preparation of these records. A copy of the calibration record shall accompany the calibrated device to the field.122 QA10.0.CR3.SGR Page 124 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 Precision Surveillance Corporation PSC PROCEDURE QA 10.11 CALIBRATION VERIFICATION August 29, 2008 Page 1 of 5 Revision 0 PROGRESS ENERGY FLORIDA, INC.CRYSTAL RIVER NUCLEAR UNIT 3 STEAM GENERATOR REPLACEMENT PROJECT PRECISION SURVEILLANCE.
CORPORATION QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURE VERIFICATION -OF CALIBRATED STATUS OF HYDRAULIC.
PRESSURE.
GAUGES'Prrepared by Aprella veu by " LEVEL I I; Q..Title PROJECT MANAGER, PE.Title PRESIDENT 0&29/08 Date 08/29/08 Date: o8M29108 Date Title ATTACHMENT Z23R5 23 S? c PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE QA10.1 CALIBRATION VERIFICATION August 29, 2008 Page 2 of 5 Revision 0 1.0 FIELD VERIFICATION OF PRESSURE GAUGES 1.1 The following procedure shall be used to verify the calibration of hydraulic pressure gauges during field operations.
These gauges may be used in stressing operations with the rams or other devices that require a measure of accuracy to produce quality results. Frequency and Accuracy of Calibration shall be controlled as stated in Section 5.2 of Procedure QA 10.0 Equipment List.2.0 GENERAL 2.1 Prior to being used for any work, all gauges shall be calibrated with the use of a Dead Weight Tester or the Heise Digital electronic pressure indicator.
2.2 In addition to the pressure gauges used during the field operations, one gauge, designated as the Master Gauge or a Heise Digital Gauge, shall be set aside for purposes of Calibration Verification during the process of the work. Prior to use the Master Gauge or Heise Digital Gauge used for Calibration Verification shall have been calibrated with a dead weight tester traceable to NIST.2.3 Owner Quality Control personnel shall maintain the controls for distribution and recall of each Pressure Gauge being used on site.2.4 A Pressure Gauge may be verified for calibration or accuracy at shorter frequencies than stated in Section 5.2 of Procedure QA 10.0. It is important that verification be performed any time that the gauge has been damaged, subjected to some physical abuse or there is some reason to suspect its accuracy.2.5 Pressure Gauges used for De-tensioning or Re-tensioning (Stressing) tendons of Post-Tensioning Tendon Systems of Nuclear Power Plants, shall be Verified for Calibrated status at least once a day during the operational use of those gauges.3.0 VERIFICATION OF CALIBRATION
3.1 Clean
and remove any dirt, grease or residue that could affect the accuracy of the calibration or use of the pressure gauge.3.2 At the option of the Owner Quality Control Section it shall be acceptable to use a Heise Digital Pressure Indicating Gauge for Calibration Verification of Pressure Gauges, rather than a Master Gauge.3.3 Attach the Pressure Gauge to the Calibration Pump of the Heise Indicator or Master Gauge.3.4 Close the back pressure valves before pressurizing the system.123 QA10.1.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 126 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE QA10.1 CALIBRATION VERIFICATION August 29, 2008 Page 3 of 5 Revision 0 3.5 Increase the hydraulic pressure to the point of the desired reading on the Pressure Gauge, usually 1,000 psi plus or minus 100 psi increments.
Take a reading of the Pressure Gauge and the Heise Indicator and document both on the Pressure Gauge Calibration Form.3.6 MASTER GAUGE (1/4% Accuracy)3.6.1 Where a Master gauge is used for verification of calibration, the master gauge and field gauge to be calibrated shall be connected to a common line (manifold) on a hydraulic pump. The pump shall be pressurized in no greater than 1,000 psi increments, plus or minus 100 psi, to the highest overstress pressure that shall be encountered during stressing activities; for example, 7,600 psi overstress will require calibration on that gauge to at least 7,600 psi. It shall be acceptable to go to 8,000 psi.3.6.2 The accuracy of a gauge verified in this manner shall be acceptable, if it reads to within 50 psi of any reading on the Master Gauge.3.7 HEISE DIGITAL GAUGE 3.7.1 A Pressure Gauge may be verified for calibration by connecting that gauge and the Heise Digital Gauge to a common line, which is in turn connected to a hydraulic pump and pressurized to the same values noted in 3.6.1 above.3.7.2 The verification accuracy of that Pressure Gauge shall be acceptable if it reads to within 30 psi of the Heise Digital Gauge reading for a 1/4 percent accuracy gauge or 55 psi for 1/2 percent accuracy gauge. As a 1/2 percent gauge cannot be accurately interpolated to increments of 5 psi it will be acceptable to take the reading to some point equal to or above 50 psi but not to exceed 60 psi.3.7.3 Pressure Gauges with an accuracy of 1/2 percent or greater shall not be used for Monitoring Force, De-tensioning or Re-tensioning operations of the Post-Tensioning Tendon System.3.8 With the Verification and Documentation of the Pressure Gauge being acceptable, the pump and gauge shall be depressurized and prepared for disassembly.
4.0 UNACCEPTABLE
CONDITIONS 4.1 If a Pressure Gauge fails to meet the accuracy requirements of Section 3.6.2 or 3.7.2 after being used for Stressing or De-tensioning operations, it shall be necessary to contact the Client and draft a Nonconformance Report in accordance with the PSC requirements, to control that Gauge and any Tendons worked with that Gauge.123 QA10.1.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 127 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE QA10.1 CALIBRATION VERIFICATION August 29, 2008 Page 4 of 5 Revision 0 4.1.1 Any Pressure Gauge not capable of meeting the stated accuracy requirements of Section 3.6.2 or 3.7.2 for the method of calibration being used shall be returned to the PSC shop for adjustment or repair. Any repaired or adjusted Gauge shall be recalibrated before use.4.1.2 ZERO ALIGNMENT (Zero Beating)4.1.2.1 On occasion, the Pressure Gauge Indicating Needle may not be in precise alignment with the Zero mark on the Gauge Face, necessitating realignment.
Before calibration the needle is to be realigned to the zero mark, with the realignment completed the Verification shall be performed and documented.
5.0 ACCURACY
VARIATIONS 5.1 Even though Pressure Gauges that have been calibrated or verified for calibration, variations in excess of the requirements of Sections 3.6.2 and 3.7.2 may be detected between calibrations or verifications.
In an effort to explain and control this deficiency, this Section shall be reviewed before the Verification of any Pressure Gauges.5.1.1 The accuracy of the calibration of Pressure Gauges or the verification of calibration is highly dependent on the accuracy of the reading of the location of the Pressure Indicating Needle on the Gauge Face. While there is an attempt to precisely align the needle with the Gauge Face Indicating Line, it is nearly impossible to maintain that control. In an effort to explain any variations that could be noted between calibrations or verifications, it is recommended that a notation be added to the Calibration Document to signify that the intended increment was not precisely obtained.
At that increment it would be noted that the value actually achieved was plus or minus an extrapolated pressure noted during the calibration.
5.1.1.1 For example: If the target increment on the gauge Face was intended to be 2,000 psi and the Indicating Needle was somewhat over the 2,000 psi line, perhaps enough to interpret as 10 psi, the notation on the Calibration Record would read: 2,000 psi +10 5.1.1.2 The requirements for Stressing or De-tensioning Tendons do not require the Pressure to be read any finer than 10 psi during the Inspections.
The Hydraulic Ram Calibration Procedure takes the reading error into account for Stressing or De-tensioning along with any other errors that may occur as a result of calibration or gauge reading, thereby maintaining the accuracy or integrity of the work being performed.
It is therefore necessary to document any minor variations during calibration or verification activities, so as to maintain the integrity of the accuracy of the Pressure Gauges.123 QA10.1.CR3.SGR ATTACHMENT Z23R5 Page 128 of 130 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE QA10.1 CALIBRATION VERIFICATION August 29, 2008 Page 5 of 5 Revision 0 16.0 DOCUMENTATION 6.1 6.2 A gauge Calibration Record form shall be prepared for each gauge being calibrated or verified.
All pertinent information as required by the form shall be posted during calibration or verification.
Calibration or verification documents shall be retained in the appropriate jobsite Quality file.7.0 ATTACHMENTS
7.1 Gauge
Calibration Record Form 123 QA1O.1.CR3.SGR Page 129 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 PCHG-DESG ENGINEERING CHANGE 0000063016R5 PSC PROCEDURE QA10.1 GAUGE CALIBRATION RECORD FORM August 29, 2008 Page I of 1 Revision 0 Project: CRYSTAL RIVER UNIT 3 -SGR Job #GAUGE CALIBRATION VERIFICATION RECORD DATE CHECKED MASTER GAUGE (PSI) JACK GAUGE (PSI)GAUGE I.D.MASTER GAUGE I.D.REMARKS Project: CRYSTAL-RIVER UNIT 3 -SGR Job #GAUGE CALIBRATION VERIFICATION RECORD DATE CHECKED MASTER GAUGE (PSI) JACK GAUGE (PSI)GAUGE I.D.MASTER GAUGE I.D.REMARKS 123 QA10.1 .CR3.SGR Page 130 of 130 ATTACHMENT Z23R5 R16 Shutdown Mode 3 -Mode 4 Mode 5 Mode 6 09/26/09, 09/26/09 09/26/09 10/01/09 0:00 1 9:00 J 17:00 1 18:00 T I I 1 1 T.Log entries in W.O.Notes / Remarks Date Time Plant Mode Photos I Reports 4 + 4 I 4. -_______Layout of Cut lines on RB face No QC visual examinations performed on the QC visual inspection of the cut area containment surface in the area of the lay-out / saw cut.(2 foot VT insp. Adjacent to the cut) (Source: Richard Griffith -SGR QC Lead 10/16/09)
N/A Initial layout cut saw cut was performed 9/21/09 -9/22/09. The cut was 1/2" deep. (Source: Richard 9/21/09 -Opening initial cut. lonelli -SGR Civil F.E. 10/16/09) 9/22/09 See Cliff Peters E-Mail 10/16/09 14:52 (PDF (R16 Tendon Detensiong sequence.pdf) in L:\Shared\CR3 Containm'ent\Containment Root Cause Files\Root Detensioning of 2 Tendons Cause\Tendon Surv Info Folder) Exceprt below 9/26/09 No lift-off force measurement were taken, tendon forces were only monitored for overstress when removing the Did they take a lift-off force shirms. (Source: Cliff Peters -SGR Tendon F.E.measurement? (Reports) 10/16/09)
N/A N/A N/A No abnormalites were noted when detensioning of the Any abnormalities noted during the tendons. All activities went as expected. (Source: Cliff detension?
Peters -SGR Tendon F.E. 10/16/09)
N/A N/A N/A See Cliff Peters E-Mail 10/16/09 14:52 (PDF (R16 Tendon cutting, date/time of each, Tendon Detensiong sequence.pdf) in L:\Shared\CR3 Plant Mode at time of each. Containment\Containment Root Cause Files\Root 9/26/09 -(sequence needed here, Reports) Cause\Tendon Surv Info Folder) Exceprt below 10/1/09 Any abnormalities noted during the cutting (any appear/sound less No abnormalites were noted when cutting of the tensioned or not energized as much tendons. All activities went as expected. (Source: Cliff as the others)? Peters -SGR Tendon F.E. 10/16/09)
N/A N/A N/A Removal of tendons, any No broken wires, water, excessive corrosion or other abnormalities (broken tendon wires) abnormalities noted during Tendon removal. (Source: noted? Cliff Peters -SGR Tendon F.E. 10/16/09)
N/A N/A N/A Vertical 34V12 -9/26/09 Ram De-tension 34V13 -9/26/09 Ram De-tension 34V8 -9/26/09 Plasma cut 34V9 -,9/26/09 Plasma cut 34V10 -9/27/09 Plasma cut 34V11 -9/27/09 Plasma cut 34V14 -9/27/09 Plasma cut 34V15 -9/27/09 Plasma cut 34V16 -9/27/09 Plasma cut 34V17 -9/28/09 Plasma cut Note: We de-tensioned 34V12 & 34V13 at the same time that the we started at 34V8 & worked counter clockwise to 34V17.Horizontal Note: All horizontal tendons were de-tensioned by plasma cutting starting at the bottom working toward the top.42H27 -9/26/09 42H28 -9/27/09 42H29 -9/28/09 42H30 -9/28/09 42H31 -9/29/09 42H32 -9/29/09 42H33 -9/29/09 421H-34 -9/30/09 53H27 -9/27/09 53H28 -9/28/09 53H29 -9/29/09 53H30 -9/29/09 53H31 -9/30/09 53H32 -9/30/09 Per Jon Burchett, Hydro-Dem began at the bottom of.the opening with 2 horizontal tendons at the top left to Start, of Hydro-Dem.
9/30/09 detension.
53H33 -9/30/09 53H34 -10/1/09